Home

Quantum 3.5.2 Marine Sanitation System User Manual

1. Note The rescan process disrupts any current activity because it places existing devices temporarily offline Be sure to use the Rescan function after hours or during times of system inactivity when you are certain no StorNext operations will be disrupted 1 From the SNSM home page choose Library gt Config Library from the Admin menu The Configure Library screen figure 126 on page 183 appears 2 Click Rescan to begin the rescan process StorNext User s Guide 185 Chapter 7 Managing Libraries Auditing a Library Auditing a Library Use this procedure to audit a library An audit is a physical check of each library component to verify its integrity and make sure the database and library are synchronized Quantum recommends that you audit the library after each restore 1 From the SNSM home page choose Library gt Audit Library from the Admin menu The Audit Library screen appears Figure 128 Audit Library Screen Quantum PE StorNext Home Help Feo toca aam Reports Het Audit Library Home pool aye meray to audit An suat is 3 physk eat chack ef each component cf the Ora yan a des ry bpe was Scala heg mar take ho n The Remap Audit o on secs the SNFS ep see s Galaba wath the librar SNSM Select Library Lbranes scsi_archivel F Remap Ande L Apply StorNext EE Aust ave kazar Warning SJ Loca naret 2 Select from the Select Library list the library you want to audit
2. fsmedinfo sdisk1 Media Information Report Media ID ddisk 0 Media Type DDISK Storage Area VolSub Class ID lt system blank gt Last Accessed 06 feb 2007 12 04 52 Media Status AVAIL Write Protect N Mark Status UNMARKED Medium Location SLOT BIN Formatted Y Number of Segments 0 External Location N A Total Blob Bytes 0 Unique Blob Bytes 0 Percent Eliminated 0 00 Bytes Used 4 780 195 840 Space Remaining 68 623 007 744 Percent Used 6 51 Suspect Count 0 Mount Count 0 FS0000 06 1703716962 fsmedinfo completed Command Successful Note The Space Remaining amount shown does not take into account the percentage of redundancy elimination it shows only the physical space remaining on the disk 369 Obtaining Distributed LAN Client Information Obtaining Distributed LAN Client Information The proxy Command The proxy long Command StorNext User s Guide If your StorNext configuration includes distributed LAN clients you can obtain information through three commands supported by the cvadmin command e proxy e proxy long proxy who Use the proxy command to display information about the distributed LAN servers for the file system In particular the IP address and port number on which the distributed LAN server is listening is shown This command requires that a file system be selected Command usage and output looks similar to this snadmin yy gt proxy Disk P
3. Back Next gt X Cancel 4 To remove individual media enter the media name in the Enter Media field and click OK The Complete Remove Move Media Task screen appears Go to Step 10 page 220 StorNext User s Guide 218 Chapter 9 Managing Media Removing and Moving Media 5 To remove multiple media click Browse The StorNext Media Browser screen appears Figure 159 StorNext Media F Media Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer TST Browser Screen Quantum StorNext Media Browser Current Media Class Blank Select Media Class Media Classes Media 1 3 of 3 Select All Blank MEDOOT Cleaning MEDO02 Backup MEDOO3 Deselect All OK X Cancel Y Apply 6 On the StorNext Media Browser screen select the Media Class to remove Blank Cleaning or Backup The StorNext Media Browser screen displays in the Select Media field all the media associated with the class you have selected The Current Media Class field shows the media class you just selected 7 Ifdesired you can use the Media Filter field to narrow your search of your selected media type For example to display all media with 01 in its name enter 01 where the asterisks are wild cards representing any characters before or after the specified search criteria 8 Select from the Select Media list the specific media you want to remove any number of media from one to all and then click OK to close the StorNext Media Browser screen The Select M
4. Note Only copies of the number you choose can be written to this disk For example if you select copy number 1 only files with that copy number can be written to the storage disk 5 Click Next The Complete Storage Disk screen appears Figure 181 Complete Storage Disk Screen Fj Add Storage Disk Microsoft Internet Explorer EE loj x Complete Add Storage Disk Task You have completed the necessary steps to add a Storage Disk Please review your selections and click Next to apply them or click Back to make changes Name Storage Disk 2 Directory stornext snfs2 al Copy 1 Deduplication Enabled Back Next gt X Cancel 6 Review information for the new storage disk Click Next to complete the task or Back to make changes 7 After the Status screen informs you that the storage disk was successfully added click Finish StorNext User s Guide 244 Chapter 10 Managing Storage Disks Modifying a Storage Disk Modifying a Storage Disk Figure 182 Modify Storage Disk Screen StorNext User s Guide Use this procedure to modify a previously configured storage disk 1 From the SNSM home page choose Storage Disk gt Config from the Admin menu The Configure Storage Disk screen figure 178 on page 241 appears 2 Select a storage disk from the Current Storage Disks list and then click Modify The Modify Storage Disk screen appears E Modify Storage Disk Microsoft I
5. 2 Select from the list the file system on which you want to perform File System Expansion Click Next to continue StorNext User s Guide 152 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Performing File System Expansion 3 A message reminds you that you must check your file system before beginning the expansion process Figure 98 Check File System Reminder Microsoft Internet Explorer x 2 You must check your file system before beginning this process Have you checked your file system Do one of the following e If you have not checked the selected file system click Cancel and then run the file system check as described in Checking the File System on page 148 e If you have already checked the selected file system click OK to proceed The Data Stripe Group Selection screen appears StorNext User s Guide 153 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Performing File System Expansion Figure 99 Data Stripe Group ZA File System Expansion Microsoft Internet Explorer Selection Screen Stripe Group Selection Quantum Currently Configured Stripe Groups Soe GIONS rr StripeGroup1 Metadata Journal Exclusive Enter the number of stripe groups you want to add to the file system ms Perform metadump Back L Ned gt X Cancel 4 The Data Stripe Group Selection screen shows all currently configured stripe groups Specify the number of data stripe groups you want to add to the file system
6. 3 If desired select the Remap Audit option to synchronize the StorNext and SNSM databases with the library databases Note Quantum recommends that you select the Remap Audit option If you are using an AML library the audit could take hours or days to complete Audits should be run when there are no other processes running on the library StorNext User s Guide 186 Chapter 7 Managing Libraries Changing the Library State 4 Click Apply The library audit launches and the Library Audit status screen appears 5 After the status screen informs you that the library audit was successful click Close Changing the Library State Figure 129 Change Library State Screen StorNext User s Guide This function allows you to change a library s logical state to online or offline Logical state means the library could be online but StorNext treats it as offline To physically take a SCSI library offline use the library s front panel To take a network library physically offline use the library s controller software 1 From the SNSM home page choose Library gt Library State from the Admin menu The Change Library State screen appears Quantum fl e StorNext Home Help me meda Admin Reports Help i ji Change Library State Select a library and cha k Home a logical state to online of offline The library may be online but StorNext wit teat as offing To take a SCSI library offing use the fr
7. Active T Reassive Recover Files from Mede NJ local introret 2 Select from the Select File System dropdown list the file system to which you want to restore the deleted directory 3 Select from the Select Directory list the directory you want to recover 4 If desired click the Details button to view all files and sub directories that will be restored when the selected directory is recovered 5 Click Apply to recover the selected directory 6 After the Status screen informs you that the operation was completed successfully click OK Retrieving a File This function allows you to retrieve an entire file or a portion of the file from media to disk If you retrieve a partial file you must give the file a new name to prevent overwriting the current version 1 From the SNSM home page choose Retrieve File from the File menu The Retrieve Files screen appears StorNext User s Guide 140 Figure 90 Retrieve Files Screen Retrieving a Directory StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Using the SNSM File System Functions ar d Quantum AN a StorNext Home Help Fio Modia Aamin Reports Heip I Retrieve Files Home Select files to retrieve from meda The retrieved file data from media is placed dack on ask You can retrieve he entre file or a porton of the SNFS Me E you retrieve a partal file you must give it a new name to prevent it kon oy erent version SNSM Enter Individual File Browse
8. Capturing the Current Use the following procedure to access the StorNext State Capture tool System State 1 From the StorNext home page choose Capture State from the Service menu The Capture System State screen appears Any previously captured snapshots are shown Figure 236 Capture System PF hs Quantum AA StorNext Home Hel State Screen SY 5 p Contig Admin Reports Service Help Capture System State Home Capture State gamers all log fles and core Mes within the system SNFS SNSM Number Captured State Size 1 snanshot 20070104175124 tar ar 1 008 756 kb ca ananshot 20070110150120 tar a 857 351 d Capture Download Delete X Cancel StorNext kazar Active i Bose Adminstration Page Alons the user to operate the product from one locaton el N Local intranet StorNext User s Guide 315 Downloading a Previous System Capture Figure 237 Download Capture File Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 13 Service Management Using State Capture 2 Click Capture The Capture State Status window is shown 3 When the Status window informs you that the capture was successful click Close After you have created at least one system capture you can select and download one of those tar gz files to view 1 From the StorNext home page choose State Capture from the Service menu A list of capture files stored in the directory usr adic www logs capture_state is shown This directory is where th
9. IF Backup execution could not complete There was an error connecting to database Thore was an error opening the fs_sysparna file TSM software is not runmng The backup staging directory could not be created The system could not store exclude on file systems The backup temporary directory could nat be created The file usr adic DSM config fsmlist 13 missang The file usr adic DSH config lt file system gt ctg is missing The metadata dump file for lt f1te system is missing e All copies of files not stored Store blos to media failed Store failed for backup files The problem IS resohed The problem has NOT been resolved This is a generic failure message Run the snbackup s command and examine the failure The database has not been started or is in a state that does not allow communication Restart the database software the usr adic TSM config fs_sysparn file cannot be located Contact the Quantum Techmeal Assistance Canter for assistance The StorNext TSM software is down Restart the software Verify that the file system used by the snbackup command is active and mounted Make sure soet user has permission to create new directories Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center o Venty that the file system used by the snbackup command s actwe and mounted o Make sure roor user has permission to create new drectones Check the usage by essung the snbackup h c
10. Use the following procedure to add new stripe groups and then move data off of the old stripe group 1 Label disks for the new stripe groups you want to add to the file system If your StorNext configuration includes a failover environment you must first shut down any standby FSMs that would start when you shut down the primary FSM The move procedure will not complete successfully unless all FSMs are shut down Caution If you do not shut down standby FSMs file system corruption or data loss could occur Optional Run the cvfsck command on the file system See Checking the File System Add the new stripe groups to the file system configuration and mark the old stripe groups as read only Make sure the old stripe group is write disabled 5 Stop the File System Manager FSM for the desired file system 6 Run cvupdatefs 7 Restart the FSM 373 Moving a Metadata Journal Stripe Group StorNext User s Guide 10 11 12 Using the Dynamic Resource Allocation Feature Run snfsdefrag G lt n gt m 0 r filesystemroot where lt n gt is the zero based number of the source stripe group from which the move starts and filesystemroot is the file name of the file system tree s root You can specify multiple G options to use multiple source stripe groups Verify that no data remains on the original stripe groups Edit the file system configuration to mark the old stripe groups as Dow
11. 386 Cleaning Media Expired RAS ee ees se sees 386 No Cleaning Media Available RAS iese sesse 387 Media Suspect Threshold Count Exceeded RAS 387 Media Format Failure RAS ees se see ee ee ee 388 Invalid Media Label Detected RAS se sees 389 Media Not Found RAS iese see ee se ee Ee ee ee ee 390 Duplicate Physical Media Found RAS 390 Storage Disk Taken Offline RAS ee se sees 391 Configuration Not Supported RAS se sees 392 Label Validation Failure RAS se see se se ee 392 Connection Rejected RAS ee ee ee ee 393 File System Failover RAS se sesse se se ee Ge ee 393 VO Error RAS 2 see ee ees eg eed ge ee eis 394 Journaling Error Detected RAS ese sesse se se 394 SNFS License Required RAS esse see ee 395 SNFS License Failure RAS ee ee ee ee 395 LUN Mapping Changed RAS eens 396 Communication Failure RAS eee 396 Metadata Inconsistency Detected RAS 397 Bad File System Metadata Dump RAS ese 397 Metadata Dump Failure RAS eee 398 File System or Metadata Capacity Warning RAS 398 File Processing Failure RAS cee se se ee 399 Missing LUNs RAS ee ee ee se Gee ee ee 399 StorNext User s Guide StorNext User s Guide Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Disk Space Allocation Failure RA
12. File Uist Select All Deselect All Opbonal Parameters Properties Y Apply Roset gt StorNext spock Active T Retrieve Fies bom Meda KJ tocn ntact 2 Do one of the following e Enter in the Enter Individual Filename field the file you want to retrieve You must enter the complete pathname e Click Browse to display the StorNext File Browser window On this window locate and select the files you want to store to media and then click OK On the Retrieve Files screen verify that the files shown are the ones you want to retrieve 3 If desired click the Properties button to view the properties for the files you are retrieving 4 Click Apply to retrieve the selected files 5 After the Status screen informs you that the operation was completed successfully click OK This function allows you to recursively retrieve copy a directory s files and sub directories from media and then place them back on disk 141 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Using the SNSM File System Functions 1 From the SNSM home page choose Retrieve Directory from the File menu The Retrieve Directory screen appears EE GEE MEE EE ET Figure 91 Retrieve Dir r or gure 91 Retrieve Directory EE PE StorNext Home Help Screen file Mega AOIN Repons Help I Retrieve Directory Home Select orectory to recursively remeve trom media The retvevec fies kom the directory ana its sub Grectores wil d pied from media and placed back on dist SNFS
13. Interface Screen Quantum Library Operator Interface gt vaultt STE EZE Mount Media Dismount Media Q sesi_archive1 Enter Media Eject Media X Close 12 Eject the media from the source library and then click the highlighted Eject Media button The LOI Eject screen figure 162 on page 221 appears 13 Select the media to be moved and then click Eject Click Close to continue The LOI screen reappears with the destination library flagged StorNext User s Guide 224 Figure 165 LOI Enter Screen Chapter 9 Managing Media Using the SNSM Media Functions 14 Move the media to the destination library and click the highlighted Enter Media button The LOI Enter screen appears 3 Stortext Library Operator Interface ER A scsi_archive1 enter Quantum Media IDs Select All Deselect All Details Please Select Port 16 7 Enter Fail 15 Click Eject to continue and then click Close The LOI screen reappears without flags or highlights 16 Click Close to finish Using the SNSM Media Functions StorNext User s Guide The StorNext Storage Manager s Media menu contains functions that enable you to accomplish the following tasks e Moving Media Manually e Mounting and Dismounting Media e Removing Media From the Storage Manager e Removing Media From the Storage Manager e Assigning Blank Media to a Policy Class 225 Moving Media Manually StorNext User s
14. e Clean Versions This scheduled event cleans old inactive versions of files StorNext User s Guide 59 Viewing a Schedule StorNext User s Guide Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Scheduling StorNext Events Full Backup By default a full backup is run once a week to back up the entire database configuration files and the file system metadata dump file Health Check By default health checks are set up to run every day of the week starting at 7 00 a m Partial Backup By default a partial backup is run on all other days of the week that the full backup is not run This backup includes database journals configuration files and file system journal files Rebuild Policy This scheduled event rebuilds the internal candidate lists for storing truncation and relocation by scanning the file system for files that need to be stored Note The Scheduler does not dynamically update when dates and times are changed significantly from the current setting You must reboot the system for the Scheduler to pick up the changes Each of these events initially has a default schedule but you can configure the schedules to suit your system needs The procedure for viewing an event s existing schedule is the same regardless of the event type 1 From the StorNext Home Page select Schedule Events from the Admin menu The Schedule Events screen appears 60 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Scheduling StorNext E
15. s Guide 51 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Controlling User Access 2 Inthe Enter User Name field type the name the new user will enter at the User ID field when he or she logs on to StorNext 3 Inthe Enter Password field type the password the new user will enter when logging on to StorNext 4 Inthe Re enter Password field retype the password you entered at the previous field 5 Select the type of access the user will have e Admin Defaults Enables access to the entire StorNext system including SNFS Advanced Functions SNSM Advanced Functions StorNext Home Functions and StorNext Reports e Operator Defaults Enables access to most of the StorNext Home Functions and StorNext Reports e General User Defaults Enables access to most of the StorNext Reports Each of the above selections auto populates the screen to correspond with your selection but you can customize access by clicking on specific items for the user 6 To simplify assigning access permissions you can click Select All or Deselect All for each category For example to grant permission to most StorNext reports click Select All and then deselect the reports for which you do not want to grant permission 7 When you are satisfied with the permissions you have assigned click OK 8 Click OK when the Status screen displays Success The User Access Control screen shows the new user you just added 9 Click Cancel to close the window StorNext User s Guide
16. 5 If you want StorNext to automatically perform a metadata dump after file system expansion is finished select the Perform metadump option This option appears only for managed file systems If you do not select this option a message warns you that backups on the file system will fail until you perform a metadump Click OK to proceed Figure 100 Metadump Warning Tee Backups on this file system will fail until you perform a metadump ay Are you sure you wish to disable the metadump after the expansion Lo ers StorNext User s Guide 154 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Performing File System Expansion Note If you proceed without selecting the Perform metadump option you should manually perform a metadata dump after file system expansion is finished to make sure your backups do not fail For information about performing a metadata dump see Performing a Metadata Dump on page 133 6 On the Data Stripe Group Selection screen click Next to continue The New Data Stripe Group screen appears Figure 101 New Data Stri pe 1 File System Expansion Microsoft Internet Explorer jol xj Group Screen New Stripe Group Quantum Enter a name for the new stripe group StipeGroup3 Select disks File System dev sds SNFS VTOC arwen01 Size 189 7 GB SNFS VTOC arwen02 Size 189 7 GB SNFS VTOC arwen03 Size 233 4 GB SNFS VTOC arwen04 Size 233 4 GB xl Label Type VTOC C
17. Enter the label name for the disk 4 Enter a name for the device or accept the displayed default name and then click OK A message window warns you all data will be lost if you label this device StorNext User s Guide 98 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Managing File System Operations Figure 61 Data Loss Warning Microsoft Internet Explorer j x 2 The Following device will be labeled disk010 devfrdskfc3t14d0s2 VTOC ALL DATA ON THE DEVICE WILL BE LOST Are you sure you want to label the selected device 3 Cancel 5 Click OK to continue and label the device The Label Disk Devices Status window appears 6 Click Close when the status displays Success The Label Disk Device screen now includes the label you created Caution Quantum recommends that you reboot nodes after you label or relabel a disk Rebooting ensures that the system recognizes the labeled or relabeled disk Unlabeling a Device Use the following procedure to unlabel a disk device 1 After selecting from the Disk Devices box the device you want to unlabel click Unlabel A message warns you that the device will be unusable after unlabeling Figure 62 Uniabel Warning x p WARNING This program will remove the volume label 7 From the device specified After execution the device will not be usable by the StorNext File System You will have to relabel the device to use it on the StorNext File System Do you wa
18. If the file list spans more than one screen page click Next to view the next page or Back to return to the previous page When you are finished selecting files for recovery click OK 5 On the Recover Files screen verify that the files shown are the ones you want to recover Click the Select All button to include all files 6 When you are ready to recover the selected files click Apply 7 After the Status screen informs you that the operation was completed successfully click OK Use this function to recover a deleted directory When you restore a directory the deleted files and inodes from the directory and its sub directories are recovered but the files are in a truncated state To retrieve the files you must use the Retrieve Directory function as described in Retrieving a Directory on page 141 Recovering a Directory Note When you use this function you must first select the file system to which you want to restore the deleted directory That file system must be started and mounted StorNext User s Guide 139 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Using the SNSM File System Functions 1 From the SNSM home page choose Recover Directory from the File menu The Recover Directory screen appears i i fz TEE N Figure 89 Recover Directory Quantum Po EET AS Screen tsa tosa Aamin Reports Hap Home SNFS SNSM Recover Directory mes d y Apply Details StorNext spock
19. LTOW 18 o None X Close 3 Click Close when you are finished viewing the report The Library Space Used Report The Library Space Used Report shows the amount in gigabytes of storage currently used by all configured libraries StorNext User s Guide 280 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Media Information Report Use the following procedure to run the Library Space Used Report 1 Choose Library Space from the Reports menu The Library Space Used Report appears Figure 208 Library Space Used e een ne eee eee ze Report Quantum Library Space Used Report This is the amount of nearline space used All used space on all media in all libraries except vaults All space used by files that were put on a storage disk or de duplicated storage disk This does not include dead space Space Used Current used storage is 0 54 GB X Close 2 Click Close when you are finished viewing the report The Media Information Report The Media Information Report provides the following information Copy The number next to the media ID in the upper left corner that refers to the corresponding copy In the illustration notice the 1 to the right of 000091 If the copy number does not exist this media has not been allocated to a policy class e Show Details link Click this link to view media dead space and files on that media See figure 212 on page 286 Depending on the number of files on the media it could take a
20. Launches the configuration wizard StorNext User s Guide 13 StorNext User s Guide Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview The StorNext Home Page Enter License Enter StorNext license information Add File System Add a file system to your environment Add Library Add a library or vault Add Tape Drive Add tape drive Add Media Add media Add Storage Disk Add a storage disk Add Storage Policy Add a storage policy and a directory relation point to a file system E Mail Notification Configure e mail notifications for System Status Tickets Backup information and Policy Class alerts Add Affinity Add an affinity to a file system Note For more information about the StorNext Configuration Wizard see Chapter 11 Data Migration Management Admin Menu Options The following Admin menu options enable you to control StorNext s day to day operations Access StorNext Logs Access logs of StorNext operations User Access Control Control user access to StorNext tasks Download Client Software Download SNFS client software This procedure is described in the StorNext Installation Guide Library Operator Interface Enter or eject media from the Library Operator Interface Remove Move Media Remove media from a library or move media from one library to another Run Backup Run a backup of StorNext software Schedule Events Schedule file system events including Clean Info Clean Versions Full Backup Partial Backup
21. The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www quantum com support StorNext User s Guide 392 SNFS RAS Messages Figure 22 Connection Rejected MaeemmenaeameiersMEEE nT RAS Connection Rejected IF THEN A client connection has Check the system logs to determine the root cause been rejected unexpectedly If the problem is caused by exceeding the maximum number of connections increase MaxConnections in the file system configuration file The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www quantum com support Figure 23 File System Failover oti Ae RAS File System Failover IF THEN A file system failed over Inspect the system log and the FSM cvlog to determine the root cause unexpectedly The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket a
22. Troubleshooting the StorNext Software IF THEN A senice ticket indicates software 1 Capture the StorNext system state issues including incorrect firmware levels Refer to Capturing a System State 2 Download the captured state Refer to Downloading a System State Capture 3 Stop and restart the StorNext software An VO error occurs on a path in a Check the system and RAID logs for SAN integrity multipath environment LUN communication failure A process or task dies and does not Check the FSM logs and system logs to determine the root cause If possible take corrective action restart If you suspect a software bug contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center You receive a message that the FSM is Verify that the FSM process for the specified file system is running on the metadata controller Also check the health delayed or the file system is not of the metadata network responding A health check operation is launched Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center with invalid command arguments To temporarily disable the invalid health check operation until a fix is delivered follow these steps 1 Locate the filelist file under usr adic that contains the health check entry for the failed operation 2 Place a character at the front of that health check entry line You receive an Internal Software Error 1 If you suspect there might have been a temporary problem with system resources rerun the health check m
23. e UNIX ID Fabrication on Windows Allows you to enable or disable using fabricated IDs an a per file system basis If enabled Windows user IDs are mapped using fabricated IDs The default value for enabling fabrication is based on the type of StorNext server you are using On Windows the default is No e UNIX Nobody UID on Windows UNIX user ID to use if no other mapping can be found e UNIX Nobody GID on Windows UNIX group ID to use if no other mapping can be found 4 Click Apply The Modify Global Setting Status screen appears 5 After the status screen indicates that the global settings were successfully modified click Close The SNFS fsnameservers file specifies machines serving as File System Name Server coordinator s to the fsmpm daemon The File System Name Server coordinator is a critical component of the StorNext File System Services FSS A principal function of the coordinator is to manage failover voting in a high availability configuration Therefore it is critical to select highly reliable systems as coordinators Redundancy is provided by listing multiple machine entries in the fsnameservers file one entry per line The first machine listed is the primary coordinator and any 104 Making or Unmaking a File System StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Managing File System Operations subsequent machines listed serve as backup coordinators To create redundancy it is recommended
24. ee ie se ee ee se ee He ee ee 212 Complete Add Media Task Screen 00 sesse see ies 213 Select Media Type Screen iese se se ee ee se ee ee 214 Add Media IDs Screen se see se ee ee ge ee ee 215 Create New Media ID Screen se se see see 216 Remove or Move Media Screen esse se see ee 217 Select Media Screen ees se cece ee Ee ee ee ee 218 StorNext Media Browser Screen esse ee 219 Complete Remove Move Media Task Screen 220 Library Operator Interface Screen ees sees ee 221 StorNext User s Guide StorNext User s Guide Figure 162 Figure 163 Figure 164 Figure 165 Figure 166 Figure 167 Figure 168 Figure 169 Figure 170 Figure 171 Figure 172 Figure 173 Figure 174 Figure 175 Figure 176 Figure 177 Figure 178 Figure 179 Figure 180 Figure 181 Figure 182 Figure 183 Figure 184 Figure 185 Figure 186 Figure 187 Figure 188 Figure 189 Figure 190 LOLEj GESEreem eise Ese ESE eek token eed eek bianca ieee 221 Select Destination Library Screen ese ee ee eek 223 Library Operator Interface Screen oo esse ee ee eek 224 EOLEnter Screens nain ee Ee Re se dee eke n ree orden 225 Manually Move Media Screen esse se see se ee ee ge ee 227 Media Browser Screen ie ie ee se ee ee He Ge ee Ee Ee Gee ee 227 Mount Media GCreeT ie bees bees ie see ee e se ERK se ees gee Ee eke ED 229 Dismount Media Screen ie see ee ee Ee ee ee ee ee 230 Remove Media From SNSM Screen esse se see ee se se see ee ee 231 A
25. feo Media Admin Reports Help Cancel Eject Process Select media trom the list to cancel the eject process for Mat media The media remains in the assigned vor Home SNFS SNSM B Select All LY Apply Rose StorNext spock Active Ej Cancel Eject SJ load nveret 2 Select from the Media ID list the media for which you want to cancel the eject process If necessary select a library from the Library list to view and select media in that library To select all media in the Media ID list click the Select All button 3 Click Apply to cancel the eject process for the selected media 4 When the Status screen informs you that the operation was successful click OK 238 m Managing Storage Disks f Chapter 10 C StorNext provides the ability to configure storage disks that function and operate the same way as physical tape media Storage disks are external devices on UNIX based file systems that can be used for long term data storage When a storage disk is configured the StorNext Storage Manager moves data to storage disks for long term retention in addition to or instead of tape This enables users to leverage the specialized third party functionality of appliances or store small files that might take longer to retrieve from tape Many users will still use tape for long term storage and vaulting but storage disk can be used to create tape free archives Here are a few differences storage disks have over tap
26. see the man page for fsaddrelation 1 From the StorNext home page choose Add Storage Policy from the Config menu The Storage Policy Introduction screen appears showing any previously configured policy classes Figure 186 Storage Policy Introduction Screen 1 Add New Storage Policy Microsoft Internet Explorer Storage Policy Introduction Policy classes logically segregate and control data Policy class parameters determine file migration and truncation rules Each policy class is a collection of files located under one or more relation points directories Configured policy classes ipolicyclassi policvyclass2 policyclass3 ae Prova tt Backup Tape StorNext 4 Next gt X Cancel 2 Click Next to continue The Policy Class and Directory screen appears StorNext User s Guide 254 Chapter 11 Data Migration Management Adding a Storage Policy Figure 187 Policy Class and Directory Screen 3 Add New Storage Policy Microsoft Internet Explorer o jol xi Policy Class and Directory Select a policy class and associate it with a directory under a managed file system To use Stub Files a license must purchased from Quantum Policy Class Name policyclass3 Click Browse to select a directory with files to be migrated to media Disk Browse NEE I Enable Disk To Disk Backup Tape I Enable Checksum Generation I Enable Checksum Validation I Enable Stub Files amp S
27. stornext8 adic com 10 16 50 14 47161 64K 256K 16 8 Luns ha stornext1 on device sdbe A sdn S sectors 622823584 sector size 512 X Close The File System LAN Client Report StorNext User s Guide Click Close when you are finished viewing the report The File System LAN Client Report provides the following information File System Name The name of the file system that supports the indicated distributed LAN server Distributed LAN Server Name The name of the distributed LAN server on the indicated file system Distributed LAN Client Name The name of the distributed LAN client for the indicated file system and distributed LAN server 308 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The File System LAN Client Report e Read The speed at which the distributed LAN client is currently reading data e Write The speed at which the distributed LAN client is currently writing data Use the following procedure to run the Distributed LAN Client Performance Report 1 Choose SNFS gt LAN Client Performance from the Reports menu The File System Distributed LAN Client Statistics Report screen appears Figure 231 File System Z Report Distributed LAN Client Statistics Microsoft Internet Explorer Distributed LAN Client Statistics Report Screen File System Distributed LAN Client Statistics Report Select one or more active file systems to include in the report This report shows real time distributed LAN client read write statistics
28. 350 StorNext User s Guide shuts down a degraded MDC and then reboots it so that on recovery it becomes the standby MDC in the event future MDC failover is required While other methods of failover are available such as quorums STONITH is the only widely acknowledged method of reliable failover control especially for software that runs on multiple operating systems Without STONITH there is the possibility that a damaged MDC could continue acting as the primary MDC and attempt to handle client IO requests or move data between storage tiers For shared file systems STONITH is especially critical because a MDC controls access for multiple hosts reading and writing to a single volume and potentially the same file Currently MDC failover is only supported when configured by Quantum Solutions Engineering staff 351 StorNext User s Guide G Appendix C Using The Command Line Interface Quantum recommends using the GUI to complete most StorNext tasks but there may be situations where you need to use the command line interface instead This appendix describes how to use the command line interface for the following tasks Labeling Disk Devices Modifying Global Settings Making a File System Starting and Stopping SNFS Unmounting or Mounting a File System Creating a File System Server Adding a File System Client Configuring a Stripe Group Adding an Affinity Creating a Disk to Disk Policy Class Enabling Stub Fil
29. 5 and then reboot again In future releases upgrading from StorNext 3 5 should not require a reboot after installing If you are using the StorNext client software with Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 Windows XP or Windows Vista turn off the Recycle Bin in the StorNext file systems mapped on the Windows machine You must disable the Recycle Bin for the drive on which a StorNext file system is mounted Also each occurence of file system remapping unmounting mounting will require disabling the Recycle Bin For example if you mount a file system on E and disable the Recycle Bin for that drive and then remap the file system to F you must then disable the Recycle Bin on the F drive As of release 3 5 StorNext supports mounting file systems to a directory For Windows Server 2003 and Windows XP you must disable the Recycle Bin for the root drive letter of the directory mounted file system For example For C MOUNT File_System you would disable the Recycle Bin for the C drive For Windows Server 2008 and Windows Vista you must disable each directory mounted file system For Windows Server 2003 or Windows XP 1 On the Windows client machine right click the Recycle Bin icon on the desktop and then click Properties 2 Click Global 3 Click Configure drives independently 4 Click the Local Disk tab that corresponds to the mapped or directory mounted file system 5 Click the checkbox Do not move files to the
30. 6 hours For each log 28 instances 7 days of logs are retained Log instances are retained in the same directory as the original log All log files which are rolled are affected by this change including TSM logs tac_00 bp_ log hist_01 etc MSM logs tac_00 hist_01 etc and any other components configured for rolling The lt component gt config filelist file contains roll_log entries that determine which files are rolled where lt component gt is usr adic TSM usr adic MSM etc The StorNext Library Space Used Report accessible from the StorNext home page by choosing Library Space from the Reports menu shows the amount of nearline space used The nearline space amount does not include dead space but does include the following e All used space on all media in all libraries except vaults e All space used by files that were put on a storage disk or de duplicated storage disk The StorNext GUI does not support an isolated metadata network topology with a system configured for HA failover If the browser does not have connectivity to the isolated metadata network then it will fail to connect after a failover event If you have an isolated metadata network topology make sure the browser has connectivity to the isolated metadata network or correct the network topology so the browser has connectivity to the isolated metadata network For more information contact Quantum Global Services StorNext User s
31. A StorNext Eaman gandalf L sets 1 2 Select from the Source Archive dropdown list the source library that contains the media you want to move 3 Click Browse when you are ready to flag specific media for moving manually The Media Browser screen appears ZA Media ID Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 227 Mounting and Dismounting Media StorNext User s Guide Chapter 9 Managing Media Using the SNSM Media Functions On the Media Browser screen select from the Select Media list the media you plan to move manually If desired you can reduce the number of entries in the media list by entering a filter in the Media Filter field This field accepts the wildcard character asterisk You can also select all media by clicking the Select All button 5 Click OK after you are finished selecting media 6 Select from the Destination Archive dropdown list the destination 10 library to which you plan to manually move the media you just selected When you are ready to flag the selected media for moving manually click Apply When the Status screen informs you that the media have been successfully flagged for moving manually click Close Complete the process by manually removing the media from the source library Access the Library Operator Interface from the StorNext home page by choosing Library Operator Interface from the Admin menu To enter media into the destination library select the destination libra
32. Chapter 8 Managing Drives and Disks e Chapter 9 Managing Media e Chapter 10 Managing Storage Disks e Chapter 11 Data Migration Management e Chapter 12 StorNext Reports e Chapter 13 Service Management e Chapter 14 Customer Assistance e Appendix A Operating Guidelines e Appendix B HA Failover StorNext User s Guide 3 Chapter 1 Introduction Notes Cautions and Warnings e Appendix C Using The Command Line Interface e Appendix D RAS Messages Se a Notes Cautions and Warnings The following table describes important information about Notes Cautions and Warnings used throughout this guide Description Definition Consequences Note Indicates important No hazardous or information that helps damaging consequences you make better use of the software Caution Advises you to take or Failure to take or avoid avoid a specified action this action could result in loss of data Warning Advises you to take or Failure to take or avoid avoid a specified action this action could result in physical harm to the user or hardware StorNext User s Guide 4 Chapter 1 Introduction Document Conventions Se E Document Conventions This guide uses the following document conventions to help you recognize different types of information Conventions Examples For all UNIX based TSM control stop commands the prompt is is the same as implied although it is not TSM contro
33. Configure Email Address screen see figure 41 on page 70 key information about a completed backup is emailed to the address you specify This email contains the following important information e The required media for restoring from a complete set e Names of configured storage disks or deduplication storage disks e Any SNFS configuration files for file systems that are not data migration enabled are appended to the email 77 Chapter 5 Backing Up StorNext Performing a StorNext Software Backup Performing a StorNext Software Backup Use the following procedure to manually run a StorNext backup 1 From the StorNext home page select Run Backup from the Admin menu The Backup StorNext screen appears Figure 45 Backup StorNext Screen Z Backup StorNext Microsoft Internet Explorer StorNext User s Guide 78 Chapter 5 Backing Up StorNext Managing the Backup Policy 2 Select the type of backup you want run Full or Partial and then click Next The Complete Backup Task screen appears Figure 46 Complete Backup E Backup StorNext Microsoft Internet Explorer Task Screen Complete Backup Task You have completed the necessary steps to back up the StorNext software Click Next to start the backup or click Back to make changes To return to the Intro page click Back Backup StorNext Backup Type Partial Backup Backup Tape StorNext lt 4 Back Next gt X Cancel 3 Click Next to start
34. Contaure aonais 3 Aud gs 4 Add stripe groups 5 Make the file system 6 3 n fii vi 7 Mount ne tie system Foe Systems snis2 bd Stripe Groups in snfs2 amma SNPE GOUE Add Modify Delete amp kazar Active lE AddModify Delete Stripe Groups N Local ntranet 2 From the File Systems drop down menu select the file system to which you want to add a stripe group and then click Add The Add Stripe Group screen appears 114 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Stripe Groups Figure 70 Add Stripe Group 4 Add Stripe Group Microsoft Internet Explorer Screen Quantum Add Stripe Group Stripe Group Name Stripe Breadth Kilobytes 64 7 Available Disks Disks In Stripe Group Available Afinities Affinities In Stripe Group MetaData Journal 7 Exclusive Realtime lO sec Non realtime lO sec Realtime l MBisec Non realtime MB sec OK X Cancel 3 Enter the fields on the Add Stripe Group screen e Name The name of the new stripe group e Breadth The breadth size is the number of file system blocks the system reads writes before moving to the next disk in the stripe group This value should be optimized for the major application that uses the disks The selectable breadth values range from the size of the file system block size to a maximum of 8192KB The default setting is 64KB e Available Disks Disks available to the stripe group
35. Distributed LAN Clients StorNext User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction reconfigure applications to retrieve data from disparate locations Instead applications continue to access files normally and SNSM automatically handles data access regardless of where the file resides As data movement occurs SNSM also performs a variety of data protection services to guarantee that data is safeguarded both on site and off site StorNext supports distributed LAN clients Unlike a traditional StorNext SAN client a distributed LAN client does not connect directly to StorNext via fibre channel or iSCSI but rather across a LAN through a gateway system called a distributed LAN server The distributed LAN server is itself a directly connected StorNext client but it processes requests from distributed LAN clients in addition to running applications Any number of distributed LAN clients can connect to multiple distributed LAN servers StorNext File System supports Distributed LAN client environments in excess of 1000 clients and should support deployments as large as 5000 clients File system aggregate throughput is not adversely impacted Besides the obvious cost savings benefit of using distributed LAN clients there will be performance improvements as well Distributed LAN clients must be licensed in the same way as StorNext SAN clients When you request your permanent StorNext license you will need to specify the number of distributed L
36. EFI Label Help Enter the stripe breadth for the stripe group This is the A number of EE that is read from or written to each disk in S te stipe fe z tanas Z select if planning to use stripe group for metadata or user data Metadata User Data Back Next gt X Cancel 7 Enter values for the New Stripe Group screen e Name field The name of the stripe group e Select disks list The disks available to assign to the stripe group You must select at least one disk for each stripe group StorNext User s Guide 155 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Performing File System Expansion e Label Type If you plan to create LUNs larger than 2TB you must specify the EFI label type when configuring a file system VTOC labels were used for all operating systems in previous StorNext and Xsan releases and are still required for the SGI IRIX operating system Solaris releases prior to Solaris 10 Update 2 and LUNs less than 1TB EFI labels are required if you plan to create LUNs that are larger than 2TB For Solaris EFI labels are also required for LUNs with a raw capacity greater than 1TB EFI labels will not work with the IRIX operating system The correct value is automatically selected on the New Stripe Groups screen so you can accept the default value unless you have a reason to change the label type For more information about 2TB LUN requirements see the StorNext Installation Guide
37. ESE eek 202 D leting a Drive Pool esse rd er dese Beek eke Gee es aiak 204 Managing Disk Space RA N EE EE N EE OE 205 Changing Watermark Parameters esse se see ee ekke ee Re be gek ER SR ee ER RR ee 206 Chapter 9 Managing Media 208 Adding Media to a Configured Library u iese se ee ee ge ee ek ee ee ek 208 Addinga Vat os wicsscssesssscsesessdssecchesosonsvenensbesoteisveenssiessndenbvnesseanssvensbeoty cs 214 Removing and Moving Media iese see se se ee Ee ee Ge ee ge ee ee Ee eek 217 REMOVING Media se siisecisssssvensitiesecenosseoseseesidnosenesscsenvenessionauenensbdbesvenabionass 217 Moving MEd ia RE EE EE EE EE 222 Using the SNSM Media Functions cece se se ge ee ee ek ee ee ek 225 Moving Media Manually cece ee ee ee Ge Ge ee Ge Ge ee Ge ee He Ge ee 226 Mounting and Dismounting Media esse see ee se ee Ge Ge ee Ge ee ee 228 Removing Media From the Storage Manager uie se see se ee 230 Assigning Blank Media to a Policy Class se see ee se se ee Ge ee ee 231 THAMSCTIDING EE EE ER EE 232 Changing Media Attributes ees se see ee ee Gee ee Ee ee ee ee ee eke 234 Reclassifying a Media Class Grouping esse se see ee se se Ge ee Ge Gee 235 Cleaning Media sees ske ee Eko BEK WG rni a Gene ERe ese koe ER Ven VA RR 237 Cancelling the Eject Media Process 00 0 0 esse ee ee ee ee ee ee ek ee ee 238 EE AE EE EE MR AE AE EE Chapter 10 Managing Storage Disks 239 Storage Disk DeduplicatOn ss sesse seke seek Ge gek KERR GE
38. FSM for the file system 2 If your StorNext configuration includes a failover environment you must shut down any standby FSMs that would start when you shut down the primary FSM The movement procedure will not complete successfully unless all FSMs are shut down Caution If you do not shut down standby FSMs file system corruption or data loss could occur Optional Run the cvfsck command on the file system See Checking the File System Run sndiskmove lt source LUN label name gt lt destination LUN label name gt where lt source LUN label name gt is the source stripe group from which the move starts and destination LUN label name is the destination stripe group to which you want to move data During the move process StorNext appends old to the source stripe group name This is to avoid confusion because the destination stripe group is given the same name as the original stripe group Both stripe group names remain in the configuration file 375 Specifying an Alternate Retrieval Location For example source LUN label name the original stripe group name becomes source LUN label name old destination LUN label name the new stripe group name becomes source LUN label name the same name as the original stripe group Note When you run sndiskmove it could take a considerable amount of time to copy the data between disks depending on disk size and performance 5 Only if y
39. Guide 349 StorNext User s Guide Appendix B HA Failover StorNext is designed to be a resilient data management solution StorNext supports operation in degraded mode and provides functionality to guarantee data protection in the event of a storage device failure or total site outage For certain environments though additional protection is required to deliver a higher level of availability To meet these demands StorNext includes MetaData Controller MDC failover MDC failover allows a secondary MDC to take over StorNext operations in the event a primary MDC fails Failover is supported for all StorNext management operations including client IO requests File System and data mover operations Storage Manager MDCs in a failover pair typically run in an active passive configuration but both MDCs can be configured to run active File System processes In the event one MDC fails the other continues to perform its current operations as well as those of the failed MDC Note Active Active Storage Manager processes are not currently supported in MDC failover Like all failover solutions StorNext must provide functionality to prevent a damaged or inaccessible MDC from incorrectly processing IO requests that should be handled by the active MDC often referred to as a split brain scenario To handle this StorNext utilizes a special failover methodology call STONITH shoot the other node in the head STONITH
40. Help I Modify File Attributes Home Select files anc modify Ne assoosted policy ass amDutes or change the number of tle copies to Save on meca during storage SNFS SNSM Select Indridual Fae Browse File List Select All Deselect All Number of Copies C ONE C TWO C THREE C FOUR Truncation Options C Aner Store C During Cleanup C No Truncation the Sere By Policy User Set lt StorNext spock Active C Modify Fie s Attitutes SJ loca beet 2 Do one of the following e Enter in the Select Individual File field the file whose attributes you want to modify You must enter the file s complete pathname e Click Browse to display the StorNext File Browser window On this window locate and select the files whose attributes you want to modify and then click OK 3 Specify the number of copies to maintain for each selected file One Two Three or Four 4 Indicate whether to truncate files after storing during the file cleanup process or not at all 145 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Understanding Dynamic Resource Allocation 5 If the Stub File feature is enabled indicate how StorNext determines the stub file size e By Policy Use the stub file size entered when the storage policy was created e User Set Change the stub file size by entering the new size in kilobytes at this field 6 Click Apply to modify attributes for the selected files After the Status screen informs you that the operatio
41. Home Help Pie Meas _ Aamin Repons Heip I Clean Media either the fie syst dime The removes inactive me Home SNFS SNSM Fle System File Systems stoment sntsT Engume lormat YYYY2aN D0 ntomm s5 Meas Policy Classes Media O s Polcy Classes Storage_Disk_1 _adic_backup policyciass StorNext spock Active El Remove tractive Fies N Local ngraret 2 Do one of the following Select from the File System list the file system you want to clean e Select from the Media list IDs for specific media you want to clean Select from the Policy Class list specific policy classes you want to clean 237 Cancelling the Eject Media Process Figure 177 Cancel Eject Process Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 9 Managing Media Using the SNSM Media Functions 3 Specify at the Endtime field an ending time for the cleaning process using the format YYYY MM DD hh mm ss For example enter 2007 12 06 10 08 00 for an endtime of 10 08 on December 6 2007 4 Click Apply to start the cleaning process When the Status screen informs you that the operation was completed successfully click OK Use this function to cancel the eject process for selected media The media remains in the assigned slots 1 From the SNSM home page choose Library gt Library State from the Admin menu The Cancel Eject Process screen appears oe Quantum ko a StorNext Home Help
42. In consideration of Licensee s payment of the License fees for StorNext Software and subject to the terms of this License Quantum grants to Licensee a personal non exclusive non transferable license to use the StorNext Software Software is defined as the current version of the software products accompanying this license agreement in object code form only A separate license is required for use of each of StorNext Software program on each of Licensee s computers The Software will be installed initially on Licensee s Designated Computer Licensee may thereafter transfer the Software to another one of its computers of the same machine architecture provided that the Software is installed on one 1 Designated Computer at a time A License transfer Request must be made via Quantum Support b Use Licensee is authorized hereby to use the Software on one computer only Designated Computer or on backup equipment if the Designated Computer is inoperative until such time as the Designated Computer is restored to operation This grant is specifically limited to use by the Licensee for normal customary internal data processing and specifically excludes Licensee s time sharing or the rental of the Software or use of the Software in the development or marketing of a competitive or compatible product No right to use print copy or display z If you want to configure and use StorNext you must accept the preceding agreement Do you agree to accept all of the t
43. Label Help Click this link to display guidelines for determining whether to select VTOC or EFI labels See figure 54 on page 89 Stripe breadth drop down menu The stripe breadth for the file system The stripe breadth is the number of kilobytes KB that is read from or written to each disk in the stripe For a typical StorNext installation 64KB is the recommended setting e Metadata or Data Specify whether you plan to use the stripe group for data or for metadata 8 Click Next to continue If you are entering more than one stripe group your choices are saved and you are ready to make selections for the next stripe group Repeat step 5 for each stripe group you are adding If you are adding only one stripe group the Complete File System Task screen appears after you click Next StorNext User s Guide 156 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Performing Stripe Group Movement Figure 102 Complete File Z File System Expansion Microsoft Internet Explorer i lol x System Task Screen Complete File System Task Quantum e You have completed the necessary steps to expand your file system Please review your selections and click Next to expand the file system or click Back to make changes er File System Number of Stripe Groups Added 1 New Stripe Group StripeGroup2 Stripe Breadth 64 Kilobytes Label Type VTOC Disk s dev sdb Back Next gt _X Cancel 9 Click Next to complete
44. Library gt Dismount from the Media menu The Dismount Media screen appears StorNext User s Guide 229 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using the SNSM Media Functions Figure 169 Dismount Media T T E S Quantum FY a StorNext Home Help creen TE gi File Meda Admin Reports Help l Dismount Media Home Select IO and remove te media from the drive In an sulomated library his places the medi iL in a manual library the Library Operator interface LON prompts you to physically SNFS aeamount me media SNSM Select Medio 10 Select Drive 1D 00007 bd sesi_archvel drn LY Apply Rosat StorNext spock Active 2 Select either a Media or Drive ID from the drop down menu Depending on which ID you selected the information in the other field automatically populates 3 Review your selections and click Apply 4 After the Status screen informs you that the operation was successful click Close Removing Media From Use this function to remove media from the StorNext Storage Manager the Storage Manager When you use this function all files are removed from the selected media and the media is ejected from the library into the EIF mailbox StorNext User s Guide 230 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using the SNSM Media Functions 1 From the SNSM home page choose Remove from the Media menu The Remove Media From SNSM screen appears ee Figure 170 Remove Media Quantum i gs Anne Home Help From SNSM Screen EF GE ETER i R
45. Microsoft Internet Explorer Bile Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Quantum Relation Information Report Managed Directory Policy Class stornext snfs1 ADIC_INTERNAL_BACKUP _adic_backup Managed Directory Policy Class Istornext snfs1 pc1 policyclass1 Managed Directory Policy Class stornext snfs1 pcfilltest policyclass2 Managed Directory Policy Class stornext snfs1 greg policyclass3 X Close 3 Click Close when you are finished viewing the report EE GE N EE ee EE Dee De ae ee ge Ee ee ed The Request Information Report StorNext User s Guide Use the following procedure to run the Requests report 1 Choose Requests from the Reports menu The Requests Report screen appears 292 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Scheduler Information Report Figure 217 Request Report 101 xi Screen Requests Report Select one or more request IDs to include in the report This report provides information about requests including the type of the request priority and the current status The following page allows you to get information on one or more Request Id s Select from one or more of the running Request Id s listed below Request ID List Select All Deselect All VY Apply X Cancel 2 Select from the Request ID list one or more request IDs on which to run the report and then click Apply The Request Information Report appears 3 Click Close when you are finished viewing the report Th
46. Name Run Days Start Time Window Last Run Last Run Status rebuild_default sat 01 05 3 hours Jan 13 2007 01 05 00 Successful X Close 3 Click Close when you are finished viewing the report The Storage Disk Information Report The Storage Disk Information Report provides the following information e Name The name of the storage disk for which the report was run e Mount Point The storage disk s mount point of the storage disk Copy The copy ID for media on the storage disk StorNext User s Guide 295 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Storage Disk Information Report e of Streams The number of streams that can simultaneously access the storage disk e Status Shows if the storage disk is currently available or offline e Write Protected Indicates whether the storage disk is write protected e Last Access Time The date and time the storage disk was last accessed e Files The number of files on the storage disk e Space Used The amount of space consumed on the storage disk e Space Remain The amount of space remaining on the storage disk e State The storage disk s current state e g ONLINE OFFLINE or ONLINE PENDING e Deduplication Indicates whether deduplication is enabled for the storage disk e Savings If deduplication is enabled this field reports the percentage of space saved by deduplication e Total Data Stored MB If deduplication is enabled th
47. Pending state you can retrieve from the storage disk but cannot make modifications Also no store or delete operations are performed on the storage disk When a storage disk is in an Online Pending state you can change the state only to Offline If you change the state from Online Pending to Online the operation will fail 4 After the Status screen informs you that the storage disk s status was successfully changed click Close The Change Storage Disk State screen shows the changed state for the storage disk you selected 5 If desired repeat steps 2 4 to change the state for additional storage disks StorNext User s Guide 248 Chapter 10 Managing Storage Disks Cleaning a Storage Disk Cleaning a Storage Disk The cleaning process scans the storage disk and removes inactive files that have not been accessed since the endtime and orphaned file copies i e archive copies on the file system disk Using this process helps prevent the inactive information from growing to an unmanageable size This process does not affect current file versions on the media Caution Inactive file versions cleaned from the media cannot be recovered or used again 1 From the SNSM home page choose Storage Disk gt Clean from the Admin menu The Clean Storage Disk screen appears e Figure 185 Clean Storage Disk Quantum iE StorNext Home Help Screen ue Fite Meda Admin Re
48. Quantum s StorNext training and are confident you understand all procedures You may perform these procedures if Professional Services is assisting you 1 Install StorNext as described in the StorNext Installation Guide Follow the instructions that pertain to your operating system 2 Create a list of system and FC disks by writing to a file in a format recognized by the cvlabel command Type the following ust cvfs bin cvlabel c gt usr cvfs config cvlabels The created file displays an entry for disk located by the usr cvfs bin cvlabel command CvfsDisk_UNKNOWN dev sdb host 4 lun 1 sectors 639570752 CvfsDisk_UNKNOWN dev sdc host 4 lun 2 sectors 639570752 CvfsDisk UNKNOWN dev sdd host 4 lun 3 sectors 639570752 3 Edit the cvlabels file that has a list of all system and FC disks visible on the machine Edit the file to remove all the system disks and any FC disks you do not want labeled as well as FC disks that are already labeled 359 StorNext User s Guide Creating a File System Server Label the FC drives by typing the following usr cvfs bin cvlabel user cvfs config cvlabels Copy the example file system configuration file to the config directory by typing the following cp usr cvfs examples example cfg usr cvfs config lt file_system_name gt cfg Edit the StorNext configuration file you just created to include the desired settings disks and stripe groups Copy the
49. R 45 Complete Enter License Screen Permanent 47 License String Example ou eee ee ee ee 48 User Access Control Screen se see se se ee ie 49 Modify User Screen iese se se se ee ee ee ee Ee ee ek 50 Add New User Screen ee se ee se Ge Ge ee Ge Ge 51 Modify User Screen ese se se se ee se Gee ee He Ge ee ee 53 Start Stop StorNext Screen sesse ese sek ee se Ge eke 55 Complete Start Stop StorNext Task Screen 56 Select Log Sorensen Ee Ee Geek ee Pe Sen eke 57 Select File Screen wees sedes gegee ie eg EP 58 Log File Example siiin ee Se sku Gee Gees ERG ees 59 Schedule Events Screen 1 iese se ee ee ee eek 61 Schedule Events Screen 2 0 see ee se ee ee ee eek 62 Schedule Events Screen 3 iese se se ee ee eek 63 Configure E mail Notification Screen esse sesse 68 Configure SMTP E mail Screen 69 Configure E mail Addresses Screen sesse se see 70 Complete E mail Configuration Screen 71 Cancel Request Screen oo esse see se ee Ge ee 72 Alternate Retrieval Location Screen ese ee 7A Backup StorNext Screen ese se se ee se ek ee ee ee 78 StorNext User s Guide StorNext User s Guide Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Fig
50. SNSM Enter Directory lt StorNext 2 Recurmve Rereve Firs tem Meda spock Active Woes nvaret 2 Do one of the following e Enter in the Enter Directory field the directory from which you want to recursively retrieve files and sub directories You must enter the complete pathname e Click Browse to display the Directory Browser window On this window locate and select the directory you want and then click OK 3 Click Apply to retrieve the selected files 4 After the Status screen informs you that the operation was completed successfully click OK Freeing Disk Blocks Use this function to free disk blocks by removing one or more files from disk Before you can remove a file from disk it must first be on media The file remains on media after you remove it from disk StorNext User s Guide 142 Figure 92 Free Disk Blocks Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Using the SNSM File System Functions 1 From the SNSM home page choose Free Disk Blocks from the File menu The Free Disk Blocks screen appears i EE Ns 1 Quantum FF a StorNext Home Help Fae Media AGAIN Reports Help I Free Disk Blocks Home Select fles to remove from disk Note that a file must be on media before you can remove it trom disk and it remains on media after you remove it tom disk SNFS SNSM Enter Individual File Browse File List Select All Deselect All LY Apply
51. Stripe Group Movement Figure 104 Move Stripe Group Introduction Screen Zj Move Stripe Group Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 x Move Stripe Group Introduction Quantum e Please select a file system on which to perform a stripe group move e File systems will be grayed if not started or mounted or if a move is currently in progress Select a file system snfs1 lt Next gt _X Cancel 5 Select the file system for which you want to move stripe groups Click Next to continue 6 A message reminds you that you must check your file system before beginning the movement process Do one of the following e If you have not checked the selected file system click Cancel and then run the file system check as described in Checking the File System on page 148 e If you have already checked the selected file system click OK to proceed The Move Options screen appears StorNext User s Guide 160 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Performing Stripe Group Movement Figure 105 Move Options Screen A Move Stripe Group Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 Specify whether to move a data stripe group or a metadata or journal stripe group You cannot move a stripe group that contains both user data and metadata journal data on the same LUN Click Next to continue If you are migrating ONLY a metadata journal stripe group go to step 9 page 163 If you are migrating a data stripe group t
52. System Status screen you can do any of the following e View a specific ticket by selecting the desired ticket and then clicking the Details button e Refresh update the list by clicking the Refresh button e Close all tickets by clicking the Close All button The Admin Alert button appears at the bottom of the screen only when an admin alert has been generated Admin alerts are informational messages about system activities you might want to be aware of but are not necessarily an error condition Admin alerts do not require any action from StorNext users There are different types of admin alerts Here are some conditions that could produce an admin alert TSM Health Checks disk space warning e TSM Intrusive Health Checks when drives are mounted 17 Figure 7 Service Admin Alerts Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview The StorNext Home Page e MSM media console errors e MSM drive dismount request when drive is already dismounted e MSM media audit failures To view admin alerts select Admin Alerts from the StorNext home page s Service menu Alternatively you can click the Admin Alert button at the bottom of the screen The Service Admin Alerts screen appears ff Quantum StorNext Home Help Config Admin Reports Service Help Service Admin Alerts Home Below is a list of alerts indicating system activities To delete af alerts in the system use Delete AN at the bottom
53. Use this procedure to add tape drives to your libraries You can add any Adding a Tape Drive 2 3 number of connected tape drives to the StorNext system 1 From the StorNext home page choose Add Tape Drive from the Config menu Alternatively from the SNSM home page you can choose Drive gt Config from the Admin menu and then click Add The Tape Drive Introduction screen appears listing the number of currently configured tape drives and the hardware devices available for configuration Figure 130 Tape Drive ZA Add Drive Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 xj Introduction Screen Tape Drive Introduction Add tape drives to a configured library Please add all the tape drives necessary for your StorNext system Tape Drive Information Number of tape drives currently configured 0 Hardware devices available for configuration 4 lt Next gt X Cancel Pa StorNext User s Guide 190 Chapter 8 Managing Drives and Disks Working with Tape Drives 2 Click Next to add a tape drive The Associated Library screen appears Figure 131 Associated Library Screen Add Drive Microsoft Internet Explorer Associated Library Select a configured library to associate with the drive or drives you are adding Configured Libraries l Fibre Channel Attached Drives d Back Next gt X Cancel iz Configured Libraries list Select the configured library with which to associate the tape dr
54. Window I Enable Disk To Affinity From File Age Before Relocation Enable Retrieve to Affinity Affinity Nameja gt StorNext User s Guide 262 StorNext User s Guide Chapter 11 Data Migration Management Adding a Storage Policy 5 On the Modify Parameters screen enter both the Standard Options and Advanced Options as desired File Copy 1 2 3 and 4 The copy number used when storing assigned media The copy number assigned to the media determines which copy goes to the media You must specify media for all copies used You must use at least one copy Copy 1 and can use up to four copies If you have created more than one drivepool you can accomplish file steering by specifying which drivepool to use for each available file copy For example you could send data on File Copy 2 to fs_drivepool_2 and data on File Copy 3 to fs_drivepool_3 Before you can assign a drive pool to a file copy you must first create the drive pools by using the Configure Drive Pools function For more information about configuring drive pools see Adding a Drive Pool on page 200 File Age Before Migration This value determines the minimum number of minutes a file must reside unmodified on disk before it is considered a candidate for storage on media File Age Before Truncation This value determines the minimum number of days a file must reside on a disk unaccessed before it is considered a candidate for truncation from
55. Windows user changes the Windows security descriptor or Read Only file attribute If you change the UNIX mode bits and the file is accessible from Windows you must change the Windows security descriptor if Windows Security is configured On or Read Only file attribute to ensure the change is reflected on both Windows and UNIX All To avoid parser errors do not use up or down when naming items in the configuration file This applies especially to naming affinities or any other string type keyword StorNext file systems cannot be smaller than 5GB StorNext User s Guide 344 General Operating Guidelines and Limitations Operating System Affected Component Description All Be aware of the following limitations regarding file systems and stripe groups The maximum number of disks per file system is 512 The maximum number of disks per data stripe group is 128 The maximum number of stripe groups per file system is 256 e The maximum number of tape drives is 256 To prevent data loss and aid disaster recovery Quantum recommends adjusting policy settings to retain two copies of critical data In addition data stored to a storage disk should be stored on RAID or if only one copy is retained the RAID should be mirrored This way in the event of a disk failure no data is lost The trashcan feature has been removed in StorNext 3 0 Before upgrading to StorNext 3 0 you must
56. a Directory for Storage Disk Files The Copy Number is the default for this media that all policy classes will use Storage Disk Name Storage_Disk_2 Enable Deduplication 7 Copy used for all policy classes Copy 7 Select a file system mount point Select Mount Point 7 Click Browse to select a directory for Storage Disk files Browse Back Next gt X Cancel 4 Enter the fields on the Add Storage Disk screen Storage Disk Name Enter a name for the storage disk or accept the displayed default name Enable Deduplication Select this option if you want to enable deduplication and create a dedup SDISK Once deduplication is enabled you cannot disable it after the storage disk has been created Likewise if deduplication is NOT enabled at this time you cannot enable it later Select a File System Mount Point Select a file system mount point for the storage disk If deduplication is enabled the mount point must be on a non managed StorNext file system Click Browse to Select a Directory for Storage Disk Files Click the Browse button to display the Directory Browser window On this window select or create a directory on which to store storage disk files 243 Chapter 10 Managing Storage Disks Adding a Storage Disk e Copy Used for all Policy Classes Select the copy number Copy 1 Copy 2 Copy 3 or Copy 4 for the new storage disk This copy number will be used by all policy classes
57. a list of mount points For each mount point type the following df k mount point gt After the fle system in question has been sentihed remove any or all unwanted les or save them aff to a different file system The problem S resolved Close the serace ticket Refer to Closing Semce Tickets The problem has NOT been resolved 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Serce Tickets 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 765 On the Web http ew guantum com support 415 Other RAS Messages Figure 55 Invalid Configuration Recommended Actions RAS part 1 Invalid Configuration IF THEN The configuration file containing the Examine the configuration file to identify the missing entry error is filesystems config and the error indicates that an entry is e Ifthe entry should be cluded in the configuration Sie add it to the file missing If the entry should not be included in the configuration fle contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center to clean up the database entnes The list of managed file system names ifthe file system is supposed to be managed by TSM but is listed as not managed do the following do not match for TSM and CVFS 1 Stop StorNext 2 Change the usr adic DSH config con quration file for that Sle system Change the Data Migration prope
58. a long time so plan accordingly After data movement is complete you must mark the source stripe group as down For movement purposes StorNext treats metadata and journal stripe groups the same way so it doesn t matter whether the stripe group you want to move is a metadata stripe group a journal stripe group or a combined metadata and journal stripe group The only caveat is that stripe groups used for metadata journal move cannot contain data StorNext has different mechanisms for moving data stripe groups versus metadata journal stripe groups Note During Stripe Group Movement affinities are preserved when files are moved from one stripe group to another Consequently there must be sufficient space on one or more destination stripe groups for any affinities on the source stripe group You must add any affinities from the source stripe group to the new stripe group Launching the Movement Use the following procedure to perform stripe group movement Wizard aa 1 From the SNFS home page choose Move Stripe Group from the Admin menu The Move Stripe Group screen appears showing the following information for completed moves and moves in progress e File System The name of the file system involved in the move StorNext User s Guide 158 Figure 103 Move Stripe Group Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Performing Stripe Group Movement e Type Specifie
59. according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www quantum com support StorNext User s Guide 385 Media and Drive RAS Messages a pte ane Recommended Actions Reported Media Error RAS Tape Drive Reported Media Error IF The drive reported a media error sense data tape alert The problem IS resolved The problem has NOT been resolved Check the tape library s control panel to determine if any other errors exist If other errors exist correct them before proceeding Refer to the documentation for this type of tape library o If no other errors exist and the media is mounted dismount the media If the media has not been ejected If the media is not dismounted check the drive to see if it has been ejected o Press the Eject button on the drive to eject the media o Try to dismount the media again In the USA UK France and Germany EMEA On the Web Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center 1 800 284 5101 00800 4 QUANTUM 44 1256 848 766 http www_ quantum com support ee Recommended Actions Exp
60. administrator Starting and Stopping StorNext Gomponents There are two ways to start or stop the StorNext applications SNES and SNSM By using the Admin menu s Start Stop StorNext option By clicking the Server Status button located at the lower right corner of the StorNext home page The following procedure describes how to start stop StorNext components using either of these methods 1 From the StorNext Home Page select Start Stop StorNext from the Admin menu Alternatively click the Server Status button in the lower right corner of the screen This button displays the server s current status such as Active The Start Stop StorNext screen appears StorNext User s Guide 54 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Starting and Stopping StorNext Components Figure 31 Start Stop StorNext Z Start Stop StorNext Microsoft Internet Explorer l 5 xj Screen Start Stop StorNext This will stop or start the StorNext software If your file system is in a warning state one or more of your file systems are not mounted or started Select an action C Start Stop Select the components AI Components I StorNextFile System started I StorNext Storage Manager started INTELLIGENT STORAGE Automatically start StorNext at boot time Enable Disable lt Next gt LX Cancel 2 Select either the Start or Stop option 3 Select the items you want to start or stop e All Compon
61. and Rebuild Policy Start Stop StorNext Start or stop the StorNext components 14 Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview The StorNext Home Page Reports Menu Options The following Reports menu options allow you to view StorNext reports e SNFS View the following SNFS reports e Affinities View the existing affinities for a selected directory in the file system e File Systems View file system statistics including active clients space size disks and stripe groups e Stripe Groups View statistics for the stripe group such as space affinities and current statuses e Clients View statistics for StorNext clients including the number of SAN clients and distributed LAN clients and client performance e LAN Client Performance View information about distributed LAN clients and servers including read and write speed e Backups View a report of StorNext backups e Drives View tape drive information e Files View file information e Libraries View libraries information e Library Space View information about used library space e Media View media information e Policy Classes View policy class information e Relations View directory policy class relationship information e Requests View request information e Scheduler View scheduler information Storage Disk View storage disk information Note Detailed descriptions of the Report menu options are located in Chapter 12 StorNext Reports StorNe
62. and the StorNext File System SNFS Storage Area Network SAN A SAN is a dedicated high performance network whose primary purpose is the transfer of data along FC or high speed Ethernet connections between servers interconnect devices and storage peripherals StorNext File System SNFS One of the two components that make up StorNext SNFS is primarily used to provide Fibre Channel connections but supports other types of connections in a serverless environment which enables clients to access data and share files StorNext Storage Manager SNSM One of several components that make up StorNext SNSM combines the functionality of two products TSM and MSM to provide high performance file migration and management services and to manage automated and manual media libraries including library volumes Store The process of copying data for a file to secondary storage either disk or tape Stripe Group A set of similar storage devices that can be maintained as a group Tertiary Storage Manager TSM The Tertiary Storage Manager is responsible for policy management and controlling data movement between primary disk and secondary storage either disk or tape Truncation The process of freeing date blocks stored to secondary storage either disk or tape The file name remains visible in the file system 325 U Undelete The process of returning a file from the Trash can to its original location on disk This can be done only if
63. cvlabels For each disk you are prompted to verify that you want to label each disk Type Y for yes Modifying Global Settings StorNext User s Guide The global section of the file system configuration file contains general parameters that control enabling and disabling features system performance and components related to the file system s resource consumption 354 StorNext User s Guide Modifying Global Settings For most of these parameters the only thing necessary for the modified parameter to take effect is to restart the File System Manager FSM However the following parameters require that the file system be fully re initialized which will result in data loss before they take effect e FSBlockSize e WindowsSecurity If a parameter change requires file system re initialization the system notifies the administrator in the system log In order to reduce the number of file system remakes be sure to plan the initial configuration of the FSBlockSize and WindowsSecurity parameters carefully The global section also contains several parameters that can dramatically improve or degrade system performance Exercise caution when modifying performance parameters One key performance parameter is InodeCacheSize Before making any changes to the file system s configuration carefully review the cvis config 4 man pages or the CVFS Configuration File help file Use this procedure to modify system global sett
64. data After creating a relation point on a managed file system you must delete and recreate the file system not just remake For information about deleting a file system see Deleting a File System on page 95 For information about creating a file system see Adding a File System on page 83 Use this procedure to make a file system using the CLI 1 Log on to the machine as root StorNext User s Guide 356 Starting and Stopping SNFS Make sure you are the root user by typing the following cd Unmount the system by typing the following umount lt mount_point gt where the lt mount_point gt is where you have mounted the SNFS For example umount stornext snfs1 Stop the system by typing the following ust cvfs bin cvadmin snadmin gt stop lt file_system_name gt where the lt file_system_name gt is the name of the file system to be stopped Make the file system by typing the following usr cvts bin cvmkfs lt file_system_name gt Start the system by typing the following usr cvfs bin cvadmin snadmin start file system name Mount the system by typing the following mount t cvfs snfs1 stornext snfs1 Starting and Stopping SNFS StorNext User s Guide To start SNFS using the CLI type the following ust cvfs bin cvadmin snadmin gt select snadmin gt start lt file_system_name gt snadmin gt activate lt file_system_name gt where snadmin is the prompt shown after inv
65. disk Truncation removes the disk blocks of a stored file but not the file itself Truncate Immediately After Store Enable this option check this box to truncate files immediately after they are stored Max Inactive Versions The maximum number of inactive versions of a file StorNext keeps track of for recovery purposes Drive Pool to Use Associates the drive pool to use with the policy class If you specify a drive pool the drive pool name must be defined before any data operation can occur Checksum Generation If this option is enabled the box is checked checksums are generated and retained in the database for files stored by the corresponding policy class Checksum Validation If this option is enabled the box is checked checksums are compared to retained values for the files retrieved by the corresponding policy class The Checksum feature consumes additional space in the StorNext database whether it is enabled or not When disabled this feature consumes approximately 2 bytes per stored file when enabled this feature consumes approximately 18 bytes per stored file The 263 StorNext User s Guide Chapter 11 Data Migration Management Adding a Storage Policy database stores data in files on the host computer so the increase in database size translates to a corresponding increase in disk space requirements The exact amount of space consumed whether the feature is enabled or disabled may vary Stub Files Se
66. disk drives e Set Affinities Create a directory in the file system to the affinity 22 The SNSM Home Page SNSM Home Page Drop Down Menus StorNext User s Guide Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview The SNFS and SNSM Home Pages e Metadata Dump Generate a Metadata dump of a file system e Check File System Run a check on your file system before expanding the file system or migrating a stripe group Expand File System Add new stripe groups to your file system e Move Stripe Group Move data or metadata from one source stripe group to one or more destination stripe groups The SNFS Reports Menu The options on the SNFS Reports menu allow you to view all SNFS reports These are the same reports described in Reports Menu Options on page 15 The SNFS Help Menu The options on the SNFS Help menu provide access to StorNext documentation Quantum contact information and detailed information about the version of StorNext you are using The SNFS Help menu options are the same as the ones described in Help Menu Options on page 16 The SNSM Home Page contains a Library Monitor and these drop down menu options e The SNSM File Menu e The SNSM Media Menu e The SNSM Admin Menu e The SNSM Reports Menu e The SNSM Help Menu Use the drop down menus on this home page as you would from the StorNext Home Page when performing Storage Manager specific administration tasks 23 Figure 10 SNSM Menu StorNext
67. ee ee ee 133 Using the SNSM File System Functions ese see ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 134 Storing Piles i e ee EE ge E ee ge Gee Ge Gee Gee ee 135 Changing a File VErstOT iese sesse dasse sees see sk Gee Re GE eb Ee GEK ERGE ES ee Ee 137 R overinga Files is ee GE Eer Gede Ve Ee Reg Ge gees GO ee de Ge 158 Red6v ring a DiretOF sessies sessie Ese esse VERGEEFS ESE Eg Se SEEK teere Rg EER EER Sk 139 jii Retrieving a Bol EE EE 140 Retrieving a Director esse sees Res R ve bees gegee Ke ee panties 141 Freeing Disk BlOCKS csciscvecsssssntsevcccsactsovestsateasevesaunvescvesaveveseves 142 Moving Files to New Media sees ses se see ee ge Ge Gee ee Ge Gegee 144 Modifying a File s Attributes ees eee ee ee ge reese 145 Understanding Dynamic Resource Allocation ees sees 146 About File System Expansion ees se se see ee ee ek eek eek 146 About Stripe Group MoVemenE sesse ees se se se Ge se Ge ke ee 147 Expansion and Movement Steps iss ese se see se Ge ee ee 148 Checking the File System se see ee see ee ge Ge ee eingi 148 Performing File System Expansion uie ese ee eek se ge ek ee Ge ER ER RE 150 Performing Stripe Group Movement sees se see ee ge eek 157 Launching the Movement Wizard ue eset eek 158 Completing Metadata Stripe Group Movement 166 Reusing LUNs in a Data Stripe Group After a Move 167 Reusing LUNS in a Metadata Stripe Group After a Move 168 Chapter 7 Managing Libraries 169 Ad
68. eg EG 111 Configure Stripe Group Screen ee ee se ee ee ee 114 Add Stripe Group Screen iese ee ee Ge Ge ee RR ee ee 115 Modify Stripe Group Screen esse se see ee se se ee Ee Ee Ge ee ee 118 Add Affinity Introduction Screen sesse se se se see ee Ge Ge ee 122 Add Affinity Screen oo sees se cece Ge ee Ee He ee Ee Ee Gee ee 123 Select Directory Screen ie se ee se ee ee He Ge ee Ee Ee Ge eke ee 124 xi xii Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Figure 85 Figure 86 Figure 87 Figure 88 Figure 89 Figure 90 Figure 91 Figure 92 Figure 93 Figure 94 Figure 95 Figure 96 Figure 97 Figure 98 Figure 99 Figure 100 Figure 101 Figure 102 Figure 103 Assign Affinity Screen se se ee se ee ee ee ee ee 125 Exclusive Stripe Group Screen iese see se se seke 126 Complete Add Affinity Task Screen ees 127 Add Modify or Delete Affinities Screen 128 Add Affinity Screen oo cece ee Ge ee Ee ee ee 128 Set Affinity SEEEN cos se eise eek erinra 130 Set Affinity SCreeTL essss see sees sE ERGE Ee seek SE eke eg Ge BR eN 130 Modify Affinity Screen 0 iese see ee se se ee ee Ge Ge ee 131 Metadata Dump of File System Screen 0 134 Store Files Screen sestien tienen Er TE Eg 135 Optional Store Parameters Screen ese sesse ses 136 Change File Version Screen se se ee se ee 137 Recover Files Screen ee se se se ee se ee ee ee geg
69. fails label validation properly If sCheckSlotMapping fails indicating that tape drive paths are not configured properly 1 Reboot the server 2 Change the media state to available using fschmedstate 3 Try the failed operation again If sCheckSlotMapping runs successfully determine whether the drive is not the cause of the error 1 Use fschstate to place offline the tape drive for which the tape label verification failed 2 Use fschmedstate to change the media state to Available 3 Try the failed operation again If the operation succeeds Use fschstate to place the original drive back online Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center about the suspected drive If the operation fails again with a label validation failure Use fschstate to place the original drive back online Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center about the failed media If the problem persists 1 Use the Capturing a System State feature to create a system snapshot 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www guantum c
70. for connected distributed LAN clients Active File Systems SEE File Systems snfs1 snfs managed Select All sdisk1 Deselect All Y Apply X Cancel 2 Select from the Active File Systems list one or more file systems to include in the report Click Apply to continue The File System LAN Client Report appears StorNext User s Guide 309 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The File System LAN Client Report Figure 232 File System LAN Client Report Quantum File System LAN Client Report LAN Client Monitor Refresh Auto Refresh Rate No Refresh 7 File System snfs1 LAN Server scoop adic com LAN Client Read Write Dubnium adic com 172 16 99 80 32793 paradise adic com 172 16 99 90 43312 stornext4 adic com 172 16 99 122 33883 Dubnium sdic com 172 16 99 80 32784 paradise adic com 172 16 99 90 43208 stornext4 adic com 172 16 99 122 33881 File System snfs1 LAN Server stornext3 adic com LAN Client Read Write Dubnium adic com 172 16 99 80 33049 Dubnium sdic com 172 16 99 80 43528 paradise adic com 172 16 99 90 56074 stornext4 adic com 172 16 99 90 2290 Dubnium adic com 172 16 99 122 34015 paradise adic com 10 16 50 122 34019 stornext4 adic com 172 16 99 80 32052 172 16 99 90 56072 172 16 99 122 34013 10 16 50 122 34017 X Close 8 If desired click Refresh to manually update refresh the report data You can als
71. from the Select Media list and then click OK to return to the Reclassify Media screen The IDs for the selected media are shown in the Entered Media IDs list Select from the Destination Media Class list a destination for media IDs and then click Apply The new media class must be associated with the type of media you are reclassifying For example if you select 3590 DATA as your source media class select 3590 CLEAN as your destination media class Caution Your source and destination media types must be the Source FO 3590 DATA Destination FO 3590 CLEAN same For example 5 After the Status screen informs you that the operation was successful click Close 236 Cleaning Media Figure 176 Clean Media Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 9 Managing Media Using the SNSM Media Functions This function allows you to clean a file system policy class or media Periodic cleaning helps prevent inactive information from growing to an unmanageable size When you run this function the StorNext Storage Manager removes inactive files that have not been accessed since the specified endtime This process does not affect current file versions on the media Caution Inactive file versions cleaned from the media cannot be recovered or used again 1 From the SNSM home page choose Clean from the Media menu The Clean Media screen appears MEER N 4 Quantum F i e gt StorNext
72. fsnameservers file to the config directory by typing the following cp usr cvfs examples fsnameservers example usr cvfs config fsnameservers 8 Edit the fsnameservers file to include the host s IP address 9 Copy the example fsmlist file to the config directory by typing the 10 11 12 13 14 15 following cp usr cvfs examples fsmlist example usr cvfs config fsmlist Edit the fsmlist file created in step 9 to include the name of file systems you want to start at boot time Obtain your license dat from the Quantum Technical Assistance Center For contact information refer to Quantum Technical Assistance Center on page 322 Place the license dat file in the usr cvfs config directory Make the file system by typing the following usr cvts bin cvmkfs lt file_system_name gt Caution When you run the cvmkfs command you will lose any data currently on the file system Reboot the machine Verify that the labeled drives are available to the file system by typing the following usr cvfs bin cvlabel l 360 16 17 Adding a File System Client Restart the file system Type ust cvfs bin cvadmin snadmin gt start lt file_system_name gt snadmin gt activate lt file_system_name gt snadmin gt select lt file_system_name gt snadmin gt show snadmin gt who snadmin gt quit Mount the system by typing the following mount t cvfs lt file_system_name gt lt mount_poin
73. installation issue or corrupt lesystem Missing SENV DSM_DIR contig StileSysven ctg file Backup file system is missing or was deleted Missing or bad metadata dump fale for You receive the error backup 1 Make sure you have the email notification you received after the backup failed execution could not complete 2 Contact the Quanturn Techmcal Assistance Center and send them the email notification so they can determine the cause of the backup failure The problem IS resolved Close the senice ticket Refer to Closing Senice Tickets The problem has NOT been resoned 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Senice Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the USA 14800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http innn quantum Cory upper 413 Figure 53 Backup Errors RAS StorNext User s Guide Other RAS Messages Backup Errors The backup status can be obtained on any currently running or last completed backup by running the snbackup s command The first line shows the overall status the status line contains the same string viewed in the RAS message The log file associated with that backup is shown beneath the status line and shows any errors that have occurred All errors in the log file are prefaced with ERR Betow is a list of individual errors and recommended actions
74. list and then click Remove Left The drive is removed from the Associated Drives list and appears in the Available Drives list 4 If desired you can also move drives from the Available Drives list to the Associated Drives list To do so select from the Available Drives list the drive you want to move to the Associated Drives list and then click Insert Right The drive is removed from the Available Drives list and appears in the Associated Drives list 5 Click Apply A message window warns you that continuing with the task restarts the Storage Manager Pigura IG EE ET Window Q In order to perform the change the StorNext Storage Manager has to be restarted Do you want to continue Cancel 6 Click OK to close the message window and proceed StorNext User s Guide 203 Chapter 8 Managing Drives and Disks Working with Drive Pools 7 After the status screen informs you that your drive pool modifications were successful click Close Use this procedure to delete a drive pool You cannot delete a drive pool if there are drives currently associated with it To disassociate drives from the drive pool see Modifying a Drive Pool on page 202 Deleting a Drive Pool Caution At least one drive pool must be configured at all times Do not delete the default drive pool 1 From the SNSM home page choose Config Drive Pool from the Admin menu The Configure Drive Pool screen figure 141 on page 201 appear
75. make the added device recognizable by a host Some of these utilities can disrupt access to existing disks causing access hangs or failures To avoid this stop all file system operations on the affected host before rescanning for the new device Caution When adding a disk to an existing stripe group while I O is stopped on the clients you should first unmount the file system before the MDC does the offline disk expansion After the expansion is complete refresh disks before mounting the file system again If you do not umount the file system before expansion your clients could lock up requiring a reboot StorNext User s Guide 151 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Performing File System Expansion Follow these steps when you are ready to use the File System Expansion Wizard 1 From the SNFS home page choose Expand File System from the Admin menu The File System Expansion Introduction screen appears showing a list of file systems available for expansion Figure 97 File System E File System Expansion Microsoft Internet Explorer oO x Expansion Introduction Screen File System Expansion Introduction e Please select a file system on which to perform file system expansion e The number of luns you can add is limited only by disk availability e File systems will only be listed if started and mounted Select a file system snfs1 lt Net gt x Cancel
76. makes the media either accessible or available for checkout respectively 1 From the SNSM home page choose Attributes from the Media menu The Change Media Attributes screen appears Figure 173 Change Media Attributes Screen EE N w 1 Quantum 5 a StorNext Home Help bee Meda Admin Reports Heip I Change Media Attributes Home Select one ce more meda and change the state Click Context Help to see definmons of he states SNFS SNSM New State Unsuspect Write Protect Write Unprotect Available Unavailable Unmark 1 Media So Os L StorNext spock Active IE Charge Medio Attbutes ocd intraret 2 Specify the new state you want to apply to the media 3 Select from the Select Media list the media to which you want to apply the new state you specified 4 Click Apply to change the states of the media you selected StorNext User s Guide 234 Reclassifying a Media Class Grouping Figure 174 Reclassify Media Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 9 Managing Media Using the SNSM Media Functions 5 When the Status screen informs you that the media statuses were successfully changed click OK A media class grouping is a media management tool that segregates media into classes Membership in a media class grouping is exclusive so media can belong to only one class grouping Media class groupings are restricted to one type of media Valid media types are Clean Data and Migrat
77. names cannot be longer than eight characters Click OK to continue StorNext User s Guide 128 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Affinities The following stripe groups cannot be selected An exclusive stripe group A metadata stripe group A journal stripe group A stripe group on a managed file system with a configured affinity 6 After the Status screen informs you that the affinity was successfully added click Close The Add Modify or Delete Affinities screen figure 78 on page 128 appears showing in the Affinities list the new affinity you just added 7 Start the file system as described in Making a File System on page 106 8 Mount the file system as described in Mounting or Unmounting a File System on page 108 Setting the Affinity in a When you use SNFS to add an affinity you must set the affinity in a Directory directory on the selected file system If you use the Add Affinity Wizard this step is done automatically 1 From the SNFS home page choose Set Affinities from the Admin menu The Set Affinity screen appears StorNext User s Guide 129 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Affinities ENS ss EE Quantum y StorNext Home Help T Figure 80 Set Affinity Screen es GE ss Set Affinity Home Selec a file system and the affinity you want to set on a directory in the file system Click Apply to select a directory SNFS SNSM ee Affinity process 2 Set Affinity to
78. of the page SNFS mean tater 7 Taentitier Details l 1723205436 20 aug 2007 12 37 09 000003 m diue state changing to protected m diue 00000 to 1723205435 20 au9 2007 12 36 47 000002 modiue state changing to protected Modius 000002 ie 2723208494 20 aug 2007 12 36 09 000001 Mediue state changing to protected M diue 000001 to ld P x op tr Delete Ax Delete All SG Refresh lt gt StorNext EJ System Status I AdminAlen gandalf Waring You can display the Previous or Next screen of alerts by clicking those buttons Alternatively you can go directly to a page by entering that number such as 3 or 4 and then clicking the Page button On the Service Admin Alerts screen you can do any of the following e View a specific alert by scrolling to the right of the screen if the alert is longer than can be displayed on one screen e Refresh update the list by clicking the Refresh button e Delete a selected alert by clicking the Delete button Delete all alerts by clicking the Delete All button 18 StorNext Server Status Home and Help Links Application Link StorNext User s Guide Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview The StorNext Home Page The StorNext Server Status button is located at the bottom right of the StorNext Home Page This button displays one of three statuses for the file systems residing on the server e Active All configured file systems are active e Warning One or mor
79. or a bad network connection reduces throughput for the entire network Note On Linux use ping and the cvadmin latency test tools to identify network connectivity or reliability problems In addition use the netperf tool to identify bandwidth limitations or problems On Windows use the Networking tab of Windows Task Manager to view network utilization The minimum amount of memory required for a Distributed LAN Server depends on the configuration Windows For a Windows Distributed LAN Server use the following formula Required memory 1GB of file systems served of NICs per Distributed LAN Client of Distributed LAN Clients 330 StorNext User s Guide Distributed LAN Server Client Network and Memory Tuning transfer buffer count transfer buffer size For example suppose a Windows Distributed LAN Server is serving four file systems to 64 clients each using two NICs for data traffic Also assume the server uses the defaults of sixteen transfer buffers and 256K per buffer On Windows you can view and adjust the transfer buffer settings using the Client Configuration tool s Distributed LAN tab Given this configuration here is the result Required memory 1GB 4 2 64 16 256K 3GB Note This example assumes that a 64 bit version of Windows is being used on the Server 32 bit Windows Distributed LAN Servers are restricted to small configurations using 16 or fewer connect
80. percent in addition to low and high watermark settings The low watermark specifies the level of used disk space that is acceptable to end overflow processing The high watermark specifies the level of used disk space that initiates overflow processing In the above example the system usage is less than 10 with 75 set as the low watermark and 85 set as the high watermark High and low watermarks do not apply to non managed file systems Note Overflow processing occurs when the system processes beyond the set watermark limitations The Library Monitor The Library Monitor enables you to view library and drive information on each library When you open a browser to access StorNext the Library Monitor appears below the File System Monitor Library Monitor Ee Retrestd Refresh Rate No Refresh Library Name Library Type Number of Drives Fill Level v dee scs B eo gt State Drive Name Status Mounted Media Compression v sesi_archivet_dr1 Free Jon scsi_archivet_dr2 Free ON The Library Monitor provides the following information e Refresh Click this button to manually refresh the Library Monitor 11 Figure 5 Storage Disk Monitor StorNext User s Guide Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview The StorNext Home Page e Refresh Rate Set the Library Monitor refresh rate with this drop down menu Options range from No Refresh to every 10 Minutes Mo e State A green checkbox indicates the library is onl
81. screen figure 193 appears 2 Select from the Select Policy Class list the policy class you want to modify and then click Modify The Modify Parameters screen figure 195 appears 3 On the Modify Parameters screen modify values as desired and then click OK 4 After the status screen informs you that the policy class has been successfully modified click Close Deleting a Policy Class Before you can delete a policy class you must first delete everything associated with that policy class including media and directories Also you must clean the media and return it to a system blank state To remove all files in directories associated with the policy class follow these steps StorNext User s Guide 267 Figure 199 Remove Relationships Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 11 Data Migration Management Deleting a Policy Class 1 Log on as root 2 Change directories to the location where the relation resides 3 Remove all files and directories Use the following procedure to delete a policy class 1 To remove the relations for the policy class from the SNSM home page choose Relations from the Admin menu The Manage Policy Class Relationships figure 196 appears 2 In the list select a policy class and click Remove The Remove Relationships for screen appears Tj Remove Directory Class Relation Microsoft Internet Explore a oj xj Remove Relationship for Quantum policyclass3 Select Directo
82. scsi archivel Backup Tape Click Next to complete the task or click Back to make changes 7 After a status screen informs you that media has been successfully added click Finish StorNext User s Guide 213 Chapter 9 Managing Media Adding Media to a Configured Library Adding a Vault Use this procedure to add a vault to the library 1 When you select a media vault on the Associated Library screen the Select Media Type screen appears Figure 154 Select Media Type Screen Z Add Media Microsoft Internet Explorer StorNext User s Guide 214 Chapter 9 Managing Media Adding Media to a Configured Library 2 On the Select Media Type screen select the type of media you want to add to the vault The Add Media IDs screen appears Figure 155 Add Media IDs alo x Screen E Add Media IDs Enter a media name or click New Media to create multiple labels for media Only the selected media will be added to the Vault New Media Entered Media Names Select All Deselect All Backup Tape Back Next gt X Cancel 3 On the Add Media IDs screen do one of the following e Enter the name for the new media in the Media Name field Go to Step 5 page 216 e Select one or more previously entered media IDs from the list and then click Next Go to Step 6 page 216 StorNext User s Guide 215 Chapter 9 Managing Media Adding Media to a Configured Library e Add multiple med
83. se ee ek ek ee 312 Health Check History Screen sesse se se se see se se se see ee Ge Ge ee 313 Health Check Results Screen sesse se se ee Ge Ge Ge ee Ge Ge ee 314 Capture System State Screen ese ese eke ge eens He ER ee ee 315 Download Capture File Screen esse se se ee se se ee ee ke 316 Service System Status SCTEEN ese sesse see ek ek ee SR Re He Ee 318 RAS Ticket Details Screen se se ee se Ge ee Ge Ge ee Ge Ge ee 319 Recommended Actions Screen ee ee ee ee ee ee 321 No Media Found RAS ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ek ek 378 Possible Drive Media Mount Discrepancy RAS 379 Tape Drive Alerts RAS part 1 sesse ee se se ke be Ge RR ee ee 380 Tape Drive Alerts RAS part 2 sees ee se se kk ge Ge Re ee ee 381 Tape Drive Alerts RAS part 3 sesse ee se se ke Ge Ge RR ee ee 382 Drive Reported Drive Error RAS ese se se esse se se seek ese se see 383 xvii xviii Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Cleaning of Drive Failed RAS ee ese see ee 384 Wrong Firmware Level Invalid Drive Type RAS 384 Drive Removed RAS ie ie see ee se se ee ee Ge ee ee 385 Tape Drive Configuration Failed RAS 385 Tape Drive Reported Media Error RAS
84. seg vs Ee EER Ges ep eke eksegese eke 96 Making Global Changes iese ee ee ee Ge ee Ge ee Ge Ge ee be ee 100 Working with the fsnameservers File sees ee ee eek ek ee 104 Making or Unmaking a File System esse ee ee eek ee eek ee 105 Starting and Stopping the File SYSteM iese see ee se ee Ge Ge ee Ge Ge 107 Mounting or Unmounting a File System eee se se ee Ge Ge es 108 Working With Diskeeper ie e ERG Ee caceusseu os GER Ged ee 109 Adding DISKS i ED ER EE RE ERE 109 Deleting DISKS porreiro OE N 111 Defragmenting a Dish ics cccciessscsssssesescsovenessssunnscobossdosenonsostosedensdotonesines 112 Working With Stripe Groups ie see ee eee ee ee ieii issile 113 Adding a Stripe Group EE SE ER GEE Ne ee EE ee ese eg 114 Modifying a Stripe GOUD ese ee eek eke ek eke ek eke ee ee eek ee ee 117 Deleting a Stripe Group eee ee ek eke eek ee ee ee eek ee ee 120 Working With Affinities esse se seke ses oe R ESE Se sen Ee ge Se age GEE GE RR Gee ee be ee 121 Adding an ASNI is Re touts ERG Ge ee ae Gee Gee ede gegee Ee ee 121 Adding an Affinity Through SNES ees ees ee ee eke ee ee ek ek ee ee 127 Setting the Affinity in a Directory oo ee se ee Ee ee He ee Ee ge eek 129 Modifying an Atti ty acscscccccscsosccenese sesse tese gede aii 131 Deleting an AFIREE Ee GEE ee Ge EERS ve Een ew ee bee Renee ee oge 132 File System Configuration Restrictions ese se see se se eerste Ge ee 133 Performing a Metadata DUMP uu eee cesses ee ee eke eek
85. server or client that has a fibre channel FC connection to the drive Caution Labeling a disk device will result in a complete loss of data on that disk device Selecting a Device to Label Unlabel or Probe Use the following procedure to select a disk device for labeling unlabeling or probing 1 From the SNFS home page choose Label Disk Devices from the Admin menu The Label Disk Device screen appears Note A device whose name is not selectable in the Disk Devices list is currently in use by a configured file system StorNext User s Guide 96 Figure 58 Label Disk Device Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Managing File System Operations Quantum fit w StorNext Home Help Admin Reports Help om the Est Click Label to label itas a Stortvert device click Unlabel to remove the label nd click Probe to pulse the disks activity light Disks Pat are grey StorNext kazar Active From this screen you can perform these tasks e Select Label Type Specify VTOC or EFI label types for your disks The default is EFI labels EFI labels are required if you plan to create LUNs that are larger than 2TB For Solaris EFI labels are also required for LUNs with a raw capacity greater than 1TB EFI labels will not work with the IRIX operating system If you need help determining label type click the Label Help link VTOC labels were
86. stripe groups are not large enough to accommodate the data on the source stripe group you will receive a warning message and not be allowed to continue using the selected source stripe group Pca a elt a xi Group Too Small Warning AN Destination stripe group size is less then sourse stripe group size Migration does not possible EET Click Next to continue If you are migrating only data stripe groups the Complete Stripe Group Move screen appears Go to step 12 page 165 9 When you move a metadata journal stripe group a message informs you that the file system must be stopped during the move Figure 109 Metadata Stripe x Group Message N Selecting Metadata migration forces the file system to be stopped until the metadata can be copied 10 Click OK to continue The Metadata Journal Move screen appears StorNext User s Guide 163 Figure 110 Metadata Journal Move Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Performing Stripe Group Movement t Move Stripe Group Microsoft Internet Explorer Zz E al x Metadata Journal Move Select source lun for metadata journal data spocksmall arwen01 Select destination lun for metadata journal data Remove Back Next gt X Cancel 11 Select from the displayed lists of available LUNs the source from LUN and the destination to LUN Click Insert to continue The LUN pair are displayed beneath the SOURCE gt g
87. svetem 6 St fle system 7 Mount me tie system File Systems snts4 lt File System Block Size 16384 inode Expansion Blocks node Cache Size 16 X Minimum 8 a X Maximum 2048 z increment 32 gt Jou 16 lt Max Connechons 32 Thread Pool Ev Reserved Space F Migrating File System fF Debug Log Settings Global Super User 7 AdmnT ap Actrity S Allocasons Ambutes Use Physical tiom Bandwidth Management Quotas T Client Connect Detailed node Management Disable Debugging 7 LDAP Configuraton Unis File Creation Mode On W Unix Nobody Uid Unis Directory Creation N Unix Nobody Gid Uni id Fabrication On Windows Apply Reset StorNext spock Active Emay Global s Rl iacsl nuanet If you are configuring global settings as part of the procedure for making a new file system the list at the top of the screen shows your current step in the process Previous and next steps are hyperlinked so you can click any step to move to that task 2 Inthe File Systems drop down menu select a file system 3 Inthe remaining fields choose or enter values and options for the file system you selected 101 StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Managing File System Operations File System Block Size This value defines the granularity of the file system s allocation size The default setting is 16 384 The block size must be specified in powers of 2 Inode Cache Size This value defines the number of inode
88. the following usr adic TSM exec fsaddclass lt policy_class_name gt a lt default_affinity gt lt destination_affinity gt i lt relocation_time_in_days gt For example usr adic TSM exec fsaddclass dtdclass1 a Affi Aff2 i 1 The list of affinities includes the same affinities that were defined through the GUI If you do not use the i option MinRelocTime the default relocation time of seven days is used If only one affinity is listed with the a option no relocation occurs because a destination affinity is not defined The first affinity listed after the a option is the default affinity Use the fsmodclass command to modify an existing policy class by typing the following usr adic TSM exec fsmodclass lt policy_class_name gt a lt default_affinity gt lt destination_affinity gt i lt relocation_time_in_days gt For example usr adic TSM exec fsmodclass dtdclass1 a Affi Aff2 i 1 Use the fsrelocate command to perform manual disk to disk migration You can use this command to relocate a file from the current affinity to another affinity provided it meets these criteria e The file must be a non zero sized file e The file cannot be truncated e The file cannot be specifically excluded from relocation via the fschfiat command For example usr adic TSM exec fsrelocate stornext snfs1 datat file1 a Aff2 In the previous example the file stornext snfs1 data1 file1 will be relocated to affinity Aff 36
89. the RAS Ticket Details screen the Recommended Actions screen appears This screen provides information and steps to correct the condition or fault that generated the RAS ticket Follow the instructions on the Recommended Actions screen to correct the condition or fault Figure 240 Recommended ox O Reco ended A o ape D e ong are eve alia D p licrosofi Actions Screen Ble Eat View Favorites Tools Hel a Address c Sandbox ph_docs30new RAS 0602 TP004 htm x Eco Juis Tape Drive Wrong Firmware Level Invalid Drive Type IF THEN The service ticket Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center using the contact indicates the tape information below drive s firmware level is wrong The service ticket Disconnect the drive and then contact the Quantum Technical indicates the drive type Assistance Center using the contact information below is invalid The problem IS Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets resolved The problem has NOT 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken been resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www_ quantum com support lf you are a properly trained service professional perform the procedures required for this type of tape library Print Document Clos
90. the Select Media list the blank media you want to move Select from the Select Policy Classes list the policy class to which you want to move the blank media you selected 4 Click Apply when you are ready to move the selected blank media 5 When the Status screen informs you that the blank media were successfully assigned to policy classes click OK You can either transcribe the contents of one media type to another media type or reclaim defragment media During the transcription or reclamation process SNSM uses two drives to transcribe one media to another media file by file Caution For SNSM to successfully transcribe one media to another media two drives must be online If only one drive is online the transcription or reclamation process fails 232 Figure 172 Transcribe Media Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 9 Managing Media Using the SNSM Media Functions 1 From the SNSM home page choose Transcribe from the Media menu The Transcribe Media screen appears Ouantum ff g StorNext Home Help Fee Media Aamin Repons Heip Home SNFS function mov SNSM ibe Media of more mec spock Active E Tronscte meda SJ local nyae 2 Select from the Select Media to Transcribe list one or more media and then click Apply 3 After the status screen informs you that the media has been transcribed click Close If transcription or reclamation starts and all the drive
91. the backup 4 Click Finish when the Status screen displays success Managing the Backup Policy The Backups option on the SNSM home page s Admin menu allows you to manage your backup policy by setting the media type for each copy You can also specify the maximum number of file versions to maintain and also indicate where backups reside on your managed file system StorNext User s Guide 79 Chapter 5 Backing Up StorNext Managing the Backup Policy 1 From the SNSM home page choose Backups from the Admin menu The Backup Policy screen appears Figure 47 Backup Policy Screen Quantum FY g StorNext Home Help File Meds Admin Reports Help Backup Policy Home Select Copy and media type to manage backup policy You can select Mar number of versions for this as SNFS TT SNSM F File Copy 1 od I Fie Copy 2 Media Types 3 IF File Copy 3 Media Types s F File Copy 4 Media Types s Max Backup Sets 10 DrivePoot to use is _FOdrivepool w Checksum Generation F Checksum Vaadation r Managed File System to use for Backup LY Apply Reset A StorNext spock Active 2 Enter the following information e File Copy 1 4 For each copy number 1 4 select the media type Only the media types applicable to your configuration are selectable e Max Backup Sets If desired specify the maximum number of backup sets you want to create e Drivepool to Use Select the location where backups should res
92. the disk you want to delete 4 Click Delete A message asks you to confirm that you want to delete the disk 5 Click OK to proceed with the deletion The Delete Disk status screen appears 6 After the status screen indicates that the disk has been deleted click Close This procedure describes how to defragment a disk using the snfsdefrag utility to relocate SNFS file data into a single pre allocated extent Reducing the number of extents in a file improves system performance by minimizing disk head movement when I O occurs You can defragment a single file or multiple files perform a recursive defragment on files in a directory or defragment the entire file system Defragmenting a Disk 1 Log onto a metadata controller as root The metadata controller is the computer where the StorNext server not the client is installed 2 Do one of the following e To defragment a single file or a list of files type usr cvts bin sntsdefrag lt filename gt filename e To perform a recursive defragment on files in a directory type usr cvfs bin sntsdefrag r lt directory_name gt If the directory_name value is equal to the mount point then the entire StorNext file system is defragmented StorNext User s Guide 112 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Stripe Groups Note For more information about using the snfsdefrag command refer to the snfsdefrag 1 man pages Working With Stripe Groups Sto
93. the process 10 After the status screen informs you that the expansion was completed successfully click Finish to exit the wizard Performing Stripe Group Movement The time it takes to complete the Stripe Group Movement process depends on the amount of data being moved between source and target stripe groups When moving a data stripe group the file system continues to run during the movement process StorNext does not block any new read write requests or block updates to existing files on the source stripe group All operations including metadata operations are handled normally but no new writes are allowed to the source stripe group which will be marked read only StorNext User s Guide 157 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Performing Stripe Group Movement Although the Movement Wizard focuses primarily on data movement you can also move metadata stripe groups You can move a metadata stripe group to a new stripe group of the same or greater capacity as the original metadata stripe group However during metadata stripe group movement the file system must be down and no new read write operations can occur until all metadata has been transferred and the file system is restarted The exact amount of downtime is based on the disk size Note When moving a metadata stripe group the Movement Wizard shuts down the file system Depending on the number and size of files in your system configuration metadata movement could take
94. the ticket 3 Insert the suspect media into an alternate drive and retry the read write operation 4 Ifthe error follows the media retire the media 5 If the error stays with the drive contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center to replace the drive 1 Copy the data to another piece of media 2 Remove the original media from the library and discard 1 Check the hosts system log for HBA related errors 2 Replace the HBA with a spare 3 Close the ticket and retry the read write operation on the original drive and media 4 Monitor operation for a reoccurrence of the ticket 5 Ifthe problem is unresolved contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center 1 Check the cabling between the drive and the host bus adapter 2 Ifthe problem is unresolved contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center 1 Follow the instructions in the Tape Alert service ticket 2 Ifthe problem is unresolved contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www guantum com support 404 Other RAS Messages Figure 43 Troubleshooting the Recommended Actions StorNext Software RAS
95. the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www quantum com support StorNext User s Guide 397 Figure 32 Metadata Dump Failure RAS SNFS RAS Messages Metadata Dump Failure IF The system has detected either a stale or missing metadata dump for a managed file system The problem IS resolved The problem has NOT been resolved Figure 33 File System or Metadata Capacity Warning RAS IF You receive a warning about your file system exceeding FsCapacityThreshold You recene a warning that the file system is running out of metadata capacity The problem IS resolved The problem is NOT resolved StorNext User s Guide THEN StorNext backup and restore operations and also some file system scanning operations such as a rebuild policy require the existence of a current valid metadata dump Use the following procedure to perform a metadata dump Unmount the system 1 From the SNFS Home Page choose Unmount from the Admin menu 2 Select from the Mounted File Systems list the file system to unmount 3 Click Unmount Stop the file system 1 From the SNFS Home Page choose Start Stop File System from the Admin menu 2 Select from the Active File Systems list the file system you want
96. this case Required memory 1GB 4 2 8 256K 1040MB Note This example results in a memory requirement of less than 2GB However Quantum recommends that all Distributed LAN Servers contain a minimum of 2GB of RAM This sections describes how to configure the StorNext LDAP functionality and describes related features in the Windows configuration utilities StorNext 2 7 introduced support for Light Directory Access Protocol or LDAP RFC 2307 This feature allows customers to use Active Directory LDAP for mapping Windows User IDs SIDs to UNIX User ID Group IDs Changes to Nobody mapping If a Windows user cannot be mapped to a UNIX ID the user is mapped to Nobody StorNext allows administrators to change the value of Nobody by using the file system configuration parameters UnixNobodyUidOnWindows 60001 UnixNobodyGidOnWindows 60001 These parameters are located in the file system configuration file on the server and can be manually modified by the Windows or StorNext Web GUI 332 UNIX File and Directory Modes LDAP Refresh Timeout User ID Mapping Precedence StorNext User s Guide Configuring LDAP Note Compatible Active Directory servers include Windows 2003 Server SP1 with the Windows Services for Unix 3 5 extended LDAP schema applied and Windows 2003 Server R2 Note Compatible Active Directory servers include Windows 2003 Server SP1 with the Windows Services for Uni
97. to Create a new DORCy Class or Select an esting policy dass anc press me Moat or Delete bution Press he SNFS Run bution to immediately run the policy SNSM Add Select Policy Class Policy Class List LEV polcyctass policyclass Delete policyciass3 Run K StorNext spock Active j Poey Class Operations Oe Ned maer 2 Click Add to continue The Add Policy Class screen appears Figure 194 Add Policy Class N Add New Policy Class Microsoft Internet Explorer lol xj Screen m Quantum Add Policy Class Policy Class Name EE Change Default Parameters Properties Apply X Cancel Local intranet 3 Enter in the Policy Class Name field the name of the new policy class StorNext User s Guide 261 Chapter 11 Data Migration Management Adding a Storage Policy 4 Click Properties to change the default parameters of the new policy class The Modify Parameters screen appears Figure 195 Modify Parameters Screen IF File Copy 1 LTO F T File Copy 2 Media Types 7 I File Copy 3 Media Types 7 I File Copy 4 Media Types File Age Before Migration 10 Minutes File Age Before Truncation Truncate File Immediately After Store J Max Inactive Versions fio Drive Pool to Use fs_FOdrivepool 7 Checksum Generation I Checksum Validation Stub Files mi Stub File Size Minimum Set Store Size MB 7 Maximum File Store Age Hours M Auto Store Name Run Days Start Time rt
98. to modify 5 Select from the Affinities list the affinity you want to modify 6 Click Modify The Modify Affinity screen appears E Modify Affinity Microsoft Internet Explorer 10j Quantum Modify Affinity Affinity Name Available Stripe Groups Selected Stripe Groups StripeGroup1 MetaData Journal ok J Reset LX Cancel 7 Select the stripe group s with which to associate the affinity 8 Click OK to continue 131 Deleting an Affinity StorNext User s Guide 9 10 11 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Affinities After the status screen informs you that the affinity has been modified click Close The Add Modify or Delete Affinities screen figure 78 on page 128 appears showing the association you just created Start the file system as described in Making a File System on page 106 Mount the file system as described in Mounting or Unmounting a File System on page 108 Use this procedure to delete an affinity on a configured file system Caution Deleting affinities from a file system configuration after the file system has been in use for a while could result in abnormal behavior Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center before deleting affinities from a file system configuration If the file system is mounted unmount the file system as described in Mounting or Unmounting a File System
99. to stop 3 Click Stop Perform the metadata dump 1 From the SNFS Home Page choose Metadata Dump from the Admin menu 2 Select the file system on which to perform the metadata dump 3 Click Apply After the dump is complete restart and mount the file system Close the senice ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www quantum com support Recommended Actions File System or Metadata Capacity Warning THEN Add additional storage capacity or reduce file system usage Add additional metadata storage capacity Close the sence ticket Refer to Closng Senice Dockets 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analy zing Somoe Tickets 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web bite www quantum com support 398 Figure 34 File Processing Failure RAS SNFS RAS Messages File Processing Failure IF A failure occurred while trying to process an internal file The problem IS resolved The problem has NOT been resolved Figure 35 Missing LUNs RAS Missing LUNs IF A client fails to mount be
100. type 1 From the SNSM home page choose Library gt Config Library from the Admin menu The Configure Library screen appears Figure 126 Configure Library r b vT Quantum ro s StorNext Home Help Screen Ne O Fee was hanin Repons Hep Configure Library Home Select a library to modify or delete SNFS SNSM Select Library L Add Current Libranes scsi_archivet StorNext E Configure new Archive kazar Waming SJ Local nganer 2 In the Select Library list select the library you want to modify and then click Modify The Modify Library screen appropriate to the selected library type appears showing information about the library and its associated device The following illustration shows the Modify SCSI Library screen The screen for modifying a DAS or ACSLS library looks similar StorNext User s Guide 183 Chapter 7 Managing Libraries Deleting a Library a ME io Library Screen Z Modify SCSI Library Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 x Quantum Modify SCSI Library Library Name scsi_archivel SCSI Device dev sg27 Configured LTO gt d Media Types 7 Apply Reset X Cancel 3 According to your needs move media types from the Unconfigured media types list to the Configured media types list or vice versa To move media select the desired media type and then click the right or left arrow to move the media to the opposite list Click the right arrow
101. vearchivevary to change the archive state to online 2 Run astate and verify that all drives are listed correctly in particular no drive state should be listed as Unknown 3 Wrunning fs9tace shows Unknown for every dive state da the following Run cemstop tamstart to reinitialize sofware communication pathways Repeat step 2 above Close the senace beket Refer to Closing Somer Tickets 1 Note any codes displayed on the tape library s control panel 2 Modty the ticket accardeng to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 3 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 14800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web h antum coms it OR 4 Ifyou are a properly tr ned sence professzonal perform the procedures required for this type of tape library 410 Other RAS Messages Figure 50 Robotics Move Recommended Actions Failure RAS Robotics Move Failure IF THEN The service ticket indicates 1 Verify that the tape library is online and ready that the tape library s robotics has experienced a 2 Verify the state of the tape library component that failed move failure 3 Verify the media is in the slot 4 Verify the drive library is online using the StorNext GUI The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Note any codes displayed on
102. when StorNext attempts to retrieve the file from the alternate location and cannot find the file Caution Ifa file on the original machine is renamed after it was stored by StorNext an alternate retrieve will fail for that file If a file on the original machine is not the latest version for example if the fsrestore command was used to restore a previous version whichever file has the correct pathname will be retrieved from the alternate machine 73 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Setting up Alternate Retrieval Locations Setting up this feature consists of the following steps e Enter the IP address of the alternate machine you want to use for retrieval This alternate machine may or may not contain StorNext StorNext is not required on an alternate machine e Enable the feature for the file system s desired e Specify the path on the remote machine for the file system to access 1 From the SNSM home page choose Alternate Retrieval Location from the Admin menu The Alternate Retrieval Location screen appears Figure 44 Alternate Retrieval Quantum fil gt StorNext Home Help Location Screen Zz es LL Heip Alternate Retrieval Location city 3 remote retrieval location 10 use in situsbons where fles on Home SNFS Enter mel SNSM For each ma file system si Atemate Re class enter the remote node pathname ne ems that are enabled Remote Node IPHost Name Alternat
103. will relocate E g A2 e File Age Before Relocation in days This value determines the minimum time in days a file must reside unaccessed on the primary affinity before being relocated to a secondary affinity 264 Chapter 11 Data Migration Management Adding a Storage Policy Enable Retrieve to Affinity Enable this option if you want to restore to an alternative affinity When enabled this feature allows you to retrieve truncated files to a specified affinity that might be different from the affinity assigned during ingest StorNext supports up to two affinities For example you could migrate files from A1 affinity 1 to tape storage but have the policy pull a file back to A2 affinity 2 instead of to A1 e Affinity Name Specify which of the two affinities you want the policy to retrieve files from 6 After you are finished setting parameters for the policy class click Apply 7 After the Status screen informs you that the policy class was successfully added click Close Adding a Relation Point After you have added a policy class you can use this procedure to add a to a Policy Class relation point to it 1 From the SNSM home page choose Relations from the Admin menu The Manage Policy Class Relationships screen appears Figure 196 Manage Policy EE FT 3 uantum ye be StorNext Home Hel Class Relationships Screen oi as mi Reports Help spock Active iB Drectory Potcy Class Re
104. 00 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http Awww_quantum com support 395 SNFS RAS Messages U eee Recommended Actions Changed RAS LUN Mapping Changed IF THEN A disk scan has detected a If the LUN mapping change is unexpected run the cvadmin disks and paths change in an existing LUN commands to confirm that all LUN paths are present path Also check SAN integrity and inspect the system logs to determine the root cause The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www_quantum com support Figure 29 Communication Recommended Actions Failure RAS Communication Failure IF THEN A client has disconnected Check the health of the network used for metadata traffic unexpectedly Also inspect the FSM log and the system logs on the clients and metadata controller to determine the root cause The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assist
105. 1256 848 766 On the Web http www quantum com support 379 Figure 3 Tape Drive Alerts RAS part 1 StorNext User s Guide Media and Drive RAS Messages Tape Drive Alerts Follow the recommendations below after the tape drive has issued a tape alert Some alerts are fatal and indicate that the drive is no longer useful Other alerts indicate that user intervention such as cleaning will correct the problem Note the flag number from the ticket for use in troubleshooting The host application should have received the same tape alert message Not all host applications respond with the same behavior The recommendations below are based on best practices for a typical host application IF Flag 1 01h Read warning Flag 2 02h Write warning Flag 3 03h Hard Error The problem could be the tape or the drive The drive cannot isolate the source Flag 4 04h Media Flag 5 05h Read Failure Flag 6 06h Write Failure The problem could be the tape or the drive The drive cannot isolate the source Flag 7 07h Media life Flag 9 09h Write protect Flag 10 OAh No removal Flag 11 OBh Cleaning media THEN Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center 1 Close the ticket and retry the read write operation on the original drive and media 2 Monitor operation for a reoccurrence of the ticket 3 Insert the suspect media into an alternate drive and retry the read write ope
106. 4 GB per 1M files files 336 Allowance for Special Characters The best rule of thumb is to use a 16K FsBlockSize unless other requirements such as directory ratio dictate otherwise This setting is not adjustable after initial file system creation so it is very important to give it careful consideration during initial configuration Example FsBlockSize 16K JournalSize Setting The optimal settings for JournalSize are in the range between 16M and 64M depending on the FsBlockSize Avoid values greater than 64M due to potentially severe impacts on startup and failover times Values at the higher end of the 16M 64M range may improve performance of metadata operations in some cases although at the cost of slower startup and failover time The following table shows recommended settings Choose the setting that corresponds to your configuration FsBlockSize JournalSize 16KB 16MB 64KB 64MB This setting is adjustable using the cvupdatefs utility For more information see the cvupdatefs man page Example JournalSize 16M Allowance for Special Characters StorNext User s Guide In prior StorNext releases the StorNext GUI would sometimes operate incorrectly when encountering files whose names contained certain non standard characters single quotation marks and characters with ASCII values less than 32 such as tab stops and carriage returns 337 Disk Naming Requirements Beginning with StorNex
107. 52 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Controlling User Access Modifying an Existing Use this procedure to modify an existing user s StorNext access User 1 From the User Access Control screen select a name other than admin from the User List and click Modify The Modify User screen appears with the user s name displayed in the header Figure 30 Modify User Screen Quantum Confirm Password Mm au mu n ms G H n see TA TA AA AAI AAAI AI I I d M M M M d M M M M d M M M M d d dd M AIAI AA AT TA AT TA AA 904 StorNext User s Guide 53 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Starting and Stopping StorNext Components 2 Change the user s password or modify permissions as described in Adding a New User and then click OK 3 Click Close when the Status screen displays Success Note If there is only one administrator you can modify only the password A sole administrator has full access permissions and you cannot modify these permissions Use this procedure to delete an existing StorNext user Deleting an Existin r Beletingan EX ad er 1 From the User Access Control screen select a name from the User List and click Delete 2 When asked to confirm that you want to delete the user click OK to proceed or Cancel to abort 3 If you click OK click Close when the Status screen displays Success Note If there is only one administrator you will not be allowed to delete the
108. 6 Enabling Stub File Support You can also use metacharacters when defining the file name parameter For example usr adic TSM exec fsrelocate a Aff2 stornext snfs1 relocate Enabling Stub File Support The following file system commands have been enhanced to support StorNext s Stub File feature e fsaddclass e fsmodclass e fschfiat e fschdiat Specifically a S stubsize option has been added to each command This option allows you to specify the desired file stub size in kilobytes The following example illustrates usage for each command e fsaddclass class S 1000 e fsmodclass class S 1000 e fschfiat S 1000 Additionally the following commands remain unchanged but their output now includes the target stub size and actual stub size e fsclassinfo Shows Stub File Size e fsfileinfo Shows Stub Size target stub file size and Stub Length actual stub file size StorNext User s Guide 367 Managing Storage Disks with Deduplication Enabled Managing Storage Disks with Deduplication Enabled Adding a Dedup Sdisk Modifying a Dedup Sdisk Deleting a Dedup Sdisk StorNext User s Guide Quantum recommends using the StorNext GUI to manage the storage disk deduplication feature but you can use the CLI to add modify or delete storage disks with deduplication enabled Dedup Sdisk The fsdiskcig command now includes a b option to indicate that the storage disk uses blockletized storage to store data Blo
109. 6 flags 0x1 Read 0 0 bytes s write 1 2 bytes s Using the Dynamic Resource Allocation Feature StorNext User s Guide Quantum recommends that you perform dynamic resource allocation using the StorNext GUI However if your operating system does not support using the GUI for this feature or if you are operating in a failover environment you can accomplish the following tasks from the command line e Adding a Stripe Group Without Moving e Adding and Moving a Data Stripe Group e Moving a Metadata Journal Stripe Group 371 Using the Dynamic Resource Allocation Feature Caution When you add a new disk or stripe group to your SAN often an OS dependent operation must be run to make the added device recognizable by a host Some of these utilities can disrupt access to existing disks causing access hangs or failures To avoid this stop all file system operations on the affected host before rescanning for the new device Checking the File System Before you use a Dynamic Resource Allocation feature Quantum strongly recommends running the cvfsck command on the file system you will be using This step could take a considerable amount of time to complete but your file system should be in good condition before you attempt to expand it or move stripe groups Caution If you do not run the cvfsck command to check your file system before attempting file system expansion irreparable file sys
110. 8 N Space Used Space Remaining bytes 17 Jan 2007 14 07 18 o o o Move Count Current Action Location o Export Archive vault1 None Media ID MED002 Show Details Media Class Last Access Time Write Protect FO LTO DATA 17 Jan 2007 14 07 18 N Export Space Used Space Remaining bytes 17 Jan 2007 14 07 18 UNMARKED 0 Move Count Suspect Count Location Pending Archive o s i_archive1 285 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Policy Class Information Report 6 If desired click the Show Details link to view detailed media information The Detailed Media Information Report appears Figure 212 Detailed Media Information Report 4 Media Information Report Microsoft Internet Explorer lol x file Edit View Favorites Tools Help a Quantum Media Information Report Media ID MED003 Dead Space No Files On Media MEDOO3 7 Click Close when you are finished viewing the report The Policy Class Information Report The Policy Class Information Report provides the following information e File Copy 1 4 The number of copies stored for each file A media type for File Copy N indicates the copy is to be stored a value of N A for the media type indicates this copy is not to be stored File Copy 1 the primary copy will always have an ass
111. A 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www quantum com support StorNext User s Guide 394 Figure 26 SNFS License Required RAS SNFS RAS Messages SNFS License Required IF You receive a warning that your SNFS license will expire within 48 hours The problem IS resolved The problem has NOT been resolved Figure 27 SNFS License Failure RAS THEN Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center to obtain a valid license Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www_quantum com support SNFS License Failure IF You receive a warning that your SNFS license will expire within 48 hours OR Your SNFS license has expired The problem IS resolved The problem has NOT been resolved StorNext User s Guide THEN Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center to obtain a valid license Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Serice Tickets 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 008
112. AN clients you plan to use Naturally you can always purchase additional distributed LAN client licenses as your needs expand For more information about StorNext licensing see Entering the StorNext License on page 40 StorNext provides distributed LAN client information via the status monitors on the StorNext home page SNSM home page and SNFS home page More detailed information is available through the Clients Report and the Distributed LAN Client Performance Report For more information about StorNext reports see StorNext Reports on page 270 Before you can fully use distributed LAN clients you must first configure a distributed LAN server and distributed LAN clients as described in the StorNext Installation Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Purpose of This Guide Purpose of This Guide This guide is intended to assist StorNext users perform day to day tasks with the software This guide also describes how to generate reports Quantum recommends using the graphical user interface to accomplish tasks but an appendix provides alternative procedures for users who wish to perform those tasks via the command line interface How This Guide is Organized This guide contains the following chapters e Chapter 1 Introduction e Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview e Chapter 3 SNFS Only GUI Overview e Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks e Chapter 5 Backing Up StorNext e Chapter 6 Managing the File System e Chapter 7 Managing Libraries e
113. B Inodes Candidates Candidates Clients Clients state m EE DES Library Monitor Si Refresh Refresh Rate No Refresh gt onitors State Library Name Library Type Number of Drives Capacity Fill Level vV scsi archivel SCSI 3 200 0 State Drive Name Status Mounted Media Compression vV scsi_archivet_dr1 Free EE ON Storage Disk Monitor Storage Disk State Es Status Deduplication Space GB Used Space GB Copy Files Savings E storage oisk 1 AVAIL Disabled 58 9 ET 1 0 amp a StorNext E System Status li Admin Alert kazar Active Bliavasciptveid o III attecstintranet Application StorNext System Status and Admin Alert StorNext Server Status Link StorNext User s Guide Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview The StorNext Home Page The StorNext Home Page System Monitors StorNext User s Guide On the home page you will find the following e Link to the Quantum Home Page Click the link for information about Quantum e System Monitors e StorNext Home Page Drop Down Menus e StorNext System Status e StorNext Admin Alerts e StorNext Server Status e Home and Help Links e Application Link The StorNext Home Page displays three system monitors that are used to monitor the state of the StorNext system e The File System Monitor e The Library Monitor e The Storage Disk Monitor Use these monitors to view current statistics of managed or unmanaged file systems and configured librar
114. Command Line Interface 352 Labeling Disk Devices EE N EE E 353 Modifying Global Settings ees see se se ee Ge Ge ee Ge He ee ge He Ge ee Ee gegee 354 Making a Belle RA AR EE EE a 356 Starting and Stopping SNES csssessencssoossenssosossverssssonssonsboronssasebensvonosess 357 Unmounting or Mounting a File System ccccseesesesesteeeteseeeeeeseeeeeenes 358 Creating a File System Servet c ccecsssessssssessssenesesesesneneeesesesesessesenenesetees 359 Adding a File System Client iuiss ie cccsctssstsaeetiess gedek ee Gee bekers es ERG ERGE 361 Configuring a Stripe GYOUP seekos swere ee se age GR ge oe OE ERENS Ge OE bes ene ke BR Ge eek eE Gk ie 362 Adding an AGNI nesnesi EES Ge KG iii ed gene Ges Kees ene Gee en eN ee 363 Creating a Disk to Disk Policy Class ees ee ee ee eek ee ek eek 365 Modifying a Disk to Disk Policy Class ees eee ee ee ee ee 366 StorNext User s Guide vii Manual Disk to Disk Relocation iese ee ee ee ee ke ee 366 Enabling Stub File Support ese ee se ee ee ee ee ee Gee ee be be ee 367 Managing Storage Disks with Deduplication Enabled 368 Adding a Dedup Sdisk eee ees se se er ee ee Geek ER RR ee RR Ge ee SR EG 368 Modifying a Dedup Sdisk ee ees ees se bek ER SR See ER RR ee 368 Deleting a Dedup Sdisk e esse see eers ee be Hek ER SR SEER RR ee be Re 368 Obtaining Dedup Sdisk Information ees ese eek se e 100 369 Obtaining Distributed LAN Client Info
115. Data Journal EE Back Next gt x Cancel 6 If desired you can select a stripe group that will be used exclusively for the new affinity s files To make a stripe group exclusive select the desired stripe group from the left column Not Exclusive and click the upper arrow gt to move the stripe group to the Exclusive list Conversely you can change a previously configured stripe group from exclusive by selecting it from the Exclusive column and clicking the lower arrow lt to move it to the Not Exclusive column Click Next to continue The Complete Add Affinity Task screen appears 126 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Affinities Figure 77 Complete Add Z Add Affinity Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 _ 0 x Affinity Task Screen Complete Add Affinity Task Quantum i You have completed the steps to add an affinity Please review your selections and click Next to finish the process or click Back to make changes Directory stornext snfs1 al Stripe Group StripeGroupi gt ER File System snfsi File System Jarfinity Name al Back Ned gt X Cancel BE 7 Click Next to continue After the status screen informs you that the affinity was added successfully click Close Adding an Affinity Alternatively you can use the following procedure to add an affinity to an Through SNFS existing file system through SNFS 1 Ifthe file system is moun
116. Directory List stornextfaltix1 1 stornext altix _nonmig OK X Cancel 3 On the Directory Browser screen select the directories on which to run the report 4 Click Apply The Directory Affinity Information report appears Figure 224 Directory Affinity Report Quantum Directory Affinity Report Name stomext snfs1 pc1 Affinity stornext snfst pct has no affinity assigned Name stornext snfs2 a1 Affinity stornext snfs2 s1 is sssigned affinity 91 5 Click Close when you are finished viewing the report StorNext User s Guide 300 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The File System Statistics Report The File System Statistics Report StorNext User s Guide The File System Statistics Report provides the following information Creation Date The date and time when the file system was created Active SAN Clients The number of SAN client machines associated with the file system File System Block Size The file system s block size Message Buffer Size The size of the file system message buffer Disk Devices The number of disk devices on the file system Stripe Groups The number of stripe groups on the file system Total Space The file system s total size Available Space The amount of space still available on the file system Managed Indicates whether the file system is managed Yes or unmanaged No 301 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The File System Statistics Report Use th
117. Disks Working with Tape Drives 4 Click Next to continue The Complete Add Drive Task screen appears Figure 133 Complete Add Drive Task Screen Z Add Drive Microsoft Internet Explorer ioj xj Complete Add Drive Task You have completed the necessary steps to add a drive Please review your selections and click Next to apply them or click Back to make changes Associated Library scsi_archivel Tape Compression ON Hardware Devices scsi archivel dri LTO gt gt dev sg2 scsi archivel dr2 LTO gt gt dev sg5 scsi archivel dr3 LTO gt gt dev sg3 d Back Next gt X Cancel ha 5 Review your selections Click Next to complete the task or Back to make changes 6 When the Status screen informs you that the tape drive was successfully added click Next The Tape Drive Introduction screen figure 130 on page 190 appears 7 Do one of the following e Add more tape drives Click Next to repeat the Adding a Tape Drive procedure Step 1 page 190 e When the Status Screen displays Success click Done StorNext User s Guide 193 Chapter 8 Managing Drives and Disks Working with Tape Drives Matching Devices with Slots When you select the Fibre Channel Attached Drives checkbox on the Associated Library screen the Match Devices with Slots screen appears The system specific information on this screen varies from configuration to configuration Figure 134 Match Devices with Add Drive Microsoft Inte
118. Doing so will cause the metadata to become inaccessible and result in errors Also if the parameter is changed to No the cvupdatefs command might allow bandwidth expansion of the stripe group resulting in metadata corruption Solaris On Solaris by default the usr lib fs nfs nfsfind script is run nightly by the cron daemon This script contains a find command that traverses any local file system that is exported shared via NFS If the running of this script is interfering with the performance of processes accessing StorNext file systems it can be modified to skip them To do so add the following line to the find command in the script type d fstype cvfs prune o The final find command should look like this find dir type d fstype cvfs prune o type f name nfs mtime 7 mount exec rm f The Solaris Security Toolkit formally known as JASS causes the following two issues e It disables RPC by renaming the RPC startup script disrupting the StorNext interprocess communication To fix the communication problem rename the RPC startup script in etc init d from rpc lt illegal extension gt to rpc e It turns on IPSec causing numerous warning messages in the system log file Either disable IPSec by removing the IPSec startup file in ete init d or contact Sun Technical Support to find out how to reconfigure IPSec to ignore local loopback connections Windows Windows Services for UNIX
119. Favorites Tools Help Quantum RAS Ticket Details Ticket Number 3 Opened 22 dec 2006 23 00 00 Status Closed Priority High Summary ADIC software 22 dec 2006 23 00 00 Summary StorNext StorNext Storage Manager component System backup failed Details ADIC System backup failed Missing usr adic DSM config fsmlist file View Recommended Actions Apply Analysis Close Ticket X Cancel The RAS Ticket Details screen provides the following information e Ticket Number The number of the ticket in the displayed ticket list 319 StorNext User s Guide Chapter 13 Service Management Using the System Status Tool Opened The date and time the ticket was created Status The current status of the ticket OPEN or CLOSED Priority The ticket s priority based on system impact HIGH MEDIUM and LOW Summaries and Descriptions Detailed information about the ticket including a Recommended Actions link to help you correct the fault or condition Analysis If desired enter information about the fault or condition such as a recommended action Apply Analysis Click this button to save information entered in the Analysis field Close Ticket Click this button after you have corrected the condition or fault Cancel Click this button to close the RAS Ticket Details screen 320 Chapter 13 Service Management Using the System Status Tool 3 When you click the View Recommended Actions link on
120. For E mail Notification Please Review your selections and click Next to apply them or click Back to make changes SMTP Server Name mail adic com Send Test E Mail No Add E Mail Remove E Mail Ed StorNext Back X Cancel 4 71 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Cancelling SNSM Requests 8 Review your selections and do one of the following e Click Back to change information you entered or add or remove another e mail recipient e Click Next to continue 9 When the Status screen informs you that your e mail notifications were successfully processed click Close Cancelling SNSM Requests If your system includes StorNext Storage Manager the Cancel Request option accessible from the SNSM home page s Admin menu allows you to cancel a pending mount request that has not yet been executed by the system On the Cancel Request screen you can view and select one or more requests which are listed according to request ID and request type 1 From the SNSM home page choose Cancel Request from the Admin menu The Cancel Request screen appears Figure 43 Cancel Request Quantum a J StorNext Screen i F al Home Help Fhe Cancel Request Home Solect one of more requests and cancol them from the queue SNFS SNSM Select Request ID eat ID Request Type 058 74506 Mount Select All 7 Mount Mount Mount Deselect Ali trillian Active StorNext User s Guide 72 Ch
121. Guide Chapter 9 Managing Media Using the SNSM Media Functions e Transcribing Media e Changing Media Attributes e Reclassifying a Media Class Grouping e Cleaning Media e Cancelling the Eject Media Process These functions are not available if you have only StorNext File System and not StorNext Storage Manager Use this function to flag media you plan to move manually from the source library to a destination library After you use this function you must manually remove the media from the source library and use the Library Operator Interface LOI to enter the media into the destination library Caution The library that contains the media you want to manually move must be taken offline before you continue If the library is not offline the move process will fail For information about taking a library offline see Changing the Library State on page 187 1 From the SNSM home page choose Library gt Manual Move from the Media menu The Manually Move Media screen appears 226 Figure 166 Manually Move Media Screen Figure 167 Media Browser Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 9 Managing Media Using the SNSM Media Functions Manually Move Media Home Ses Va say veg drr ge weg kyk or Select 3 Cestnaton ibraey Maer he ransackon is complete manualy remove Te media Fom Pe SNFS Eie Sk re exer be aa oto ee tony Source Archive EE Lees ede ETE Oeste Er FT IN N
122. Home Page appears only when there are open service tickets This same information is always available by selecting System Status from the Service menu Click the System Status button to view a list of tickets indicating faults reported by the system The Service System Status screen appears 16 Figure 6 Service System Status screen StorNext Admin Alerts StorNext User s Guide Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview The StorNext Home Page _ StorNext Home Help Fan a br Admin Reports Service Service System Status Home Below is a list of tickets indicating taults reported by the system SNFS To dose all open tickets use Close AF af he botom of he page SNSM F i Quantum ds Contig State GuER an ADIC software AD T ADIC software ADIC software 906 23 00 00 ADIC software ADIC software ADIC software 0 aC 20 ADIC software o closed high 23 Gec 2006 23 00 00 ADIC software 1 0 oe 201 00 ADIC software zl Details _XxCloseAll Refresh StorNext kazar L Active E Ras Adret aton Page Allows Bre waar to ope sie the product Fom one iscaton PBT T LE You can display tickets according to Open or Closed status or view all tickets If there are multiple screens of tickets you can display the Previous or Next screen by clicking those buttons Alternatively you can go directly to a page by entering that number such as 3 or 4 and then clicking the Page button On the Service
123. Internet Explorer Screen Media Types Select a media type for each of the EIF ports in the list Leave the media type set to None if the EIF port does not exist None 05 None z None os None 03 None 07 None gt 04 None 08 None 7 Scalar i2000 Back Ned gt X Cancel 2 Use the drop down lists to map the mail boxes EIF ports to specific media and then click Next The Complete Add Library Task screen figure 119 on page 176 appears 3 Review your selections Click Next to complete the task or Back to make changes 4 After a status screen informs you that the library has been successfully added click Close StorNext User s Guide 180 Chapter 7 Managing Libraries Adding a Library Adding a DAS Network Library with or without Dual Aisle Configuration 1 On the Library Name screen enter valid values and click Next Figure 124 DAS 2 Library sins Name Screen Library Name Enter a name for the new library The name can be a combination of letters and numbers but it cannot contain spaces a Enter the hostname or IP address of the DAS server Enter the client name of this host that has been configured on the library s network Scalar i2000 kazar lt 4 Back Next gt X Cancel Ed e Library Name The name of the library This can be any name you choose e Host Name The actual host name or IP address of the DAS server e C
124. Managing Libraries Adding a Library Note For more information about failover or dual aisle configurations contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center Refer to Customer Assistance on page 322 for contact information ZA Add Library Microsoft Internet Explorer i 10 x Adding a DAS Network Library with Failover 1 On the Library Name screen enter valid values and click Next Library Name Enter a name for the new library The name can be any combination of letters and numbers but it cannot contain spaces Enter the hostname or IP address of the DAS server Enter the client name of this host that has been configured on the library s network kazar Enter the standby server host name that has been configured on the library s network Enter the standby server client name that has been configured on the library s network lt Back Next gt X Cancel Library Name The name of the library This can be any name you choose DAS Server Name The name of the DAS server DAS Client Name The name of the DAS client configured on the DAS server Standby Server Host Name Standby server host name configured on the network 179 Chapter 7 Managing Libraries Adding a Library Standby Server Client Name Standby server client name configured on the network The Media Types screen appears Figure 123 DAS Media Types 3 Add Library Microsoft
125. Managing Media Adding Media to a Configured Library 2 Click Next to add media to a configured library The Associated Library screen appears Figure 150 Associated Library Zj Add Media Microsoft Internet Explorer Screen StorNext User s Guide 210 Chapter 9 Managing Media Adding Media to a Configured Library 3 On the Associated Library screen select a configured library to which you want to add media and then click Next The second Associated Library screen appears Figure 151 Associated Library Screen 2 2 Add Media Microsoft Internet Explorer Sra Backup Tape If you selected a media vault on the first Associated Library screen go to Step 1 page 214 4 On the second Associated Library screen do one of the following e Specify Mailbox and click Next e Specify Bulk Load and click Next Go to step 6 on page 213 StorNext User s Guide 211 Chapter 9 Managing Media Adding Media to a Configured Library 5 When you specify Mailbox on the Associated Library screen the Select Mailbox screen appears Figure 152 Select Mailbox Screen 7j Add Media Microsoft Internet Explorer Select a mailbox and click Next StorNext User s Guide 212 Chapter 9 Managing Media Adding Media to a Configured Library 6 When the Complete Add Media Task screen appears review your selections Figure 153 Complete Add Zj Add Media Microsoft Internet Explorer Media Task Screen Library
126. Next Assign Policy Associate blank media with a policy class Transcribe Transcribe copy media Attributes Change the media s state or attributes Reclassify Reclassify a media to a new media class Clean Clean a media by policy class file system or media identifier The SNSM Admin Menu The following SNSM Admin menu options allow you to perform administration tasks Library Perform library tasks such as Config Library Audit Library Library State and Cancel Eject Drive Perform drive tasks such as Config Drive Change Drive State and Clean Drive Storage Disk Perform storage disks tasks such as Config Storage Disk Change Storage Disk State and Clean Storage Disk Disk Space Perform an immediate file system storage or truncation policy Policy Class Add modify or delete a policy class Backup Configure backup procedure parameters Relation Add or remove directory relation points to a policy class Water Mark Parameter Set water mark parameters for more information about watermarks see Status page 11 Config Drive Pool Add modify or delete drive pools Cancel Request Cancel requested operations 25 Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview The Configuration Wizard Alternate Retrieval Location Retrieve a copy of a truncated file from a specified foreign machine when copies of the file are not accessible from the local StorNext Storage Manager machine The SNSM Reports Menu The options on the SNSM R
127. Next User s Guide Chapter 14 Customer Assistance 322 Quantum Technical Assistance Center ees ee see ee ee ee ee ee ee 322 EE EE N ENE EE EE EE EN ER EE Ee EDEN ge ee Appendix A Operating Guidelines 327 The Reserved Space Parameter esse see se se seek ee ge Ge ee Ge Ge Re ee AR ee ee 327 Distributed LAN Server Client Network and Memory Tuning 329 Distributed LAN Server and Client Network Tuning esse 329 Distributed LAN Server Memory TUNINg esse esse ee ee ek ee ee 330 Configuring LDAP ss is n GR ee ee eke Re ee ee se ven eeu ke Gen ee tee 332 Using LDAP RE ORE E EES 332 UNIX File and Directory Mode se see se se se ee ge He ee ee Ge Gee 333 LDAP Refresh TiImEOU E series Ee Nek Re ee eng Ee er vae ee eg eke ke eg 333 User ID Mapping Precedence 00 0 cece cece cesses ee ge ee Ee Ge ge eke ee 333 Setting Up Restrictive ACIS 322 iiien earainn 334 Default Single Path I O Retry Behavior esse se se ee se se Ge Ge ee Ge be ee 334 Event Handles for fsm exe on a Windows Metadata Servet 335 FSBlockSize Metadata Disk Size and JournalSize Settings 335 Allowance for Special Characters esse se ss see ek ee Ge Ge Re ee RR ee ee 337 Disk Naming Reguirements see se se ee se se ge ee Ge Ge Ge ee He Ge ee ee Ge Ge ee 338 General Operating Guidelines and Limitations ees ee se se ee Ge se ee 338 EE EE a a Appendix B HA Failover 350 SSS SET Appendix C Using The
128. Next applies a truncation policy e Min Use Enter the target percentage of occupied disk space the nightly truncation policy should attempt to achieve 4 Click Apply to continue 5 After the Status screen informs you that the operation was performed successfully click OK StorNext User s Guide 207 Chapter 9 2 m Managing Media C In StorNext data is usually stored on tapes in a media library For a detailed list of supported media refer to the StorNext Release Notes Managing tape media consists of the following tasks e Adding Media to a Configured Library e Removing and Moving Media e Using the SNSM Media Functions Caution If you are sharing a library between applications refer to the StorNext Installation Guide Adding Media to a Configured Library The following task describes how to add media to a configured library Caution Before continuing with this procedure make sure there is no media in your tape drives StorNext User s Guide 208 Chapter 9 Managing Media Adding Media to a Configured Library 1 From the StorNext home page choose Add Media from the Config menu The Add Media Introduction screen shows a list of current libraries along with the number of media each library can hold Figure 149 Add Media 7 Add Media Microsoft Internet Explorer Introduction Screen Backup Tape StorNext User s Guide 209 Chapter 9
129. Quantum The image below indicates the status of the wizard The text area below shows the actions which are being executed Operation Has been started Please close window and check the Move Stripe Group page for status sa Ema Wes 4 Back Finish X Cancel 13 After the status screen informs you that the move was initiated successfully click Finish to exit the wizard Completing Metadata After the move begins follow these steps to complete the operation Stripe Group Movement 1 Check move status by clicking the move s Status link on the Move Stripe Group screen figure 103 on page 159 The status screen for a move in progress shows the process ID current files and number of files copied This screen looks similar to this StorNext User s Guide 166 Figure 113 Stripe Group Move Status Screen Reusing LUNs in a Data Stripe Group After a Move StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Performing Stripe Group Movement Quantum Stripe Group Move Status Filesystem snfs1 Luns spocksmall gt arwen02 Time Mar 14 2007 12 10 35 Details Pid 8958 Phase Complete Progress 100 Status Success Successfully restarted filesystem snfsi X Close ha 2 When the move status is Success mark the source stripe group as down and then restart the file system 3 If the status is Failed click the link to determine the cau
130. Quantum G3 DE User s Guide User s Guide User s Guide User s Guide User s Guide StorNext 3 5 2 6 01658 10 StorNext User s Guide 6 01658 10 Ver A Rel 3 5 2 February 2010 Made in USA Quantum Corporation provides this publication as is without warranty of any kind either express or implied including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Quantum Corporation may revise this publication from time to time without notice COPYRIGHT STATEMENT Copyright 2000 2010 Quantum Corporation All rights reserved US Patent No 5 990 810 applies Other Patents pending in the US and or other countries StorNext is either a trademark or registered trademark of Quantum Corporation in the US and or other countries Your right to copy this manual is limited by copyright law Making copies or adaptations without prior written authorization of Quantum Corporation is prohibited by law and constitutes a punishable violation of the law TRADEMARK STATEMENT Quantum DLT DLTtape the Quantum logo and the DLTtape logo are all registered trademarks of Quantum Corporation SDLT and Super DLTtape are trademarks of Quantum Corporation Other trademarks may be mentioned herein which belong to other companies m Contents E EEEE Chapter 1 Introduction 1 About StorNext File Systein isssisscsssssssssssssessossissensiessissonsvensessososenssseosoeees 1 About StorNext Sto
131. Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www quantum com support OR 3 If you are a properly trained service professional perform the procedures required for this type of tape library 384 Media and Drive RAS Messages te TA EE Recommended Actions Tape Drive Drive Removed IF THEN The service ticket indicates 1 Make sure the connections to the physical drive for example fibre SCSI are a tape drive was removed secure 2 Make sure the physical tape library can see the drive The problem S resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www_quantum com support polis 10 Tapa Dili Recommended Actions Configuration Failed RAS Tape Drive Configuration Failed IF THEN Drive configuration failed 1 Capture the StorNext system state Refer to Capturing a System State 2 Contact Quantum Technical Assistance Center using the information below The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket
132. R 2 Contact the Quantum Techmcal Assistance Center You receive one of the following Invalid Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center for help further diagnosing the invalid media configuration Media Configuration messages MSM does not have any Data media classes e ATSM Media type could not be converted to an MSM meda type MSM does not have any MediaCatena for managed media A TSM Data Policy media type does Ifthe data policy media type is correct add that type of media to an archive that supports that media type not match any media existing in the system OR If the data policy media type is incorrect change that policy s media type to the correct media type StorNext User s Guide 416 Other RAS Messages Fig ure 56 Invalid Co nfig uration A media ID that masts in TSM does not 1 Visually locate the medium in a specific archive exist in MSM RAS part 2 2 Run the vaaudit command and verify that the medium now appears as a New Medium 3 Run the vareclaasify command converting the medium from the ADDBLANK to the DATA media class the medium does not physically exist in any archive or if the above commands fail contact the Quantum Technical at stance Center The SNAP configuration file is not valid Correct the errors in the configuration file usz adic SNAPI conti snepi ct The problem IS resohed Close the senice ticket Refer to Closing Sonsce Tickets The problem has NOT been r
133. R Ke gese Be Ge Ee ee Re geba Ee 240 Adding a Storage Dis se ese ese be een Eg se be Reken ene Ke sekond ee een gene ie NG eRe gie ee 241 Modifying a Storage Disk uu ees ese Re Be Fee ERG ese Eko ee Rg eN eke EG Ee Nene ie 245 Deleting a Storage Disk iseer se se seek e se ERF be Rek kke eke ke ke vee Re Ee She a 246 Changing a Storage Disk State ees ee ee ek ee ee ee ee ee ee 247 Cleaning a Storage Diskrete ese seen Gee sae kegel oe dese en ee de denk gan Se SRng ee ESE 249 SE EE NEE EE sl Chapter 11 Data Migration Management 251 Policy Classes and Relationships ee ee ee ee eek ek ek eek 252 SEU Files EE EE EE EE EE EE 252 Disk to Disk Relocation ees ee ee see Ge Ge Re Ge Ge ee Ge Ge ee be be ee 253 StorNext User s Guide lt POLE olie eene ie edu er rian E aaa 260 Adding a Relation Point to a Policy Class sesse ees ser ere 265 Modifying a Policy Class ese ee ee ee eek ee ee ke ee ee 267 Deleting a Policy Class EE ese Ee ARE RO EERS eN ie R eek nee ke 267 Applying a Policy Class eisers ese see e sk see ee sieis 269 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports 270 SNES Reports esse sessies ee een Ge ER Ge ge ee Een Ee ee ee Ds 271 The Backup Information Report esse se eee eek ee ge eek ee 271 The Drive State Information Report ieee seek ee ge eek 272 The File Information Report see ee se se se ee ge eek ee ee ge gegee 275 The Library Information RePOF ee ese see ee se sek ee RR ge ee ee Ge ER RE 278 The Library Spa
134. Recycle Bin Remove files immediately when deleted 6 Click Apply and then click OK StorNext User s Guide 343 General Operating Guidelines and Limitations Operating System Affected Component Description Windows For Windows Server 2008 and Windows Vista 1 On the Windows client machine right click the Recycle Bin icon on the desktop and then click Properties 2 Click the General tab 3 Select the mapped drive that corresponds to the StorNext mapped file system For directory mounted file systems select the file system from the list 4 Choose the option Do not move files to the Recycle Bin Remove files immediately when deleted 5 Click Apply 6 Repeat steps 3 5 for each remaining directory mounted file system 7 When finished click OK In StorNext releases prior to 3 5 the StorNext Windows client attempted to keep the UNIX uid gid and mode bits synchronized with similar fields in the Windows security descriptor However these Windows and UNIX fields were often not synchronized correctly due to mapping and other problems One consequence of this problem was that changing the owner in Windows incorrectly changed the UNIX uid and file permissions and propagated these errors into sub directories In release 3 5 the StorNext Windows client sets the UNIX uid gid and mode bits only when Windows creates a file The StorNext Windows client will no longer change the Unix uid gid or mode bits when a
135. Reset lt StorNext spock Active Remove Fies From Disk SJ lod nveret 2 Do one of the following e Enter in the Enter Individual Filename field the file you want to remove from disk You must enter the file s complete pathname e Click Browse to display the StorNext File Browser window On this window locate and select the files you want to remove from disk and then click OK On the Free Disk Blocks screen verify that the files shown are the ones you want to remove 3 Click Apply to remove the selected files from disk 4 After the Status screen informs you that the operation was completed successfully click OK Note Ifthe stub files feature is enabled and the file size is smaller than the stub file size you specified when creating the storage policy the stub file remains on the disk In this situation you might receive a Failure status after you click Apply 143 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Using the SNSM File System Functions Moving Files to New This function enables you to move files from one piece of media to Media another When you use this function files on the original media are deleted That is this is not a copy function that leaves files on the source media and places a copy on the destination media 1 From the SNSM home page choose Move from the File menu The Move Files to New Media screen appears Figure 93 Move Files to New ousnum ME gs Stornext Home Hel
136. S Home Page Link to Quantum Menus FS Monitor Help Hd MB e Pi Stortiext_ ae Shortcut ED ED Menu Options The File System Monitor enables you to view statistics on each configured file system When you open a browser to access StorNext the File System Monitor appears at the top of the browser window The File System Monitor StorNext User s Guide 31 Figure 15 File System Monitor StorNext User s Guide Chapter 3 SNFS Only GUI Overview The SNFS Home Page The File System Monitor has a Refresh button that allows you to manually update refresh the information shown in the monitor You can also select a rate from the Refresh Rate list to automatically refresh at the selected interval File System Monitor State No Refresh 30 seconds 1 minute 2 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes Si Refresh Refresh Rate No Refresh 7 File Total Space Used Space Free Space Used Store Trunc SAN System GB GB GB Inodes Candidates Candidates _Clients e snfst 189 66 4 31 185 35 35 N A N A A o ER snrs2 NA INA INA NA INA NA Na NA The File System Monitor provides the following information Refresh Click this button to manually refresh the File System Monitor Refresh Rate Set the File System Monitor to automatically refresh with this drop down menu Options range from No Refresh to every 10 Minutes State A green checkbox indicates the file system is mounted and started
137. S Qu see se se eee 400 System Resource Failure RAS eee cesses tees Ge ee ee 400 Affinity Configuration Violations RAS ee ese see ee ere 401 Quota Limit or Fragmentation Warnings RAS ese ees 402 Shutdown Error RAS se se see ee se se ee ee Ge Gee ee Ge ee Ge Ge ee 402 Initialization Failure RAS wo ccc Ge Ge ee Ge bee 403 Checksum Error RAS scscssccssscsssscestsotossecsesosssosesovesoobeesosstoase 404 Troubleshooting the StorNext Software RAS ese 405 Software Resource Violations RAS eer se sek ee RR 406 Closing Service Tickets RAS ee ee ee Se ee ee 407 Analyzing Service Tickets RAS se e certs te Ge ee 408 Viewing Service Tickets RAS eee se ee Ee Ee Gee ee ee 409 Vault Failure RAS ve csissccccsdtses ee Be sesde kie bees eke EDE Gee Re ge ee 409 Robotics Not Ready RAS ee ee ee ee ee ek eek 410 Robotics Move Failure RAS se se ee eee Ge ee Ge Ge ee A11 Robotics Wrong Firmware Level Invalid Library Type RA EE N 412 BackupEailed RAS aeaaee tiasa asset 413 Backup Erfors RAS eneee e E E 414 Configuration Violations RAS see se se ee Ge ee 415 Invalid Configuration RAS part 1 ees sees ees ee ek ek 416 Invalid Configuration RAS part 2 esse sesse ese ee ek ee 417 Downloading a System State Capture RAS sesse se see 417 Capturing a System State RAS ee see ek ee SR ee Ee Re 418 xix About StorNext File System About StorNext Storage Manager StorNext User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduct
138. SFU supports only NTFS for NFS exports Because of this limitation a Windows system cannot act as an NFS server for StorNext File System When a StorNext file system is mounted to a drive letter or a directory configure the Windows backup utility to NOT include the StorNext file system StorNext User s Guide 341 General Operating Guidelines and Limitations Operating System Affected Component Description Windows On Windows systems StorNext may log error messages after reboot if it tries to start before some other services For example if the network is not yet available a StorNext client cannot contact a StorNext server and posts an error in the logs The client will continue to retry the connection until it is successful To prevent this from occurring make the startup of StorNext services dependant on another Windows service for example the Workstation service For more information see the Microsoft Knowledge Base article Q193888 How to delay loading of specific services Windows based SNFS clients do not support symbolic links that point to a file system outside of SNFS Symbolic links are created either by a UNIX Linux client or by a Windows client and are referred to as junctions Virus checking software can severely degrade the performance of any file system including SNFS If you have anti virus software running on a Windows Server 2003 or Windows machine Quantum recommend
139. SSIGN Policy Seret a uses geselig e eg eN n ed egg de gegee 232 Transcribe Media Screen iese se ee ee ee ek ek eke 233 Change Media Attributes Screen esse ese se se ee se ee 234 Reclassify Media Screen ese se ee se cesses He Ge ee Ee Ee Gegee ee 235 Media Class Browser WindOW ees ees ek ee ek ek ek 236 or AE IE ev EE eini 237 Cancel Eject Process Screen ese ee see ee ee ee 238 Configure Storage Disk Screen ees ee ee ee ek 241 Add Storage Disk Introduction Screen see ese se se ee 242 Add Storage Disk Screen se see ee se Ge ee Ge Ge Ge ee be be ee 243 Complete Storage Disk Screen ee ee ee 244 Modify Storage Disk Screen esse eee se ee Ee Ee Gee ee ee 245 Delete Warning Message ee ee ee ee ee Ge ee ee 247 Change Storage Disk State Screen ee ee ee ee 248 Clean Storage Disk Screen ees ee ee ee ee ee 249 Storage Policy Introduction Screen ees see ese ee ee 254 Policy Class and Directory Screen se see se se se ee Ge be ee 255 Directory Browser WindOW e ees se see ee se ee ek ee 256 Relocation Policy Selection Screen sesse se se ee Ge Ge ee 257 Store Truncate and Relocate Times Screen iese 258 XV xvi Figure 191 Figure 192 Figure 193 Figure 194 Figure 195 Figure 196 Figure 197 Figure 198 Figure 199 Figure 200 Figure 201 Figure 202 Figure 203 Figure 204 Figure 205 Figure 206 Figure 207 Figure 208 Figure 209 Figure 210 Figure 211 Figure 212 Figure 213 Figure 214 Figure 215 Figur
140. To populate this list you must first add disks to the file system by doing the following 1 From the SNFS home page choose Disks from the Config menu StorNext User s Guide 115 StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Stripe Groups 2 Select the file system in which the disks reside and then click Add 3 Add one or more disks Disks in Stripe Group Disks associated with the new stripe group Available Affinities Affinities associated with existing stripe groups that if selected would also apply to this stripe group Affinities in Stripe Group Affinities associated with the new stripe group Metadata Journal and Exclusive Enable one or more of these options check the boxes to create a location for metadata and journaling on the stripe group e To enable placing metadata and journaling but not user data on the new stripe group select the Metadata Journal and Exclusive checkboxes Do not associate an affinity with a metadata journal or an exclusive stripe group e To enable placing only metadata on the new stripe group select both the Metadata and Exclusive checkboxes e To enable placing only journaling on the new stripe group select both the Journal and Exclusive checkboxes e Journaling can be enabled on only one stripe group e If the Metadata and or Journal boxes are not checked on any of the stripe groups in this file system default settings cause metadata an
141. UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http Awww quantum com support OR If you are a properly trained service professional perform the procedures required for this type of tape library 412 Figure 52 Backup Failed RAS StorNext User s Guide Other RAS Messages Backup Failed Backup failure errors typically fall into one of three categones Media Issues for example out of media archeve offline no drives available and so on e System Sofware Issues for example metadata could not be applied o File System issues for example file system not mounted fem not running and so on To determine the exact cause of the backup failure see the error log included in the RAS notificaton or the email notification The error log contams the actual output of the snbackup command and will help the Quantum Technical Assistance Center determine the exact cause of the backup faure The following table lists some common backup failure errors and the corresponding recommended actions For errors not listed contact the Quantum Technical Assrstance Center IF THEN You receive one of the following modia Check all media drives and archives errors All copies of files not stored Store files to media failed Store failed for backup files You receive one of the following system Restart the StorNext software via the GUI Before you can do a backup the storage manager the d
142. Use the Downloading a System State Capture feature to save the captured system state to a local or network drive for troubleshooting purposes 1 Access the StorNext home page 2 Choose Capture State from the Service menu The Service Capture System State screen appears 3 Click Capture The Progress window appears ed NOTE Once the Progress window appears you cannot cancel or stop this action However you can close the window by clicking the X in the upper right corner of the window but confirmation of operation success or failure is NOT shown IF THEN The Progress window shows Success The system state was successfully captured The Progress window shows Failure The system state was NOT captured To view the troubleshooting procedures click View Recommended Actions To view the error details click Error Logs for information on why the system state was not captured To capture an additional system state repeat Steps 1 3 3 Click Close to close the Progress window The Tools Capture System State screen appears 4 Download the captured state Refer to Downloading a System State Capture StorNext User s Guide 418
143. User s Guide Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview The SNFS and SNSM Home Pages StorNext Help J a v E vanum ft g7 a aaae Fie Medo Admin Repons Heip 2 Home Library Monitor LE Retresh Retesh Rate No Refresh w SNFS SNSM v ses arehret scsi B Roo fo seel arehivel art Free a seal arehivel dr Free scn archiver ory Froe No StorNext Storage Disks Configured Click to configure a Storage Disk al StorNext kazar Active Ee D Bianet The SNSM File Menu The following SNSM File menu options allow you to manage file data and directories Store Store files to a storage medium e Version Show the version s of files stored on storage medium e Recover File Recover deleted files e Recover Directory Recursively recover deleted directories e Retrieve File Retrieve truncated files from a storage medium e Retrieve Directory Recursively retrieve truncated directories from a storage medium e Free Disk Blocks Truncate files e Move Move files from one media to another e Attributes Change file attributes 24 StorNext User s Guide Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview The SNFS and SNSM Home Pages The SNSM Media Menu The following SNSM Media menu options help you manage media and libraries Library Perform media movement tasks within a library Manual Move Mount and Dismount Assign Policy Add media types to a policy class Remove Remove media from Stor
144. a Directory The Ado Affinity Wizard will Go both these steps File Systems v Apply StorNext spock Active 2 Select from the File Systems list the file system on which you want to set the new affinity 3 Select from the Affinities list the affinity to set on the selected file system 4 Click Apply to continue The Set Affinity screen appears Figure 81 Set Afinity Screen Eryn server led Quantum Set Affinity Directory stornext snfs1 Browse OK X Cancel StorNext User s Guide 130 Modifying an Affinity Figure 82 Modify Affinity Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Affinities 5 On the Set Affinity screen click Browse and select or create the directory on the file system to which you want to set the affinity Click OK 6 When the status screen informs you that the operation was completed successfully click OK Use this procedure to modify an affinity on a configured file system 1 Ifthe file system is mounted unmount the file system as described in Mounting or Unmounting a File System on page 108 2 Ifthe file system is started stop the file system as described in Starting and Stopping the File System on page 107 3 From the SNFS home page choose Affinities from the Config menu The Add Modify or Delete Affinities screen figure 78 on page 128 appears 4 Select from the File Systems drop down menu the file system you want
145. a Disk Size and JournalSize Settings Values less than 16K are not recommended in most scenarios because startup and failover time may be adversely impacted Setting FsBlockSize FSB to higher values is important for multi terabyte file systems for optimal startup and failover time Note This is particularly true for slow CPU clock speed metadata servers such as Sparc However values greater than 16K can severely consume metadata space in cases where the file to directory ratio is low e g less than 100 to 1 For metadata disk size you must have a minimum of 25 GB with more space allocated depending on the number of files per directory and the size of your file system The following table shows suggested FsBlockSize FSB settings and metadata disk space based on the average number of files per directory and file system size The amount of disk space listed for metadata is in addition to the 25 GB minimum amount Use this table to determine the setting for your configuration Average No of Files Per File System Slze Less File System Size 10TB Directory Than 10TB or Larger Less than 10 FSB 16KB FSB 64KB Metadata 32 GB per IM Metadata 128 GB per 1M files files 10 100 FSB 16KB FSB 64KB Metadata 8 GB per 1M Metadata 32 GB per 1M files files 100 1000 FSB 64KB FSB 64KB Metadata 8 GB per 1M Metadata 8 GB per 1M files files 1000 FSB 64KB FSB 64KB Metadata 4 GB per 1M Metadata
146. a red x indicates the file system is not active or not mounted File System The name of the file system you may see more than one file system being monitored depending upon how your StorNext system is configured This pane is scrollable to accommodate numerous file systems Total Space GB Total space in GB for the file system Used Space GB Currently used space in GB for the file system Free Space GB Amount of free space in GB for the file system 32 Drop down Menus and Options Figure 16 File System Menus StorNext User s Guide Chapter 3 SNFS Only GUI Overview The SNFS Home Page Used Inodes The number of inodes currently in use on the file system e Store Candidates Number of files selected for storage to secondary media This field does not apply to SNFS only configurations e Trunc Candidates Number of files that have been stored and meet the criteria to become a truncation candidate This field does not apply to SNFS only configurations Clients The number of StorNext clients connected via fibre channel or iSCSI for which you are licensed e Distributed LAN Clients The number of StorNext distributed LAN clients for which you are licensed For more information about distributed LAN clients see About Distributed LAN Clients on page 2 e Status The status shows the system status usage in percentage The following drop down menus are located in the grey bar towards the to
147. aging the File System Working With Affinities Figure 74 Select Directory A Add Affinity Microsoft Internet Explorer Screen Pstomenjsnisvat Browse 4 Specify the directory for the new affinity You can enter a pathname directly in the field or click Browse to select from a list of existing directories If desired you can also create a new directory after you click Browse Click Next to continue The Assign Affinity screen appears StorNext User s Guide 124 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Affinities Figure 75 Assign Affinity Z Add Affinity Microsoft Internet Explorer Screen MetaData Journa clusive StipeGroup3 MetaData Exclusive 5 Select from the displayed the list the stripe group to which you want to assign the new affinity If none of the shown stripe groups are available you must exit the procedure and create additional stripe groups before proceeding Click Next to continue The Exclusive Stripe Group screen appears StorNext User s Guide 125 Figure 76 Exclusive Stripe Group Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Affinities E Add Affinity Microsoft Internet Explorer oy x Exclusive Stripe Group Assign which stripe groups will be exclusive An exclusive stripe group will be only used for for files with the new affinity Not Exclusive gt Exclusive StripeGroup1 Meta
148. ail E mail the selected log file to Quantum support e Show Show the selected log file in a separate window 4 If you clicked Show the selected log file appears in a separate window Click one of the following to navigate around the displayed log file e Next Page to view the log s next page e Previous Page to view the previous page e Top to move to the beginning of the log End to move to the end of the log StorNext User s Guide 58 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Scheduling StorNext Events e Cancel to close the window Figure 35 Log File Example lox Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help a File Jusr adic 0SMidata s og eviog lines 1 250 Total Lines in File 3606 0110 09 47 55 0x40158080 Info Server Revision 2 7 0 Build 64 Built for Linux 2 6 5 7 97 defau 0110 09 47 55 0x40158080 Info Configuration DiskTypes 1 Disks 1 StripeGroups 1 ForceStripedlignment 1 MaxConnections 25 ThreadPoolSize 32 StripeAlignSize 4 FsBlockSize 16384 BufferCacheSize 64M InodeCacheSize 16384 RestoreJournal Enabled RestoreJournalDir usr adic database metadumps 0110 09 47 55 0x40158080 Info Self gandalf adic com IP address is 172 16 41 97 0110 09 47 55 310928 Ox40156060 Debug No fsports file port range enforcement disabled 0110 09 47 55 0x40158080 Info Listening on TCP socket gandalf adic com 2049 0110 09 47 55 0x40158080 Info Node 0 gandalf adic
149. an the policy class default change the File Attributes first Number of Copies C One Two Three Four Truncation C Immediate C By Policy Select Media Type Drive Pool Name Default Drive Pool 7 By Policy Minimum File Size VY Apply X Cancel led Z a Change Parameters cy Local intranet 4 On the Optional Store Parameters screen enter values and then click Apply e Number of Copies Specify the number of copies 1 4 to create for each file Truncation Specify whether file truncation is applied immediately to each file or by policy e Drive Pool Name Choose the default drive pool from a list of available drive pools Drive pools must be previously created e Minimum File Size Specify the minimum size a file must be in order to qualify for storage e Select Media Type Specify whether files are stored according to the policy s media type or on storage disk SDISK or Dedup SDISK StorNext User s Guide 136 Changing a File Version Figure 86 Change File Version Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Using the SNSM File System Functions 5 On the Store Files screen click Apply to continue 6 After the Status screen informs you that the operation was completed successfully click OK Use this function to find alternate versions of a specified file 1 From the SNSM home page choose Version from the File menu The Change File Version screen appea
150. an two atfnities across all managed file systems are allowed file systems Examine all OSM configuration files usz adic DSM config cfg For all of the configuration files that have the Data Migration Flag set to YES change the stripe group Affinities 30 there are no more than a total of two The number of affinities on managed fle Examine all OSM configuration files usz adic DSM config cfg For all of the configuration files that have systems do not match for TSM and the Data Migration Flag set to YES make sure the complete list of affinities matches the TSM affinity names found in CVFS the TIERDEF database table TSM does not recognize the CVFS Examine all DSM configuration fles usz adic DSM contig ctg For all of the configuration files that have managed file system affinity name the Data Migration Flag set to YES make sure the complete hst of athnities matches the TTERNAME fields found in the TSM TIERDEF database table An affinity in a policy class is not found Make sure the non zero elements in the TIERLIST field of the TSM CLASSDEF tables all match the TIERNUM fields in the TIERDEF table in the TSM TIERDEF table A StorNext fle system has exceeded Examine the TSM logs for a message identifying the full file system and then remove unwanted files or save the mwamum allowable threshold for them off to a different hle system percent used OR e Log onto the application host and issue a mount command to obtain
151. ance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www_quantum com support StorNext User s Guide 396 SNFS RAS Messages Figure 30 Metadata Recommended Actions Inconsistency Detected RAS Metadata Inconsistency Detected IF THEN The FSM has detected a Check SAN integrity and inspect the system logs for VO errors metadata inconsistency If the SAN is healthy run cvfsck on the affected file system at the earliest convenient opportunity The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www quantum com support Figure 31 Bad File System Recommended Actions Metadata Dump RAS Bad File System Metadata Dump IF THEN The system has detected Run snmetadump for the affected file system as soon as possible that a new metadata dump is required Note This condition could occur if cvfsck or cvupdatefs was recently run or if a Restore Journal error occured and the Restore Journal was shut down The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify
152. antum 2 Select from the Active File Systems list one or more file systems to include in the report Click Apply to continue The File System Client Report appears StorNext User s Guide 307 Figure 230 File System Client Report Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The File System LAN Client Report Quantum File System Client Report File System snfs1 Mounted on stornext snfs1 SAN Clients LAN Servers LAN Clients 5of 15 4 20f15 SAN Clients Distributed LAN Servers Distributed LAN Clients ha stormext2 adic com stormext adic com paradise sdic oom stornext4 adic com scoop adic com Dubnium adic com scoop adic com stornext8 adic com stornext8 adic com stornext3 sdic com stornext3 adic com LAN Servers Listening IP Port TCP Window Size Transfer Buffer Size Transfer Buffer Count Daemon Threads stornext3 adic com 10 16 50 121 32779 il 64K 256K 16 j 8 E Luns ha stornext1 on device sdbf A sdo S sectors 622823584 sector size 512 LAN Servers Listening IP Port TCP Window Size Transfer Buffer Size Transfer Buffer Count Daemon Threads scoop adic com 172 16 99 240 32781 Bak 256K 16 8 Luns ha stornext1 on device sdbg A sdp S sectors 622823584 sector size 512 LAN Servers Listening IP Port TCP Window Size Transfer Buffer Size Transfer Buffer Count Daemon Threads
153. ape 7 x e Mozilla 1 0 and later e FireFox 1 5 and later or 2 0 and later To ensure proper browser operation all monitors must be set to display at a minimum resolution of 1074 x 768 2 Inthe browser s Address field type the full address of the machine and its port number and then press Enter For example http lt machine name gt lt port number gt Use the name of the machine and port number you copied when you installed the StorNext software Note Typically the port number is 81 If port 81 is in use use the next unused port number Le 82 83 etc After you enter the machine name and port number the following screen appears Figure 13 StorNext File System Login Window Enter username for StorNext Access Verification at lagrange 81 User ID mw o OK Clear Cancel 3 In the User ID field type admin and press TAB 4 Inthe Password field type admin and click OK Note For information on changing your password or setting up additional users refer to the StorNext Installation Guide The initial StorNext GUI appears StorNext User s Guide 30 Chapter 3 SNFS Only GUI Overview The SNFS Home Page The SNFS Home Page The SNFS home page contains the following components e A link to the Quantum Home Page e The File System Monitor e Drop down Menus and Options e Shortcut Menu Options e Home and Help Links e StorNext Server Status Figure 14 SNF
154. apter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Setting up Alternate Retrieval Locations 2 Select from the Select Request ID list the pending requests you want to cancel If desired you can click Select All to select all requests 3 Click Apply to continue 4 When the Status screen informs you that the selected requests have been successfully cancelled click OK The requests you selected are now removed from the list on the Cancel Request screen Setting up Alternate Retrieval Locations StorNext User s Guide In situations where file retrieval fails because the normal file copies cannot be retrieved from the machine on which StorNext Storage Manager resides this feature enables you to retrieve a copy of the truncated file from a different machine For example if StorNext creates two copies of each file when retrieving a truncated file StorNext tries to retrieve Copy One and then Copy Two If neither of these copies can be retrieved and this feature is not enabled the retrieval fails However if this feature is enabled for the file system after retrieving Copy Two fails Storage Manger tries to retrieve the file from the alternate machine you specified during feature setup This feature applies only to managed file systems that have at least one configured policy class For this feature to work correctly it is your responsibility to make sure all files you might want to retrieve are copied to the alternate machine Otherwise retrieval will fail
155. art 107 Mounting or Unmounting a File System Figure 66 Mount or Unmount File System Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Managing File System Operations e The Start Stop File System Status screen appears e Select a file system from the Active File Systems list and click Stop e The Start Stop File System Status screen appears 3 After the status screen informs you that task has successfully completed click Close This task enables you to mount or unmount a file system You must unmount a file system if you want to take it out of service to make configuration changes or perform other administrative tasks You must mount a file system to place it back into service Note Before you unmount the file system you must stop the SNSM component as described in Starting and Stopping StorNext Components on page 54 Note The StorNext GUI performs NFS export unexport on mount dismount 1 From the SNFS home page and choose Mount Unmount from the Admin menu The Mount or Unmount File System screen appears PE Quantum gt StorNext Home Help Contig Admin Reports Heip Mount or Unmount File System Home Select a fe system and click Mount or Unmount SNFS SNSM 6 Start he fle system T Mount the file system Unmounted File Systems Mounted File Systems Moum gt LA Unmount StorNext kazar L Active E Mount Urmount Fie Syrtes EJ local i
156. ary storage i e less critical data on lower duty cycle slower disk You might have another larger fibre channel stripe group for storing raw content i e high value data on higher duty cycle higher performance disk Getting data to specific stripe groups is accomplished using affinities a mapping that ties a directory in the file system to a specific stripe group When you write files to a directory StorNext uses affinities to 113 Adding a Stripe Group Figure 69 Configure Stripe Group Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Stripe Groups transparently write those files to the desired disk type This means you don t have to have two or more separate file systems e g one for critical data and another for temporary data Instead you have a single namespace for simplified management Working with a stripe group consists of these tasks e Adding a Stripe Group e Modifying a Stripe Group e Deleting a Stripe Group Use this procedure to add a stripe group 1 From the SNFS home page choose Stripe Groups from the Config menu The Configure Stripe Groups screen appears 7 TT Re Quantum F r StorNext Home Help Contig AGT Repons Keip Configure Stripe Groups Home Select ate system and add a new stipe group or select an existing stripe group in the file system to moat or delete SNFS SNSM om w Me system available for use Adda file system 2
157. at have been updated or removed A piece of media that contains nothing but removed files will not be considered blank until it is cleaned Configuration Wizard A tool for setting up a basic environment for the management of data both on disk and on removable media tape or disk It appears the first time the administrator connects to the browser after installing StorNext Data Storage Manager DSM One of several components that make up StorNext The DSM corresponds to the StorNext File System Drive Pool A grouping of drives for use in storing and retrieving data Fibre Channel FC A high speed data transfer architecture File Transfer Protocol FTP The protocol used on the Internet for sending files 323 jo U 324 GUI Graphical User Interface Managed Directory A directory that has a policy class relationship Managed File System A file system that enables automatic data movement managed by StorNext Storage Manager between the primary disk and secondary storage either disk or tape MediaClass A grouping of media used for storing or retrieving data Media Storage Manager MSM The Media Storage Manager is responsible for controlling media and archives Metadata Server The system hosting the SNFS and SNSM server installation and processes Policy Class A set of rules and criteria set up by SNSM that control the movement of data between primary disk to secondary storage either disk or tap
158. at there are enough media available for all policies to store all file copies and that SNSM media are configured correctly e Policies Verify that SNSM is keeping up with file system events and store candidate processing Use the following procedure to run a health check All of the health options are linked to specific information about that particular health check 1 From the StorNext home page choose Health Check from the Service menu The Health Check Tests screen appears TT Quantum AN a StorNext Home Help Config Admin Reports Service Help Health Check Tests Home Select one or more health checks and press Run to execute Selecta heal check and press History to see f last five runs SNFS o Click on heas check description to see d on on Me health check SNSM e Click on last status to see the results of m given health check F Select all Last Start Time Last Finish Time Last Status Archive NIA NIA NIA F Config NIA NA NA F Dedup SDISK NA NIA NA F Disk Space NIA NIA NIA F Dive NIA NIA NA F Media NIA NA NIA F Policies NIA NA NIA Stop Any Remaining Tests on an Error 7 Run History X Cancel StorNext altixt LO Active 2 Select one or more health checks to run and then click Run 3 When the Status screen informs you that the check have run successfully click Close After running a health check you can view a five run history of each health check that has been run 312 Chapter 13 Service Manag
159. atabase and the software errors file system must be running 1 Error connecting to 1 This error indicates that the Linter database is not running database 2 This error indicates that SNFS was not installed correctly or that the Configuraiton Wizard was terminated 2 Exzoz opening s sysperm prematurely ile 3 This error indicates that the storage manager is not running 3 TSM software not running 4 This error indicates an HA problem where a backup was run on the standby system 4 Cannot run backup on standby server You receive one of the following file 1 Make sure the fle system exists and is mounted sod that ie eam mages FM io ning This system errors might require restarting the file system to get FSM running and the file system mounted Could not set store exclude 2 Metadata issues might require re dumpang metadata This process involves unmounting the file system on stagingAres stopping the file system dumping metadata restarting the file system and remounting the file system Backup staging directory 3 ifthere is access loss to the file system for example you cannot create a directory repeat step 1 could not be created Backup temporary directory could not be created Invalid arguments Caused during manual CLI invocation when incorrect syntax is used Application of metadata journals failed Missing SENV DSM DIR config femlist file SNFS
160. ation go to step 8 page 258 256 Chapter 11 Data Migration Management Adding a Storage Policy Figure 189 Relocation Policy Selection Screen A Add New Storage Policy Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 On the Relocation Policy screen select from the first drop down list the affinity from which to move your data Select from the second drop down list the affinity to which you want to move the data StorNext User s Guide 257 Chapter 11 Data Migration Management Adding a Storage Policy 8 Click Next to continue The Store Truncate and Relocate Time screen appears Figure 190 Store Truncate and Relocate Times Screen Z Add New Storage Policy Microsoft Internet Explorer a sl elf Store Truncate and Relocation Times Enter the minimum store truncation and relocation time The relocation time is only applicable to Disk To Disk Minimum Store Time Minutes 5 Minimum Truncation Time Days B Minimum Relocation Time Days Backup Tape lt StorNext _X Cancel e Minimum Store Time Minutes The minimum amount of time a file must remain unaccessed before it is considered a candidate for storage e Minimum Truncation Time Days The minimum number of days a file must remain unaccessed before it is considered a candidate for truncation e Minimum Relocation Time Days The minimum number of days a file must remain unaccessed on the primary affinity before it is considered a can
161. aversed by this find command which can have a dramatic impact on the performance of other applications currently using these file systems To prevent the traversal of StorNext file systems modify the find command so it reads find local type d fstype cvfs prune o type f name core o name dead letter atime 7 mtime 7 exec rm f StorNext User s Guide 339 General Operating Guidelines and Limitations Operating System Affected Component Description Linux StorNext does not support the use of loopback IP addresses other than 127 0 0 1 SUSE Enterprise Linux 10 systems sometimes have an entry for 127 0 0 2 in the etc hosts file This causes various FSM operations to fail with the error Not Local Linux Distributed Gateway Proxy Server Restrictions The dpserver file used to configure network interfaces and addresses for Distributed Gateways has a counter intuitive restriction If an interface has more than one address an address must be specified in the dpserver file However if the interface has only one address an address cannot be specified or the mount command will fail Many versions of Linux run a cron script nightly to build a database used by the slocate command If StorNext file systems are mounted they are traversed by this cron job which can have a dramatic impact on the performance of other applications currently using these file systems Perform the fo
162. brary Type Screen 7 Add Library Microsoft Internet Explorer Network Type mad Scalar i2000 3 Select the type of library you have SCSI Network or Vault If you select Network choose ACSLS or DAS from the drop down list 4 Click Next to continue 5 Follow the procedures for your library type e Adding a SCSI Library on page 173 e Adding an ACSLS Network Library on page 177 e Adding a DAS Network Library on page 178 e Adding a Vault Library on page 182 StorNext User s Guide 172 Chapter 7 Managing Libraries Adding a Library Adding a SCSI Library After you specify SCSI on the Library Type screen and then click Next the Library Name screen appears Figure 116 Library Name Screen A Add Library Microsoft Internet Explorer i Scalar i2000 StorNext If you have no SCSI libraries configured a message informs you that no SCSI devices were detected If you receive this message configure the library and devices before proceeding StorNext User s Guide 173 Chapter 7 Managing Libraries Adding a Library 1 On the Library Name screen accept the default library name or type a name and then click Next The Media Types screen appears Figure 117 Media Types Screen T Add Library Microsoft Internet Explorer StorNext 2 Select a media type from the list and then click Next The SCSI Device screen appears StorNext User s Guide 174 Chapter 7 Managing Lib
163. cause a LUN is missing The problem IS resolved The problem has NOT been resolved StorNext User s Guide THEN See the error details for more complete information about the failure Possible reasons for the failure e An attempt to roll the file close the current file and open a new one for use failed e A corruption in the file was detected In general the system can continue without intervention after one of these errors occurs However if you experience these failures on a regular basis it could be indicative of a more serious situation and you should contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www quantum com support THEN Check the system logs to determine the root cause Run the cvadmin disks and paths commands and then check for missing LUNs Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www quantum com su
164. ccess or failure is NOT shown IF THEN The Progress window e service ticket was successfully closed shows Success The Progress window The senice ticket was NOT closed To view the troubleshooting procedures click shows Failure View Recommended Actions To view the error details click Error Logs for information on why the ticket was not closed To close a service ticket repeat Step 1 through Step 3 4 Click Close to close the Progress window StorNext User s Guide 407 Figure 46 Analyzing Service Tickets RAS StorNext User s Guide Other RAS Messages Analyzing Service Tickets Use this procedure to add information to a service ticket related to system troubleshooting and to view the current status of a problem reported by StorNext All modified entries are kept with the ticket number and ticket summary when the service ticket is closed 1 Open and view a service ticket Refer to Viewing Service Tickets 2 Click Analysis The Ticket Analysis screen appears 3 Enter all relevant information regarding actions taken to resolve the issue and then click Apply The Progress window appears showing the status of the ticket being modified vZ NOTE Once the Progress window appears you cannot cancel or stop this action However you can close the window by clicking the X in the upper right corner of the window but confirmation of success or failure is NOT shown ME HEN O The P
165. ccording to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www quantum com support StorNext User s Guide 393 SNFS RAS Messages oue MEE DE Recommended Actions VO Error IF THEN An VO error has occurred Check LUN and disk path health as well as overall SAN integrity Also inspect the system logs for driver level VO errors The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www guantum com support Figure 25 Journaling Error Recommended Actions Detected RAS Journaling Error Detected IF THEN Journal recovery has failed Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center and open a service request The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the US
166. ce Used Report ees se se ee se ee ee ge eek 280 The Media Information Report se se se ee tees Ge ee ge gegee 281 The Policy Class Information RepOT ee esse sesse ee seke eek Se eke 286 The Relation Information Report esse eee ge ee ge eek ee 290 The Request Information Report esse se se ee se ee ee ge eek ek 292 The Scheduler Information Report cee seek ee ge eek 293 The Storage Disk Information Report sesse see ee ee se seen 295 The Directory Affinity RepOTE eeeee esse see ens sek ek RR EER RR Ee Pe DERE 298 The File System Statistics Report ees esse eek ek eke ee ee ee 301 The Stripe Group Statistics Report eee ee eke ee ee ee ee 303 The File System Client Report see ese se sek ek SR REK RR Ee Ge ER Re 305 The File System LAN Client Report ee se se sek ek see ekke 308 Chapter 13 Vi Service Management 311 Using Health Check uu ese esse sie ese Re Ee Rek ede KERK eke Kees eke 311 Running a Health Check ese se seer ee ee seek eke Re ER Ge Ge ee RE 312 Viewing the Health Check History ees ees sesse ee ee ee ee ee 312 Viewing the Health Check Results esse esse se ee ee 314 Using State Capture e es iese bee sd ee VERSEKER SE ewe Ven kk ewe Oe 315 Capturing the Current System State esse se see ee se ee ee 315 Downloading a Previous System Capture esse esse 316 Deleting a Previous System Capture sesse ee see ee 317 Using the System Status Tool ees se se se ee ee ee eek eek 317 Stor
167. choose Recover File from the File menu The Recover Files screen appears 7 E a Quantum AM StorNext Home Help fee Moss Admin Reports Help I Recover Files Home Enter a file finer and click Browse to find and select deleted files for recovery The fie will be recovered in a truncated si n use te Retneve File page to return the file to disk The fle filter can contain SNFS widcards anywhere in Pie sting SNSM Enter Fite Filter Browse Fae Name Date Time Deketed Recoverable Files Select All L Oeestedt Al L Apply Reset L StorNext spock Active E Recover Fies SJ loca intranet 2 Enter in the Enter File Filter field a file filter to help you locate the deleted file you want The filter can include wildcard characters the asterisk anywhere in the filter string 3 Click Browse to locate and select files that have been deleted The StorNext Recoverable Files screen shows a list of all deleted files that apply to the filter you entered The date and time the file was deleted is also shown 138 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Using the SNSM File System Functions Figure 88 StorNext Peles Recoverable Files Screen Quantum StorNext Recoverable Files File Name Date Time Deleted Select All Deselect All La Back JI Next gt d ok X Cancel VY Apply 4 Select from the list the files you want to undelete To expedite file selection you can use the Select All or Deselect All buttons
168. cketized storage is how this feature accomplishes space savings For example you would enter the following command to create a storage disk with deduplication enabled Input fsdiskcfg a p apps b sdisk1 Before you add a dedup storage disk you can also use the fsdiskcfg commands b l options to view a list of available locations where a dedup storage disk can be created The correct syntax is fsdiskcfg b l You can also use the fsdiskcfg command s l option without the b option to view all available location where a standard storage disk can be created The correct syntax is fsdiskcfg I You can modify the location for the dedup sdisk but the dedup sdisk must be blank and the new location must be under the same file system For example this is how you would invoke the fsdiskcfg command for sdisk1 which was previously created under apps Input fsdiskcfg m sdisk1 p apps subdir You can delete a dedup sdisk by using the fsdiskcfg command s d option For example this is how you would invoke the fsdiskcfg for sdisk1 that was previously created Input fsdiskcfg d sdisk1 368 Obtaining Dedup Sdisk Information StorNext User s Guide Managing Storage Disks with Deduplication Enabled You can obtain information for a dedup sdisk by running the fsmedinfo command on the dedup sdisk For example if you invoke the fsmedinfo command for a dedup sdisk named sdisk1 the output looks similar to this
169. class e Affinity From If disk to disk is enabled the name of the primary affinity where a file resides e Affinity To If disk to disk is enabled the name of the secondary affinity to which the file relocates e File Age Before Relocation The age a file must reach before it becomes eligible for relocation Media Clean Pool The class name with which the media is associated after it is logically blank Stub Files Indicates whether the Stub File feature is enabled or disabled for the storage policy Stub File Size KB If the Stub File feature is enabled this is the target stub file size specified when the storage policy was created or modified AutoStore Indicates whether the Autostore feature is enabled or disabled The Autostore option automatically stores files for the current policy class If this feature is disabled Quantum recommends that the files for the policy class be stored by scheduled events see below Retrieve to Affinity If you enabled the Retrieve to Affinity feature when you created or modified the policy class the affinity to which files are retrieved is shown 287 StorNext User s Guide Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Policy Class Information Report The Schedules section of the report provides the following information about the schedule associated with the Policy Class Name Name of the associated schedule Run Days The days on which the schedule is set to run Start Time The time when the sch
170. com 2049 File System Manager Login 0110 09 47 55 313680 0x401e2bb0 Debug sigwait handler starting 0110 09 47 56 Ox40158080 Info Using server based licensing with 15 connections 0110 09 47 56 0x40156080 Info Dmig FsId is Ox40a03dff35b23 0110 09 47 56 0x40158080 Info Dmig Eventlist init 0x0 0110 09 47 56 0x40158080 Info Service standing by on host gandalf adic com 2049 0110 09 47 56 350552 0x40158080 Debug FOUsurpCheck read ARB info pass 1 host 0 0 0 0 0 0110 09 47 56 350654 0x40158080 Debug FOUsurpCheck polling ARB block to check for active pee 0110 09 47 56 350708 0x40158080 Debug FOUsurpCheck arbstartup age 0x0 host 0 0 0 0 0 now a 0110 09 47 57 370282 0x40158080 Debug FOUsurpCheck read ARB info pass 2 host 0 0 0 0 0 0110 09 47 57 370402 0x40158080 Debug FOUsurpCheck peer found idle pass 2 his conns O my 0110 09 47 57 0x40158080 Info Branding Arbitration Block attempt 1 votes 0 50 2800761 NvANTERNRN Mahne Cannat find fail ower serint DEE all gt Previous Page Next Page Top End X Cancel E done TT Local intranet 7 5 When you are finished viewing logs click Cancel to close the Select File window Scheduling StorNext Events StorNext events are tasks that are scheduled to run automatically based on a specified schedule The following events can be scheduled e Clean Info This scheduled background operation removes from StorNext knowledge of media
171. continue The Add Disk Status screen appears 6 After the status screen indicates that the disks have been added click Close The Manage Disks screen figure 67 on page 110 appears and the disks list includes the disks you just added 7 Start the file system as described in Making a File System on page 106 8 Mount the file system as described in Mounting or Unmounting a File System on page 108 Caution When you add a new disk or stripe group to your SAN often an OS dependent operation must be run to make the added device recognizable by a host Some of these utilities can disrupt access to existing disks causing access hangs or failures To avoid this stop all file system operations on the affected host before rescanning for the new device Deleting Disks Use this procedure to delete a disk from a selected file system StorNext User s Guide 111 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Disks Caution Deleting a disk used in a stripe group results in a complete loss of user data and requires re making the file system For information on re making the file system refer to Making or Unmaking a File System on page 105 1 From the SNFS home page choose Disks from the Config menu The Manage Disks screen figure 67 appears 2 Select from the File Systems drop down menu the file system that contains the disk you want to delete 3 Select from the Disks list
172. d mounted the check will be automatically performed in read only mode In read only mode on a live file system started and mounted you could receive false errors 4 When you are ready to proceed with the check on the selected file system click Apply The status window informs you that the process was initiated Close this window by clicking Close Checks in progress are shown as In Progress under the heading Current Status of Check File System If the move does not appear with an In Progress status click Refresh to update the list 5 Also listed under Current Status of Check File System are any previously run file system checks To clear the list of previously completed checks marked Success or Failure click Clear StorNext User s Guide 149 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Performing File System Expansion 6 To view a status summary for any successfully run file system checks click the Success or Failure indicator under the Status heading Figure 96 Check File System Status Screen Quantum Filesystem Check Status Filesystem snfs1 Status Success Operation Status Warning File system snfsi is active NOTE Read Only Check File system journal will not be recovered The results may be inconsistent and mis leading Performing File System Expansion In practical terms expanding an existing file system means allocating additional storage to that file system Y
173. d click OK The Complete Remove Move Media Task screen figure 160 on page 220 appears Go to Step 7 page 223 To move multiple media click Browse The StorNext Media Browser screen figure 159 on page 219 appears 222 Figure 163 Select Destination Library Screen StorNext User s Guide Remove Media Microsoft Internet Explorer z loj x Chapter 9 Managing Media Removing and Moving Media Select a media class The Select Media list is populated with all available media in the class you selected Select from the Select Media list the media you want to move and then click OK The Select Media screen reappears showing your selection Click Next to continue The Select Destination Library appears Select Destination Library Select the library the media are being moved to Select Library Destination EEN EER Franny wae Backup Tape Back Next gt X Cancel 9 Select the destination library from the list and then click Next The Complete Remove Move Media Task screen figure 160 on page 220 appears Click Next to continue 223 Chapter 9 Managing Media Removing and Moving Media 11 After the status screen informs you that the task was completed successfully click Finish The Library Operator Interface LOI screen appears with the source library flagged Figure 164 Library Operator Z StorNext Library Operator Interface Microsoft Internet Explorer om oj x
174. d journaling to be placed on the first defined stripe group Realtime IO sec optional The number of disk I O operations per second that are available to real time applications This is an optional setting and can be left blank Realtime MB sec optional The number of megabytes per second that are available to real time applications This is an optional setting and can be left blank Non realtime IO sec optional The number of disk I O operations per second that are available to non realtime applications If both Non realtime IO sec and Non realtime MB sec Fields are selected the system uses the lesser of the two values This is an optional setting and can be left blank 116 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Stripe Groups e Non realtime MB sec optional The lower threshold in MB per second that is reserved for non realtime applications If both Non realtime MB sec and Non realtime IO sec Fields are selected then the system uses the lesser of the two values This is an optional setting and can be left blank 4 Click OK 5 After the status screen indicates that the new stripe group has been added click Close Caution When you add a new disk or stripe group to your SAN often an OS dependent operation must be run to make the added device recognizable by a host Some of these utilities can disrupt access to existing disks causing access hangs or failures To avoid this stop all file system operati
175. dia ID on which the backup was stored Use the following procedure to run the Backup Information Report 1 Choose Backups from the Reports menu The Backup Information Report appears showing information for the backups Figure 200 Backup Information ioi Report T Quantum Backup Information Report Backup ID 1 Date Range 2007 01 14 2007 01 15 Copy 1 Date Media 2007 01 15 23 00 01 Storage_Disk_1 2007 01 14 22 00 00 Storage_Disk_1 Backup ID 0 Copy 1 Date Media 2007 01 13 23 00 01 Storage_Disk_1 2007 01 12 23 00 00 Storage_Disk_1 2 Click Close when you are finished viewing the report The Drive State Information Report The Drive State Information Report provides the following information e Drive ID The drive ID 1 2 3 etc e Drive Type The type of drive being used such as LTO e Device Pathname The drive s pathname StorNext User s Guide 272 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Drive State Information Report e Tape Compression Indicates whether tape compression is currently turned on or off e Associated Library The name of the library associated with the drive State Indicates whether the drive is currently online or offline e Status Indicates the drive s current status which is one of these conditions e FREE No medium is mounted e IN USE Medium is in use e FAILED Drive failed e DELAYED Drive is in a dismount delayed stat
176. didate for relocation to a secondary affinity This option does not appear when you select the Enable Stub Files option on the Policy Class and Directory screen StorNext User s Guide 258 Chapter 11 Data Migration Management Adding a Storage Policy Stub File Size Kbytes The desired target size to allocate for the file stub This is the readable portion of the file that remains after truncation when the Stub File feature is enabled This option appears only when you selected the stub file option After entering values click Next to continue The Number of File Copies and Media Type screen appears Figure 191 Number of File Copies and Media Type Screen 1 Add New Storage Policy Microsoft Internet Explorer i j iol xj Number of File Copies and Media Type Enter the number of copies to store for each file including the primary copy file The maximum number of copies is 4 You can also choose the media type to use for this Policy F File Copy 1 Media Types File Copy2 Media Types File Copy 3 Media Types I File Copy 4 Media Types Senn Backup Tape StorNext Back Next gt X Cancel ud StorNext User s Guide 259 Figure 192 Complete Storage Policy Task Screen Adding a Policy Class Through SNSM Without a Relation Point StorNext User s Guide Chapter 11 Data Migration Management Adding a Storage Policy 9 Select up to four copies to
177. ding alibrarys EE Eed see EE EE Ne shut eos Ee vee se ee ee 170 Starting the Add Library Wizard esse se see ee se se Ge ee Ge Ge ee 170 Adding a SCSI El EE EE NE 173 Adding an ACSLS Network Library 177 Adding a DAS Network Library ees se see ee ee ee RR Ee ge ee 178 Adding a Vault LibratY iseer seges se SR ER g soe be Bees beg Eed 182 Modifying a Library sesse esse seek eene see EF genes Plan be see i iis 183 Deleting a AE RE EE a 184 Rescanning a Librar eise ss see eseisk ese gesek gereg ed ek ees EN Re be sod onstipnstzc 185 Auditinga Libraf eiser ee ie ske doe ese ke Ee eds a ge beg eN ese 186 Changing the Library State ue esse se eken se sek ee ER RR ER Se Gee ER ER EE 187 Chapter 8 Managing Drives and Disks 189 Working with Tape Drive ees see ek ee Ge ER ER SR ge ee Re Pe De ER SR 189 Adding a Tape DIV iseer Ee VR GN ENE ee Fe NR Kb GV oe Dee Van 190 Modifying a Tape DIiVe esse seer eek eeeReRee Be Hek eR SR Se ER ER RR ee 196 Deleting a Tape Drive sesse ve EES Se E eie GE Rede EE haceenaaee 197 Changing a Drive State sesse seeks ee se see ee be Beek ee gegee De DR ee eg 198 Cleaning a Tape DEIVE ese se EER eV ee seke ERGE eke se gegee deed 199 Working with Drive POOlS eee ees se ver er ee seek Rek ee be bek SR ee Geen ee ee ee 200 StorNext User s Guide Adding a Drive Pool ese EE vee RENEE Gee Ee ONSE Ese aana ear EEEE 200 Modifying a Drive Pool sesse sek sae ree eke se paniek ge bene AN
178. down allows its LUNs to be relabeled and reused The names of the LUNs in the configuration file can also be changed to free up the old names for reuse When moving metadata off one LUN onto a new LUN the file system must be stopped The Movement Wizard allows you to select one source and one destination LUN On completion the old LUN is relabeled with a suffix of old and the new LUN is relabeled with the old LUN s name The old LUN can then be relabeled and reused Quantum recommends using the Movement Wizard for Stripe Group Movement but you can also use the command line interface For information about using the CLI see Using the Dynamic Resource Allocation Feature 147 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Checking the File System Expansion and Here are the steps required for expanding a file system and moving stripe Movement Steps groups 1 Check the file system before you begin See Checking the File System on page 148 2 Expand the file system See Performing File System Expansion on page 150 3 Move data stripe groups or metadata journal stripe groups See Performing Stripe Group Movement on page 157 4 Mark source stripe groups as down See Modifying a Stripe Group on page 117 Checking the File System Before you perform either File System Expansion or Stripe Group Movement you must first perform a check on the file system you plan to use for these features This operation could take a significant a
179. duling StorNext Events Select an event type Clean Info Clean Versions Full Backup Health Check Partial Backup Rebuild Policy Click Configure The second Schedule Events screen displays the selected event type and any existing schedules figure 37 Select the schedule you want to change and then click Delete Caution After you click Delete you will NOT be asked to confirm that you want to delete the schedule DO NOT click Delete unless you are absolutely certain you want to delete the schedule 5 When the Status screen displays Success click Close 6 Do one of the following Click Cancel to exit the screen The Schedule Events window closes Click Back to return to the previous screen The Reset function deletes ALL existing schedules for an event type and creates one schedule that uses default values The procedure for resetting schedules for an event is the same regardless of the event type 1 From the StorNext Home Page select Schedule Events from the Admin menu The first Schedule Events screen appears figure 36 Select an event type Clean Info Clean Versions Full Backup Partial Backup 66 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Setting Up E mail Notification e Rebuild Policy 3 Click Configure The second Schedule Events screen displays the selected event type and any existing schedules figure 37 4 Click Reset 5 When prompted confirm that you want to delete all existi
180. e Quantum Technical Assistance Center The Quantum customer help desk Quota This variable enables or disables the enforcement of the file system quotas Recover The process of bringing back to disk a managed file that was previously removed from the disk This can only be done if the file had been successfully stored to media Also the file cannot not exist in the Trash can See Undelete File recovery can be done regardless of whether the Trash can is enabled up until the time the containing media is cleaned Relation Point Relations A mapping of a policy class to a directory in a managed file system Relocation The process of moving a file from one affinity on a file system to another affinity on that file system Restore The process of replacing a file system s contents after some sort of disaster Also known as disaster recovery StorNext User s Guide StorNext User s Guide Retrieve The process of retrieving data for a file from secondary storage either disk or tape RHAS Red Hat Advanced Server RHEL Red Hat Enterprise Linux SCSI Small Computer System Interface The interface that is used to talk to most hardware devices such as tape and libraries StorNext A scalable high performance data management solution that ensures the long term safety and recoverability of data in SAN environments while optimizing the use of storage resources It consists of two components the StorNext Storage Manager SNSM
181. e For example LTO media cannot belong to a media class grouping that contains AIT media When media is initially imported into the SNSM it enters a media class grouping Import mapping to media class is automatic and driven by media type 1 From the SNSM home page choose Reclassify from the Media menu The Reclassify Media screen appears as j ee Quantum E o a StorNext Home Help File Meda Admin Reports Help I Reclassify Media Home Select the source media dass and click Browse to select media IDs to reclassify The new media dass Must be associated win the type of media you are reciassitying SNFS SNSM Source Media Class Media Classes Browse Entered Media IDs Select All Deselect All Destinabton Mecha Class Media Classes X Apply Reset spock Active E Redassfy Meds N Local nvranet 235 Figure 175 Media Class Browser Window StorNext User s Guide Chapter 9 Managing Media Using the SNSM Media Functions 2 Select from the Source Media Class list the desired source media class and then click Browse to select the media IDs you want to reclassify The Media Class Browser window appears Z Media ID Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer xj Quantum Media Class Browser Current Selection Media Filter FO LTO DATA Select Media 2 Media Listed MEDOO2 MEDOO3 Select All Deselect All ok LX Cancel 7 Apply Select one or more media
182. e This allows applications to perform allocations until the file system is nearly full NOTE Due to allocation rounding applications may still receive a premature out of space error but only when there are just a few megabytes of space remaining In the worst case the error will be returned when the reported remaining space is InodeExpandMax of data stripe groups One side effect of this change is that after creating a new file system df will show that space has been used even though no user data has been allocated The amount of reserved space varies according to client use but does not go below a floor of a few gigabytes per data stripe group The amount of reserved space at any time can be seen using the cvadmin command selecting the file system and using show long While not recommended the Reserved Extents feature can be disabled by applying the following setting to the Globals section of the FSM configuration file ReservedSpace No This will cause the file system to not reserve space for buffered I O thereby reducing buffer cache performance and possibly causing severe fragmentation For more information see The Reserved Space Parameter on page 327 and the cvfs config 4 man page StorNext User s Guide 348 General Operating Guidelines and Limitations Operating System Affected Component Description All As a result of log rolling changes in StorNext 3 0 logs are now rolled every
183. e You can perform this procedure only if you have the full StorNext suite Customers with StorNext File System only cannot perform this procedure Before enabling disk to disk relocation you must perform these preliminary tasks if you have not already done so Create a new managed file system with no more than two affinities or reconfigure an existing managed file system by adding affinities For instructions on creating the file system see Managing the File System on page 82 e Create a policy class or modify an existing one e Create a relation point Determine relocation criteria After you have accomplished these preliminary tasks you can enable disk to disk relocation Adding a Storage Policy Use the following procedure to add a new storage policy When you create the policy you can enable disk to disk relocation stub file support or both features StorNext User s Guide 253 Chapter 11 Data Migration Management Adding a Storage Policy Note You cannot create a policy class when a client is NFS mounted to an active Stornext file system When you create a policy class the StorNext GUI executes the command fsaddrelation The fsaddrelation command fails if the specified directory is not empty and the associated file system is busy When a client is NFS mounted the NFS daemon holds a reference in the directory Consequently the unmount fails aborting the fsaddrelation process For more information
184. e e CLEANING Cleaning medium is mounted e USER MOUNT Medium was mounted using the GUIs Media gt Mount command or the CLI smount command e OTHER Medium was not mounted directly by the StorNext Tertiary Manager but by other means such as through the Media Manager e Dismount Delay The time delay in seconds before media is dismounted e Assignment Indicates whether the drive is currently free or mounted e Mount Count The number of times the tape has been mounted Error Count The number of errors mostly write errors a tape has incurred e Mount State Indicates whether the drive is currently mounted or unmounted e Mounted Media ID The ID of the mounted drive StorNext User s Guide 273 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Drive State Information Report Use the following procedure to run the Drive State Information Report 1 Choose Drives from the Reports menu The Drive States Report screen appears Figure 201 Drive States Report Screen 2 Report Drive States Microsoft Internet Explorer StorNext User s Guide 274 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The File Information Report 2 Select from the drives list one or more drives to include in the report Figure 202 Drive State and then click Apply The Drive State Information Report appears with state information for the selected drives Information Report Drive State Information Report Drive Name scsi_archive1_dr1 Drive Pools fs FOd
185. e 216 Figure 217 Figure 218 Number of File Copies and Media Type Screen 259 Complete Storage Policy Task Screen sesse 260 Manage Policy Classes Screen ese see se sees 261 Add Policy Class Screen eee Ge eee 261 Modify Parameters Screen ees se see ee se ee ee 262 Manage Policy Class Relationships Screen 265 Add Relationship Screen wi sesse ee se se ke Ge Ge ee 266 Directory Browser WindOW e esse se see ee se ee 266 Remove Relationships Screen iese ese se se 268 Backup Information Report sees see se sk se 272 Drive States Report Screen esse sesse se se se se ee ee 274 Drive State Information Report eee 275 Files Report Screen esse see ee se seke se Ge ke Ge Ge ee 276 StorNext File Browser Screen 0 sees se ee ee 277 File Information Report eee see ee ee ek be 278 Libraries Report Screen sesse see ee ke ee 279 Library Information Report esse se se ees se ee ee 280 Library Space Used RepoTE e sesse se see ee se ee 281 Media Report Screen iese esse ee se ek ee ee 283 Media Browser SCre N ee ee ee se se ee Ee ee ee ee 284 Media Information Report iese sesse se eke se sk see 285 Detailed Media Information Report 286 Policy Classes Report Screen c se se see eens 289 Policy Class Information Report iese ses se see ees 290 Directory Policy Class Relationships Report ees N RA EE EE een 291 Relation Information Report se se ese se se see 292 Request Report Sc
186. e Disk Information Report Provides information about the configured storage disks on your system SNFS Reports SNFS reports are also accessible from the StorNext home page the SNFS home page and the SNSM home page The following reports are available e The Directory Affinity Report This report shows the existing affinities for a selected directory in the file system e The File System Statistics Report This report provides file system statistics including active clients space size disks and stripe groups e The Stripe Group Statistics Report This report provides statistics for the stripe group such as space affinities and current statuses The File System Client Report This report provides statistics for StorNext clients including the number of StorNext SAN clients and distributed LAN clients and client performance The File System LAN Client Report This report provides information about distributed LAN clients including read and write speed aaa EE OE WE GE Ee EE a l The Backup Information Report The Backup Information Report provides the following information e Date The date and time the last backup was run e Type The type of backup that was run Full or Partial StorNext User s Guide 271 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Drive State Information Report e Status The current status of backup PASS STORED or NOT NOT means all copies of the backups were not stored to media e Media The me
187. e Ede Sek 12 Service System Status SCTEEN ee ee se ee ee ee Ge Re ee Rek 17 Service Admin Alerts Screen ees ee ee ee ee 18 Application Link siese SE ee SE EES Ee ese ERK Re koes RGN soeke 20 SNES Home Page issie sets seeesseses ed se Se cin se bee Re ke ek gese ee ESE Gee Ge ER 21 SNSM Menu ne gees eed ek gees oe ven ee E 24 StorNext Configuration Wizard esse esse se see ee ee ee 27 Config Menu OPHONS ese sesse Geek Ge GERS Een Ge dk Ge RS GAAF e Ge Gede eb 28 StorNext File System Login WindOW esse sesse se se see ee 30 SNES Home Bafe Muis sees dees ees EN 31 File System Monitor ccc ee ee eek ee ek ee Ge ee ee Ge ee 32 File System Men s eie se Ee sees ee Vee BEER Heese REEN Eeu ENE Ned 33 ix Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Start Stop SNFS Screen see se sesse ee ee se ke ge Ge eke 36 Complete Start Stop SNES Screen se sesse ese se ses 37 SNES Configuration Wizard Screen sesse ses se ie 38 Enter License Introduction Screen ee eee 42 Quantum License Agreement ese sesse se se eke 43 Enter License Strings Sereen ees ses seek ek ee ek ee 44 Complete Enter License Screen Temporary 45 Lic nse Reminder iss pasts RS GE an
188. e Edt View Favorites Tools Help ar Quantum Stripe Group Statistics Report File System snfs2 Stripe Group StripeGroup1 Total Space Available Space Breadth blocks Affinity Status Read Write Read Method Disks in Group Up 4 05 GB 2 99 GB 98 4 None MelaDete Enabled Enabled None spodsmall Exclusive File System snfs2 Stripe Group StripeGroup2 Total Space Available Space Breadth blocks Affinity Status Read Write Read Method Disks in Group Up aa i 4 at Ee ve Enabled Disabled No spod01 File System snfs2 Stripe Group StripeGroup3 ne Total Space Available Space Breadth blods Affinity Status Read Write Read Method 189 68 GB 185 53 GB 97 4 None Up Enabled Enabled None X Close 4 Click Close when you are finished viewing the report The File System Client Report The File System Statistics Report provides the following information e File System The name of the file system supporting the clients e Mounted on The name of the file system mount point e SAN Clients The total number of physically connected StorNext SAN clients e LAN Servers The total number of distributed LAN servers for the indicated file system e LAN Clients The total number of StorNext distributed LAN clients e SAN Clients The names of physically connected SAN clients StorNext User s Guide 305 Chapter 12 StorNext Re
189. e Re eksegese Ek ge aE 60 Adding a New Schedule sesse sesse ske oeee RR R N EER Re bee A NE EE ea 62 Modifying an Existing Schedule ee se ee ge ee 64 Deleting an Existing Schedule ese se sek ee RR ee Re Gee 65 Resetting a Schedule esse ee ee ee ee ee Ge Ge ee He Ge ee ee be ae 66 Setting Up E mail Notification eee Ge ee Ge Ge ee ee ee ee 67 Cancelling SNSM Request esse ee ee eek ee ee ee ee 72 Setting up Alternate Retrieval Locations eects 73 Modifying or Disabling This Feature eee 75 ii StorNext User s Guide Chapter 5 Chapter 6 StorNext User s Guide Backing Up StorNext 76 Types of StorNext Software BackUPS ee ese se see eke ekke Re be ER SR Ge Ge ER RR ee 76 Setting up Email Notification For Backup iese sees see se se se ee Ge ee 77 Performing a StorNext Software Backup i ese see se se se ee Ge ee He be be ee 78 Managing the Backup Policy cece se se ee Ge Ge ee Ge Ge ee Ge ee He He bees 79 Managing the File System 82 Working With Pile Systems ois csseiccscssossesesssessetensysvees tenenoteentensucece iais 82 Adding a File Sy stew iii ee EE Gee aE Ee Ge ee Ge ERGE Ee WE ds 83 Creating a File System From SNES e esse ese se se ee ee se ee Ge Ge Ge ee be ee 91 Modifying a File System ees sees ese se ee Ge Ge ee Ge Ge ee Ge Gee ee Ge be bee 93 Deleting Belle OR EE OE N 95 Managing File System Operations ie sees ese se se ee Ge Ge ee ee Ge Ge ee He be be ee 96 Disk Device Labeling
190. e Retrieval Location File System Enable Name Local Path Remote Path 0 safs storpext safs LW Apply lt gt StorNext kazar Active 2 Atthe Remote Node IP field enter the IP address or host name of the remote machine from which you want to retrieve truncated files in the event that normal retrieval fails 3 Select the Enable field to enable the feature for the file system 4 Locate the managed file system you want to use and enter at the Remote Path field the pathname on the remote machine for the file system Click Apply to continue 6 When the Status screen informs you that the feature has been successfully enabled click OK The feature is now enabled for the file system s you specified StorNext User s Guide 74 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Setting up Alternate Retrieval Locations Modifying or Disabling This As your needs or configuration changes you can modify the remote Feature machine information or disable the feature on one or more file systems 1 From the SNSM home page choose Alternate Retrieval Locations from the Admin menu The Alternate Retrieval Locations screen appears 2 As needed change the information in the Remote Node IP and Remote Path fields 3 To disable the feature on a particular file system locate the desired file system name and remove the checkmark from its Enable field 4 Click Apply to continue 5 When the Status screen informs you that your changes have been succe
191. e SNFS home page and the SNSM home page The following reports are available The Backup Information Report Provides information about primary and secondary backups for the StorNext system The Drive State Information Report Provides information about the drives configured in StorNext including drive IDs and types archives usage errors and mount data The File Information Report Provides file information including the current location of a file owner size and number of copies for the file The Library Information Report Provides information about libraries including the type and state associated media associated and imported media classes The Library Space Used Report Provides total storage capacity being used in all configured libraries The Media Information Report Provides media configuration and statistics The Policy Class Information Report Provides information about policy classes in the StorNext system including media noontimes hard limits and cleanup 270 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Backup Information Report e The Relation Information Report Provides information about the directory to policy class relationships in the file system e The Request Information Report Provides information about requests including the type of request priority and current status e The Scheduler Information Report Provides information about StorNext schedules e The Storag
192. e Scheduler Information Report The Scheduler Information Report provides the following information Name The name of the schedule Run Days The days on which the feature runs e Start Time The time when the feature runs StorNext User s Guide 293 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Scheduler Information Report e Window If StorNext was down at the time of the scheduled event and is restarted during the window time period the event is launched otherwise it is skipped until the next scheduled time e Last Run The time the schedule was last run Use the following procedure to run the Scheduler report 1 Choose Scheduler from the Reports menu The Scheduler Report screen appears Figure 218 Scheduler Report Screen StorNext User s Guide 294 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Storage Disk Information Report 2 Select one or more of the schedules on which to report and then click Apply The Scheduler Information Report appears Figure 219 Scheduler ix Information Report z Quantum Scheduler Information Report Scheduler Feature Full Backup Name Run Days Start Time Window Last Run Last Run Status f_backup_default sun 22 00 3hours Jan 14 2007 22 00 20 Successful Scheduler Feature Partial Backup Name Run Days Start Time Window Last Run Last Run Status p_backup_default mon tue wed thu fri sat 23 00 3hours gi Successful Scheduler Feature Rebuild Policy
193. e Support Managing Storage Disks with Deduplication Enabled Using the Dynamic Resource Allocation Feature Specifying an Alternate Retrieval Location 352 Labeling Disk Devices Labeling Disk Devices Each drive used by SNFS must be labeled A new drive only needs to be labeled one time A drive can be labeled from any StorNext server or client that has a Fibre Channel FC connection to the drive Use this procedure to label a disk device using CLI Caution The process of disk labeling re partitions the drives If you select an incorrect drive you may lose data Also it s a good practice to save a copy of your labels file If you lose labels and you using a Linux or Windows system the Quantum Technical Assistance Center will need this copy to help you relabel your devices All output examples shown in this appendix differ from the actual output but the structure and information provided is similar 1 On a SNFS client at the system prompt display a list of connected drives Type usr cvts bin cvlabel l The command output is similar to this Device Volume Type Devi Sectors Sector Name evice Label Size il SEAGATE I 0018 ke Sectors 17691712 h Size 512 dev edc SEAGATE ET19171FS 0018 unknown Sectors 17691712 Sector Size 512 dev edd SEAGATE ST19171FS 0018 unknown Sectors 17691712 Sector Size 512 2 Looking at the output information identify any drives that are unused
194. e Tickets 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www quantum com support Recommended Actions i S Media Suspect Threshold Count Exceeded StorNext allows media to be marked suspect a certain number of times before the threshold is met The default threshold is 3 times If the suspect threshold count is exceeded media is treated as logically write protected IF THEN if a particular piece of media 1 Use the Capturing a System State feature to create a system snapshot was marked suspect and exceeded the suspect count 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center threshold The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www quantum com support 387 Media and Drive RAS Messages Figure 15 Media Format Recommended Actions Failure RAS Media Format Failure IF THEN The problem indicates that a 1 Use the Capturing a System State feature to create a system snapshot particular piece of media failed to format because the 2 Contact the Quantum Technica
195. e Window SSE xl eyo OL i e 7 4 Click the Close Window link at the bottom of the Recommended Actions screen 5 Click the Close or Cancel button on the RAS Ticket Details screen StorNext User s Guide 321 Chapter 14 2 m Customer Assistance eo More information about this product is available on the Quantum Service and Support website at www quantum com ServiceandSupport The Quantum Service and Support website contains a collection of information including answers to frequently asked questions FAQs You can also access software firmware and drivers through this site Quantum Technical Assistance Center For further assistance or if training is desired contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center North America 1 800 284 5101 Option 5 EMEA 00800 999 3822 Online Service and www quantum com OSR Support Worldwide Web www quantum com ServiceandSupport Local numbers for specific countries are listed on the Quantum Service and Support Website StorNext User s Guide 322 StorNext User s Guide Glossary Affinity An association between a relation point in the file system and a stripe group It allows the user to direct data to specific primary disks by writing to the affinities associated relation point Clean Media The operation of logically removing old file versions from a piece of media This is a database operation that removes knowledge of managed files th
196. e barcode media mounted in the drive media ID of the last tape mounted in the drive and continues to operate cannot be verified If StorNext cannot dismount this drive at a later time dismount it manually 1 Check the drive to see if the media has been ejected 2 Ifthe media has not been ejected press Eject on the drive 3 Try to dismount the drive again using the GUI From the SNSM home page choose Library gt Dismount from the Media menu 4 Ifthe dismount fails using the GUI dismount the drive using the operator panel on the physical library n Using the GUI perform an audit to make sure that the Remap Audit checkbox is selected From the SNSM home page choose Library gt Audit Library from the Admin menu A service ticket indicates the 1 Dismount the drive via the operator panel on the physical library drive is NOT mounted and the media mounted in the 2 Using the GUI perform an audit to making sure that the Remap Audit drive cannot be verified checkbox is selected From the SNSM home page choose Library gt Audit Library from the Admin menu The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44
197. e files are stored on the StorNext server 2 Locate the capture file you want to download and then click the corresponding radio button under the Number column beside the filename 3 Click Download The Download Capture File screen appears Download Capture File Microsoft Internet Explorer 1 10 x Ele Edit View Favorites Tools Help a Quantum Download Capture File Download will be started automatically Ff download is not started press this link X Close 4 If the download does not start automatically click the supplied link 5 Specify whether you want to open or save the capture file The file is in compressed tar gz format so in most cases you will want to save the file and then open it with a file decompression utility such as WinZip 316 Chapter 13 Service Management Using the System Status Tool Deleting a Previous When you are finished viewing and analyzing a capture file you can System Capture delete an unwanted file 1 From the StorNext home page choose Capture State from the Service menu The Capture System State screen shows a list of capture files stored in the directory usr adic www logs capture_state 2 Locate the capture file you want to delete and then click the radio button beside the filename 3 Click Delete 4 When aconfirmation screen prompts you to confirm that you want to delete the file click OK to continue 5 After the status screen informs you that the
198. e following procedure to run the File System report 1 Choose SNFS gt Systems from the Reports menu The File System Report screen appears Figure 225 File System Report Screen A Report File System Statistics Microsoft Internet Explorer Ouantum StorNext User s Guide 302 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Stripe Group Statistics Report 2 Inthe Active File Systems list select one or more active file systems on which to run the report and then click Apply The File System Statistics Report appears showing statistical data for the selected file systems Figure 226 File System PERKE REEN IE EE IF Statistics Report Ouantum File System Statistics Report File System snfs1 Mounted on stornext snfs1 Creation ive SAN File System Message Disk Stipe p aoe EE EE 4 Tots Space Available Space Managed 2 Mar 2007 0 16K 4K s 2 12429424 189 66 GB 12146901 185 25 GB 97 No 17 09 46 X Close 3 Click Close when you are finished viewing the report The Stripe Group Statistics Report The Stripe Group report provides the following information e Total Space The total space available in the stripe group e Available Space The available space that has not been used in the stripe group Breadth blocks The number of contiguous blocks in the stripe group e Affinity Indicates whether an affinity is associated with the stripe group e Status Indicates whethe
199. e media aside from the obvious cost saving benefit e A storage disk either belongs to no policy class or belongs to a single policy class e A storage disk can store file copies only with the same copy ID Note Before you create a storage disk the disks you plan to use must reside in an existing mounted file system After you create a storage disk observe the following usage recommendations e If your file system includes storage disks avoid using that file system for any data other than storage disk stored data StorNext User s Guide 239 Chapter 10 Managing Storage Disks Storage Disk Deduplication e Use complete and physically dedicated file systems snfs local nfs or other for storage disk data not shared file systems or file systems with linked directories e If your file system includes storage disks and you accidentally fill it with unrelated user data i e non storage disk data call the Quantum Technical Assistance Center and ask for a procedure to clean up and transcribe data Storage Disk Deduplication StorNext supports storage disk deduplication only on non managed file systems Deduplication frees disk space by eliminating redundant data The deduplication process does not retain duplicate data so there is only one copy of the data to be stored Indexing of all data is retained in case that data is required later The main benefit of deduplication is that it reduces storage capacity re
200. e of the configured file systems have not been mounted or started Stopped The storage manager or the file system manager is stopped Clicking the StorNext Server Status button displays the Start Stop screen which enables you to either start or stop StorNext For more information about starting or stopping StorNext see Starting and Stopping StorNext Components on page 54 In the upper right corner of the screen are Home and Help links Clicking Home returns you immediately to the StorNext home page regardless of your current location Clicking Help displays a list of current StorNext documentation in pdf format You can open a particular guide or document by clicking its link The StorNext application link is located at the bottom left of the StorNext Home Page Click this link to view information about StorNext 19 Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview The SNFS and SNSM Home Pages Figure 8 Application Link FA EE EE Quantum ff g StorNext Home Help File Media Admin Reports Help j ae StorNext SNFS SNSM StorNext Software StorNext is the foundation for data management 5 enabli Intelligent Data Management manag usiness processes to benefit from archive ent and workflow efficiences Store amp Access Transparently Simultaneously Share Data amp StorNext kazar Warning javascript top location http www quantum com IT TT T R oaintranet The SNFS and SNSM Home Pages The Naviga
201. e pending 12 Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview The StorNext Home Page state during blockpool verification because this process could take a long time to complete depending on the blockpool size Storage disks in the online pending state are not used for store operations Storage Disk Name Name of the storage disk e Deduplication Indicates if deduplication is enabled for the storage disk This field appears only on 32 bit and 64 bit Linux systems e Space GB Total amount of space in gigabytes on the storage disk This amount includes space reserved by StorNext e Used Space GB Space in gigabytes used on the storage disk Copy The copy number that may be stored on that media e Files Total number of files on the storage disk e Savings If deduplication is enabled this field indicates the amount of savings achieved through deduplication This field appears only on 32 bit and 64 bit Linux systems StorNext Home Page The following drop down menu options located in the grey bar near the Drop Down Menus top of the home page provide access to StorNext configuration administration and reporting options e Config Menu Options e Admin Menu Options e Reports Menu Options e Service Menu Options e Help Menu Options StorNext Home Help Config Menu Options The following Config menu options launch the Configuration Wizard and let you perform individual Configuration Wizard tasks Config Wizard
202. e snapped tape Flag 15 OFh Memory chip 1 Write protect the media in cartridge failure 2 Copy the data to a new piece of media 3 Discard the old media Flag 16 10h Forced eject Investigate whether the StorNext administrator s actions might have initiated an eject operation Flag 17 11h Read only The loaded cartridge is a read only type in this drive If the media contains data write format protect it Flag 18 12h Tape The tape directory must be rebuilt Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center directory corrupted on load Flag 19 13h Nearing 1 Copy the data to another piece of media media life 2 Remove the original media from the library and discard Flag 20 14h Clean now Clean the drive Flag 21 15h Clean periodic Flag 22 16h Expired 1 Remove the media cleaning media 2 Add new media Flag 23 17h Invalid cleaning media Flag 24 18h Retension Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center requested Flag 25 19h Dual port interface error Flag 26 1Ah Cooling fan failure Flag 27 1Bh Power supply failure Flag 28 1Ch Power consumption Flag 29 1Dh Drive maintenance Flag 30 1Eh Hardware A Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center Flag 31 1Fh Hardware B A hardware error has occurred that should be captured and returned for failure analysis 381 Media and Drive RAS Messages Figure 5 Tape Drive A
203. e system This selection is the same as the maproot 0 directive in the Network File System NFS If the Global Super User option is not enabled super users can modify only files they can access like any other users 102 StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Managing File System Operations Windows Security Enable this option check the box to allow all Windows clients to use Microsoft Windows native security If this option is enabled then a Windows administrator may set Windows security on all files and directories for any user or group defined on the local Windows client or Windows domain Use Physical Memory Only When this option selected the file system will use only physical memory not swapped or paged Quotas Select this option to enable enforcing quotas for users and groups Note Quotas are based on actual usage and are not enforced based on space allocated Inode Expansion Blocks Use these fields to configure the minimum floor maximum ceiling and increment of the block allocation size for a dynamically expanding file e Minimum This value specifies the minimum number of blocks allocated when a file requires additional space e Maximum This value specifies the maximum number of blocks allocated on subsequent expansion The range is from 1 to 32768 blocks e Increment When the allocation space is exhausted this value specifies the increment added to the
204. e the storage of cata to meca insteac of sbowing Nto be migrated automaticall SNFS SNSM Enter Indradual Filename Browse File List Select All Deselect All Change Default Parameters Properties Y Apply Reset StorNext spock Active Q Store Fies To Media SJ lod ntraret 2 Do one of the following e Enter in the Enter Individual Filename field the file you want to store to media You must enter the file s complete pathname e Select from the File List one or more filenames to store to media To expedite filename selection you can click the Select All button to select all files in the list and then deselect the files you don t want to include If you change your mind you can deselect all selected files by clicking the Deselect All button 135 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Using the SNSM File System Functions e Click Browse to display the StorNext File Browser window On this window locate and select the files you want to store to media and then click OK 8 If desired click the Properties button to change the default parameters that are applied during file storage The Optional Store Parameters screen appears Figure 85 Optional Store F Change Configurable Parameters Microsoft Internet Explorer Parameters Screen Quantum Optional Store Parameters e Selecting the number of copies greater than the policy class default will store the default number of copies e To store a greater number of copies th
205. e the user environment with StorNext environment variables If you are running sh ksh or bash type usr adic profile For all other shells type source usr adic cshrc Note Files do not migrate by default policy rules if the time is set in the future Before migrating files verify that the time settings on all of your client and server machines are synchronized StorNext User s Guide 251 Chapter 11 Data Migration Management Policy Classes and Relationships Policy Classes and Relationships Stub Files StorNext User s Guide A policy class defines how files will be managed in a directory and subdirectories These are the available policy class settings e Number of copies to create e Media type to use when storing data e Amount of time to store data after data is modified e If disk to disk relocation is enabled the amount of time in days before relocating a file e Amount of time before truncating a file after a file is modified Policy classes can be related to one or more directories In this situation all files in that directory and sub directories are governed by the policy class The connection between a policy class and a directory is called the relation point Here are some examples of policy class usage e A directory in which to store backups every night is created This directory is seldom accessed after the files are copied over A policy class could be set up to create two tape co
206. ears in the Select Directory list and a list of files in the Current Directory field appears in the Select Files list Figure 204 StorNext File BEK Browser Screen P I EE Quantum StorNext File Browser Current Directo File Filter Filter Select Directory Managed Directories d OFiles Listed stomex snfs1 ADIC INTERNAL BACKUP stornext snfs1 pc1 stornext snfs1 pc2 v v Ok X Cancel 7 Apply 4 Select one or more files from the Select Files list and then click OK To select multiple files hold down the Control key while clicking the file you want to select The Files report screen appears with the selected files in the Select Files list StorNext User s Guide 277 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Library Information Report 5 Click Apply to run the report The File Information Report appears with information for the selected files Figure 205 File Information l01 xi Report Ble Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Quantum File Information Report File Name stornext snfs1 ADIC_INTERNAL_BACKUPiconf 1 1 tgz Associated Media Storage_Disk_1 1 Checksum N Last Modification Timestamp 15 jan 2007 23 00 04 Truncate Immediately After Store On 6 Click Close when you are finished viewing the report SSS SSS SSS SEE The Library Information Report The Library Information Report provides the followi
207. edia screen reappears showing the selected media StorNext User s Guide 219 Chapter 9 Managing Media Removing and Moving Media 9 Select from the Media List the media you want to remove and then click Next The Complete Remove Move Media Task screen appears Pure 169 DIL EDGE Move Media Task Screen 2151 x Complete Remove Move Media Task You have completed the necessary steps to remove move media Please review your selections and click on Next to apply them or click Back to make changes Library vaulti edia Type LTO Action remove media Backup Tape Back Next gt X Cancel 10 Review your selections and click Next to apply them or Back to make changes The Remove Move Media status screen appears StorNext User s Guide 220 Chapter 9 Managing Media Removing and Moving Media 11 After the status screen informs you that the media has been successfully removed click Finish The Library Operator Interface LOD screen appears Figure 161 Library Operator 210 Interface Screen Quantum Library Operator Interface gt Q vault1 Enter Media Eject Media Mount Media Dismount Media X Close 12 The name of the library on which the media resides is displayed Click Eject Media The Library Operator Interface screen updates and indicates the selected library Available media operations for each library are shown Figure 162 LOI Eject Screen E StorNext Library Operator Int
208. edule is set to begin running Start Window The timeframe within which the scheduler attempts to begin the process For example 30 minutes If the process cannot begin it tries again during the next cycle Last Run The date and time the schedule was last run Last Run Status The last status of the previous schedule Media IDs If you select the Show Media report option this section of the report shows the media associated with the policy class on which the report was run 288 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Policy Class Information Report Use the following procedure to run the Policy Classes report 1 Choose Policy Classes from the Reports menu The Policy Classes Report screen appears Figure 213 Policy Classes Report Screen J Policy Class Reports Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 Select from the Select Policy Class list one or more policy classes on which to run the report 3 To also view media associated with these policy classes select the Show Media option StorNext User s Guide 289 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Relation Information Report 4 Click Apply The Policy Class Information Report appears Figure 214 Policy Class Information Report Quantum Policy Class Information Report Policy Class pc1 Associated Directories stornext snfs1 pc1 Media File Copy 1 File Copy 2 File Copy 3 File Copy 4 HEESE Drive Pool LTO default NA N A WA o fs FOdr
209. ee 138 StorNext Recoverable Files Screen esse se sees 139 Recover Directory Screen see see ek ee Rek ee 140 Retrieve Files Screen ees se se ee be Ge Ge ee Ge Ge ee 141 Retrieve Directory SCTEEN esse see ek ee ER Re 142 Free Disk Blocks Screen ie sees se see ee He Ge ee 143 Move Files to New Media Screen sesse se sees 144 Modify File Attributes Screen eee 145 Check File System Screen see essen ee 149 Check File System Status Screen sesse se sees 150 File System Expansion Introduction Screen 152 Check File System Reminder esse se see se se 153 Data Stripe Group Selection Screen sees se se 154 Metadump Warning ees se se see ee se ee Ee ee ee ee 154 New Data Stripe Group Screen ese see see se ee 155 Complete File System Task Screen i iss se se see 157 Move Stripe Group Screen ese see see ee Ge ee 159 StorNext User s Guide StorNext User s Guide Figure 104 Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107 Figure 108 Figure 109 Figure 110 Figure 111 Figure 112 Figure 113 Figure 114 Figure 115 Figure 116 Figure 117 Figure 118 Figure 119 Figure 120 Figure 121 Figure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 Figure 132 Move Stripe Group Introduction Screen eee 160 Move Options Screen sc a se ee RR Ge Re Ge Re Ge ee ee 161 Data Stripe Group Move Screen ee se se ee se ee Ge Re Ge ee 162 No Writable Stripe Groups Wa
210. ee se se ee Ee Ge ee Ge Gee ee 191 Hardware Devices Screen oo se se ee se Ge ee Ee Ee Ge ee ee 192 xiii xiv Figure 133 Figure 134 Figure 135 Figure 136 Figure 137 Figure 138 Figure 139 Figure 140 Figure 141 Figure 142 Figure 143 Figure 144 Figure 145 Figure 146 Figure 147 Figure 148 Figure 149 Figure 150 Figure 151 Figure 152 Figure 153 Figure 154 Figure 155 Figure 156 Figure 157 Figure 158 Figure 159 Figure 160 Figure 161 Complete Add Drive Task Screen sees sees see 193 Match Devices with Slots Screen esse see ee 194 Tape Drive Mapping Help Screen eee 195 Configure Drives Screen esse se se se ee ee 196 Modify Drive Screen oo eee se ee Ee ee ee ee 197 Delete Warning WindOW e ese sees se se se ee Ge Ge ee 198 Change Drive State Screen ese se se se ee se se 198 Clean Drive SereeTl ees Ee RE Ge eene Rg ee De gee 199 Configure Drive Pools Screen ees ee see 201 Add New Drive Pool Screen se se ees se sees 201 Warning Message Window ccec se se ee se se ie 202 Modify Drive Pool Screen eens 203 Restart Message WindOW ee ees seeks ee ee ee ee 203 Delete Warning Message sees see ee ee ee ee 204 Manage Disk Space Screen ees see ee ee 205 Change Watermark Parameters Screen ees 207 Add Media Introduction Screen esse se sees 209 Associated Library Screen sees se se se ee Ge ee 210 Associated Library Screen 2 ee se se se ee ee ee 211 Select Mailbox Screen
211. ege eN Ee geba Kees ee 23 SNSM Home Page Drop Down MENU esse sees se se ee ee se ee 23 The Configuration Wizard uses eers gesek Rek ek Gee EENS N RE niii 26 Chapter 3 SNFS Only GUI Overview 29 Accessing the SNPS GUL aecenas ga EER Ge gek Ed de se 29 The SNES Home Pages sissssesessiek sesse se sere sd sk dens be se eds se kak ee bee 31 The File System MONItOT ees ee ee eek eke ee eek ee ee ee 31 Drop down Menus and Options esse ese se se ee ke ee Ge 33 Shortcut Menu Options cece se se ee Ge RR Ge Ge Rek ee Ge Ge ee 35 Home and Help Links esse esse ee se ee ee ee Ge Ge ee Ge ee ee be ae 36 StorNext Server Status sees se REK bes ese BEREG R oe SR ek ESE eg Se eds 36 The SNFS Configuration Wizard esse ee see ee ee ge ee ee ge gee 38 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks 40 Entering the StorNext License ese see se se se ee Ge Ge Ge ee He ee ee 40 Entering a License String in the dat File ee 47 Controlling User ACCESS ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eke 48 Changing the Admin Password 1 0 0 cee eek ek ee ek ee 49 Adding a New USE sur EE ER REG SR Ee Se ee ke de De se eed 51 Modifying an Existing User ees ee ese ee ee eke ee ek ee ee 53 Deleting an Existing USer esse se sees ee ee ge ee ek ee eg ee 54 Starting and Stopping StorNext Components 00 0 0 54 Accessing otorNext Logs Ee gese EES andi EE Ee GE Pe ee 56 Scheduling StorNext Event uses se se sek ek see eek ee Ge be HER ER SR eN RR ee ee 59 Viewing a Schedule sesse se
212. elp Configure File System Home Click Add to create a new file system or select an existing fle system and delete It SNFS SNSM To make a new te system available for use a Me system Jabal The Add File System Wizard will do all hese steps Add Modify Delete StorNext spock Active E Add Delete Fie System SJ local intranet 2 Click Add to continue The Add File System screen appears 3 Type a name and mount point for the new file system and click OK A status screen appears 4 When the status screen indicates that the file system has been added click Close 5 Configure global settings for the file system as explained in Making Global Changes on page 100 92 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With File Systems 6 Add disks to the file system as explained in Adding Disks on page 109 7 Configure stripe groups for the file system as explained in Adding a Stripe Group on page 114 Note Make sure that each stripe group is associated with no more than one affinity when using disk to disk migration 8 Make the file system as described in Making a File System on page 106 9 Start the file system as described in Starting and Stopping the File System on page 107 10 Mount the file system as described in Mounting or Unmounting a File System on page 108 11 Add affinities to the file system as described in Modifying an Affinity on page 131 Note When using disk to dis
213. em is NOT resolved 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www guantum com support Figure 40 Shutdown Error RAS NEE Shutdown Error IF THEN SNFS shutdown errors have Inspect the file system and system logs to determine the root cause occurred The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www guantum com support StorNext User s Guide 402 Other RAS Messages Figure 41 Initialization Failure EE Recommended Actions RAS Initialization Failure IF THEN An FSM or FSMPM process has failed Correct the system configuration as suggested by the event detail or examine system logs to determine the root to start cause OR lf the detail text suggests a problem with starting the fsmpm process run cvlabel to verify that disk scanning is working properly An attempt to mount an SNFS file sysem has failed All CVFS file systems are not mounted Mount t
214. em specific administration tasks e The SNFS Config Menu e The SNFS Admin Menu e The SNFS Reports Menu e The SNFS Help Menu StorNext User s Guide 21 StorNext User s Guide Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview The SNFS and SNSM Home Pages Note You must unmount and stop the file system before using most of the options listed in this section See Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks for more information The SNFS Config Menu The following options on the SNFS Config menu allow you to add modify and delete file system configuration files e File Systems Add modify or delete a file system e Globals Modify global settings e Affinities Add modify or delete an affinity from file systems e Disks Add or delete a disk to a file system Stripe Groups Add modify or delete a stripe group from a file system Caution Deleting a disk or stripe group requires a remake of the file system and destroys all data on the file system when the task is run The SNFS Admin Menu The following options on the SNFS Admin menu help you manage day to day operations of the active file systems e Make File System Make a file system Caution Making a file system or making labeling disk devices destroys all data on the disk on which the task is run Start Stop File System Start or stop a file system e Mount Unmount Mount or unmount a file system Label Disk Devices Label
215. ement Using Health Check 1 Select a health check from the Health Check Tests screen 2 Click History The Health Check History screen appears Figure 234 Health Check ioix History Screen Fle Edt View Favorites Tools Heb ay Quantum Health Check History Select a previously run health check you would like to view Up to five history entries will be saved for each health check tested_ Health Check Type Disk Space Start Time Completion Time C 17 Jan 2007 10 11 AM 17 Jan 2007 10 11 AM Details X Cancel 3 Do one of the following Select a specific report to view and click Details Click the Pass or Fail link in the Results column Proceed to Viewing the Health Check Results on page 314 4 When you click Details on the Health Check History screen the Health Check Results screen appears StorNext User s Guide 313 Chapter 13 Service Management Using Health Check Figure 235 Health Check slolxd Results Screen Bile Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Quantum Health Check Results Verify Disk Space Result Pass Operation Status Scanning files and directories in usr adic OK Filesystem dev hda5 is at 1 usr adic database db OK Filesystem dev hda2 is at 15 usr adic DSM Exiting with status 0 Success lt Back 5 Click Back to view more archives or close the window when finished Viewing the Health Check When vie
216. emory and event handle are retained by the system until the data structure is destroyed Some locks that are part of structures are seldom used and exist for rare conditions If the lock is not used the memory event for that structure will never be allocated Some data structures are not destroyed during the life of the FSM These include in memory inodes and buffers and others When the system starts handle use is minimal After the FSM has been up for a while the handle count increases as the inode and buffer cache are used After a while the system stabilizes at some number of handles This occurs after all inodes and buffers have been used The maximum number of used handles can be reduced by shrinking the inode and or buffer cache However changing these variables could significantly reduce system performance FSBlockSize Metadata Disk Size and JournalSize Settings StorNext User s Guide The FsBlockSize FSB metadata disk size and JournalSize settings all work together For example the FsBlockSize must be set correctly in order for the metadata sizing to be correct JournalSize is also dependent on the FsBlockSize For FsBlockSize the optimal settings for both performance and space utilization are in the range of 16K or 64K Settings greater than 64K are not recommended because performance will be adversely impacted due to inefficient metadata I O operations 335 StorNext User s Guide FSBlockSize Metadat
217. emove Media From SNSM Home Select a media to remove All fies will be removed kom the selected media and he media will be ejected from ne library into the EIF mailbox SNFS SNSM Enter Fator me Select Modia Moda I s W Apply Reset StorNext spock Active SJ cca nyae Remove Meda From system 2 Select from the Select Media list the media you want to remove To reduce the number of media shown you can enter a search filter in the Enter Filter field This field accepts the wildcard character asterisk Click Apply when you are ready to remove media 4 When the Status screen informs you that the media were successfully removed click OK Assigning Blank Media to This function allows you to assign blank media to a policy class Blank a Policy Class media must exist in the library before you can move the media to a policy class StorNext User s Guide 231 Figure 171 Assign Policy Screen Transcribing Media StorNext User s Guide Chapter 9 Managing Media Using the SNSM Media Functions 1 From the SNSM home page choose Assign Policy from the Media menu The Assign Policy screen appears EE Als Quantum Ti StorNext Home Help File Media Admin Reports Help Assign Policy Home Select one or more blank media to assign to a policy class SNFS Select Meda Setect Policy Classes SNSM Pokty Classes Scratch Pool adic_backup pet v Apply __ Reset lt StorNext kazar Active 2 Select from
218. empty the trashcan on all file systems where this feature is enabled If the trashcan directories are not removed the upgrade will fail To empty the trashcan on a file system where it is enabled change to the file system directory for example stornext snfs1 Then at the command prompt type rm rf TrashCan Repeat this procedure for all file systems StorNext File System is incompatible with third party portmappers Hot re zoning of SAN fabrics is not supported Affinity names cannot be longer than eight characters StorNext truncates affinity names after the eighth character so if you have two or more affinities whose first eight characters are identical StorNext considers them the same affinity For example if you have affinities called affdata01 and affdata02 StorNext sees them both as affdata0 and treats them as the same affinity For managed file systems only the maximum directory capacity is 50 000 files per single directory This limitation does not apply to unmanaged file systems StorNext User s Guide 345 General Operating Guidelines and Limitations Operating System Affected Component Description All The Move Stripe Group Data feature part of Dynamic Resource Allocation does not support moving sparse files Sparse files are files that lack on disk allocations for some of the data within the data range indicated by the size of the file A stripe gr
219. ents StorNext File System e StorNext Storage Manager Note The current status Started Stopped or Warning is shown next to each StorNext application A Warning status indicates one of your configured file systems is either not mounted or has not been started 4 Select either Enable or Disable to enable or disable the feature that automatically starts StorNext at boot time Your selection on this screen will be reflected during the next reboot 5 Click Next The Complete Start Stop StorNext Task screen appears StorNext User s Guide 55 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Accessing StorNext Logs Figure 32 Complete Start Stop Yj Start Stop StorNext Microsoft Internet Explorer ioj xj StorNext Task Screen Complete Start Stop StorNext Task You have completed the necessary steps to start or stop components Please review your selections and click on Next to apply them or click Back to make changes Stop StorNext Storage Manager INTELLIGENT STORAGE Back Next gt _X Cancel 6 Click Next A status screen appears 7 Click Finish when the status screen shows Success The StorNext Server Status in the lower right corner of the screen now displays Stopped Warning or Active depending on your action Accessing StorNext Logs You can access and view any of the following types of logs e SNFS Logs Logs about each configured file system StorNext Database Logs Logs that track chang
220. ents on the standby server which are already running on the primary server and may result in database corruption IRIX As of release 3 0 StorNext does not support metadata controllers running the SGI IRIX operating system To upgrade to StorNext 3 0 or higher MDCs running IRIX must be converted to a supported operating system This conversion must be performed by Quantum Professional Services For more information or to schedule an IRIX conversion contact Quantum Global Services see Quantum Technical Assistance Center on page 322 NOTE The StorNext 3 1 2 client software continues to support IRIX SNFS uses 64 bit inode numbers 32 bit applications programs compiled without 64 bit support may experience problems working with files with inode numbers greater than 2147483648 32 bit applications may also encounter problems when dealing with files greater than 2TB in size This issue is not unique to StorNext but may be encountered by some legacy applications when working with SNFS on IRIX StorNext supports only SGI 64 bit versions of IRIX on operating systems that use the SGI version of the QLogic QLA2200 or QLA2310 FC HBAs On many versions of IRIX the root crontab contains the following entry which is used to remove old application crash dumps and temporary mail files find local type f name core o name dead letter atime 7 mtime 7 exec rm PP If StorNext file systems are mounted they will be tr
221. eports menu allow you to view all SNFS reports These are the same reports described in Reports Menu Options on page 15 The SNSM Help Menu The options on the SNSM Help menu provide access to StorNext documentation Quantum contact information and detailed information about the version of StorNext you are using The SNSM Help menu options are the same as the ones described in Help Menu Options on page 16 The Configuration Wizard StorNext User s Guide StorNext includes a Configuration Wizard that guides you through the process of setting up your StorNext system The wizard includes tasks you would typically perform when you are first configuring your system The Configuration Wizard appears automatically when you launch StorNext for the first time If you do not finish performing all the tasks the wizard reappears whenever you return to the StorNext home page so you can resume completing tasks where you left off For example if you complete tasks 1 through 5 the next time the StorNext wizard appears you will be ready to complete task 6 If you have not completed all the wizard tasks and do not want the wizard to appear the next time you access the StorNext home page select the Don t Show CW Again option 26 Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview The Configuration Wizard Figure 11 StorNext E Configuration Wizard CW Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 oO x Configuration Wizard Configuration Wizard Use this wizard to co
222. er date and time when the ticket was last accessed either opened or closed ticket status and problem description 3 Click Cancel to close the screen NOTE For information on analyzing service tickets and obtaining additional information about a reported problem refer to Analyzing Service Tickets Figure 48 Vault Failure RAS Recommended Actions Vault Failure IF THEN The problem indicates that 1 Capture the StorNext system state vaulting has failed Refer to Capturing a System State 2 Download the captured state to a local or network drive Refer to Downloading a System State Capture 3 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www guantum com support StorNext User s Guide 409 Figure 49 Robotics Not Ready RAS StorNext User s Guide Other RAS Messages Robotics Not Ready iF The senice ticket indicates that the tape library s robotics is not ready No archives or storage disks exist An archive is off tine The problem IS resobwd The problem has NOT been resohed THEN 1 Verify that the tape library is online and ready 2 Venty that the tape library 15 onkne and ready through the StorNext GUE 3 Verify that the tape library is connected to the server Use the StorNext GUI to add at least one physical archive or storage disk to the system 1 Use
223. er Access Control Add modify or delete the level of user access For more information about user access control see Controlling User Access on page 48 Admin Access StorNext Logs View logs for SNFS the Server System and the StorNext Web Server For more information about accessing logs see Accessing StorNext Logs on page 56 Download Client Software Download the SNFS client software for a specific operating system For more information about downloading client software see the StorNext Installation Guide 35 Home and Help Links StorNext Server Status Figure 17 Start Stop SNFS Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 3 SNFS Only GUI Overview The SNFS Home Page Start Stop StorNext Start or Stop StorNext Software For more information about starting and stopping StorNext see StorNext Server Status on page 36 In the upper right corner of the screen are Home and Help links Clicking Home returns you immediately to the StorNext home page regardless of your current location Clicking Help displays a list of current StorNext documentation in pdf format You can open a particular guide or document by clicking its link The StorNext Server Status button is located at the bottom right of the SNFS Home Page This button displays one of three statuses for the file systems residing on the server e Active All configured file systems are active e Warning One or more of the configured file systems
224. erface Mic Quantum vault1 eject Deselect All Details Eject Fail X Close StorNext User s Guide 221 Moving Media StorNext User s Guide 13 14 Chapter 9 Managing Media Removing and Moving Media e Select All Click this button to select all media in the Select Media list for removal e Deselect All Click this button to deselect all media in the Select Media list e Details Click this button to view information about selected media e Eject Click this button to eject remove media from the library e Fail Click this button to mark selected media as Failed e Close Click this button to close the current window Note All of the media operations described may not be available for each library For the selected media IDs click Eject Click Close Use this procedure to move data blank media backup tapes or cleaning media to another library 1 From the StorNext home page choose Remove Move Media from the Admin menu The Remove or Move Media screen figure 157 on page 217 appears Select Move Media Select from the Select Library list the library from which to remove the media Select from the Media Type list the media type Click Next to continue The Select Media screen figure 158 on page 218 appears Note If you are using a vault library you must manually move the media To move individual media enter a media name in the Enter Media field an
225. erms of the License Agreement Accept Decline 43 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Entering the StorNext License 3 Read the license agreement and then click Accept The Enter License Strings screen appears This screen summarizes the information you must send to licenses Ouantum com in order to receive the license string you enter on this screen Figure 22 Enter License Strings Screen License soGD56 8HS F Enter License Microsoft Internet Explorer Enter License Strings Please E mail the following information to licenses quantum com 1 Serial number from cd or box 2 Number of SAN clients you wish to support 3 StorNext Server ID 16176A24E1 4 Number of distributed LAN clients you wish to support will E mail you a license key you will paste into the field ow License String prese o Quantum will E mail you a secondary license key for distributed LAN clients Please leave blank if not using distributed LAN clients Distributed LAN client License String If you wish you can use the temporary 30 day license and return to this page when you receive your permanent license I Generate 30 day temporary license lt Back Next gt X Cancel zl Note The illustration shows the Enter License Strings screen that appears when you access the Enter License wizard from the StorNext Configuration wizard The information below the Distributed LAN Client License String field d
226. es Clients Chenin phones Retesh f jo a oe ee ee NA NA NA Each of the Configuration Wizard s tasks are described in detail elsewhere in this guide Step 1 Enter License See Entering the StorNext License on page 40 Step 2 Add File System See Adding a File System on page 83 Step 3 Add Library See Adding a Library on page 170 Step 4 Add Tape Drive See Adding a Tape Drive on page 190 e Step 5 Add Media See Adding Media to a Configured Library on page 208 Step 6 Add Storage Disks See Adding a Storage Disk on page 241 Step 7 Add Storage Policy See Adding a Storage Policy on page 253 Step 8 Email Notification See Setting Up E mail Notification on page 67 28 m Chapter 3 f SNFS Only GUI Overview The SNFS GUI is browser based and can be accessed remotely from any machine with access to the local network and the SNFS server This chapter describes how to access and navigate through the SNFS only GUL If you purchased StorNext refer to StorNext GUI Overview on page 6 This chapter includes the following topics e Accessing the SNFS GUI e The SNFS Home Page e The SNFS Configuration Wizard Accessing the SNFS GUI Use the following procedure to access the SNFS GUI 1 Open a Web browser StorNext User s Guide 29 Chapter 3 SNFS Only GUI Overview Accessing the SNFS GUI Note Supported browsers are e Internet Explorer 5 5 6 and 7 e Netsc
227. es to the internal database e SNSM File Manager Logs Logs that track storage errors etc of the Storage Manager StorNext User s Guide 56 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Accessing StorNext Logs e SNSM Library Manager Logs Logs that track library events and status Server System Logs Logs that record system messages StorNext Web Server Logs Various logs related to the web server Use the following procedure to access the StorNext log files The process is the same regardless of the type of log you are viewing 1 From the StorNext home page select Access StorNext Logs from the Admin menu The Select Log screen appears RUE EE ae N Pies Select Log View the StorNext logs Select a log category and click Next SNFS Logs StorNext Database Logs SNSM File Manager Logs SNSM Library Manager Logs Server System Logs StorNext Web Server Logs Next gt X Cancel StorNext User s Guide 57 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Accessing StorNext Logs 2 Select the type of log you wish to view and then click Next The Select File screen appears Figure 34 Select File Screen lol Select File From this page you can view delete or e mail a log file from any one of the files in the list below Please select a file and click Show lt Back Delete Mail Show X Cancel 3 Select the log file you wish to view and then click one of the following e Delete Delete the selected log file e M
228. esolved 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Somer Hekels 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA UK France and Germany EMEA On the Web Figure 57 Downloading a Downloading a System State Capture 1 800 284 5101 00800 4 QUANTUM 44 1256 848 766 http vantym com support System State Capture RAS Use the Capturing a System State feature to obtain and preserve detailed information about the current StorNext state When the system state is captured ALL viable logs for StorNext software components are saved and available for review and analysis Use the Downloading a System State Capture feature to save the capture state to a local or network drive for system troubleshooting 1 Access the StorNext home page 2 Choose Capture State from the Service menu The Service Capture System State screen appears 3 Select a captured system state to download 4 Click Download The File Download screen appears 5 Click Save to save the zipped file to a local or network drive The Save As screen appears 6 Click Save StorNext User s Guide 417 Other RAS Messages Figure 58 Capturing a System Capturing a System State State RAS Use the Capture System State feature to obtain and preserve detailed information about the current StorNext state The Capture State feature includes ALL viable logs for the hardware and software components
229. essage describing one of the following operation via the StorNext GUI s Health Check Service conditions 2 Ifthe problem persists contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center Process initialization failed A database operation failed An unhandled software error has occurred A CLI command failure has caused the process that invoked it to abort A Blockpool Verify command failed to complete successfully You receive one of the following TSM 1 Try restarting the TSM software On the command line run tsmstop tsmstart If restarting succeeds Control Error messages rerun the Health Check using the StorNext GUI The TSM software could not be 2 If restarting does not succeed contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center started e The TSM software could not be stopped You cannot connect to the SNAPI server 1 Restart the system software process 2 Run the Health Check service using the StorNext GUI 3 Ifthe problem persists contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center The problem IS resolved Close the serice ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem is NOT resolved 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www guantum com support StorNext User s Guide 405 Other RAS Mes
230. ext to continue The Media Types screen figure 117 on page 174 appears 3 Select a media type from the list and click Next The Complete Add Library Task screen figure 119 on page 176 appears 4 Review your selections Click Next to complete the task or Back to make changes StorNext User s Guide 177 Adding a DAS Network Library Figure 121 DAS Configuration Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 7 Managing Libraries Adding a Library 5 After the status screen notifies you that the library was successfully added click Close After you select Network on the Library Introduction screen and then choose DAS from the drop down list the DAS Configuration screen appears f Add Library Microsoft Internet Explorer f l0 x DAS Configuration Screen Select parameters that match StorNext Configuration Select only those that apply If none apply press the Next button I StorNext Server HA Failover Configuration Il Dual Aisle Scalar i2000 Back Next gt X Cancel 1 Do one of the following e Select the Failover option or both the Failover and Dual Aisle options click Next and proceed to Adding a DAS Network Library with Failover on page 179 e Select only the Dual Aisle option click Next and proceed to Adding a DAS Network Library with or without Dual Aisle Configuration on page 181 178 Figure 122 DAS Library Name Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 7
231. fication Microsoft Internet Explorer Notification Screen ii Configured E mail StorNext User s Guide 68 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Setting Up E mail Notification 2 On the Configure E mail Notification Introduction screen review your current e mail settings if any and then click Next to continue The Configure SMTP E mail screen appears Figure 40 Configure SMTP E mail Screen E mail Notification Microsoft Internet Explorer S lol x Configure SMTP E mail e Enter a SMTP Server If validation is necessary select Password and fill in Account and Password fields e If Send Test E Mail is checked a test E mail will be sent on completion of the wizard SMTP Server l Quantum Account Password Sender Address I Send Test E mail to StorNext Back Next gt X Cancel 3 On the Configure SMTP E mail screen enter the fields related to your e mail system configuration e SMTP Server Enter the identification for the server that stores and processes your e mail account information This might be a valid server name or an IP address e Authentication If your e mail provider requires a password upon sign on select the Password option Otherwise select None e Account Enter a valid e mail account for outgoing e mail messages e Password Enter the e mail account s sign on password if required StorNext User s Guide 69 Figure 41 Conf
232. file was successfully deleted click Close Using the System Status Tool The System Status tool creates a list of RAS tickets that relate to system faults or errors Ticket details provide a summary of the system fault an area for Analysis notes and contains a Recommended Actions link to help you correct the fault Use the following procedure to use the System Status tool 1 From the StorNext home page choose System Status from the Service menu The Service System Status screen appears StorNext User s Guide 317 Figure 238 Service System Status Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 13 Service Management Using the System Status Tool FEE EE EE EE EE EE Ee i a Quantum K o i e StorNext Home Help Contig Admin Service System Status Home Below is a list of tickets indicating taults reported by the system To close all open toets use Close Air af he DoBom of he page SNFS eta me or ena 20 Ticket State Priority Last Update Gureary a 1 closed high 20 Gec 2006 23 00 01 ADIC software loved high 1 dec 2 3 00 00 IC software 3 losed high 22 dec 3 00 00 ADIC software losed high doc 3 00 03 ADIC software s losed high 4 doc 2006 22 00 00 ADIC software closed high t dec 2006 23 00 00 ADIC software 7 losed high 26 dec 2006 23 00 00 ADIC software e closed high 7 G0C 2006 23 00 00 ADIC software losed high dac 2006 23 00 00 ADIC software 10 closed high 29 dec 2006 23 00 00 ADIC coftware i closed hig
233. finity names found in the TIERDEF database table Examine all DSM configuration files usx adic DSM config cfg For all of the configuration files that have the Data Migration Flag set to YES make sure the complete list of affinities matches the TIERNAME fields found in the TSM TIERDEF database table Make sure the non zero elements in the TIERLIST field of the TSM CLASSDEF tables all match the TIERNUM fields in the TSM TIERDEF table Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www guantum com support 401 SNFS RAS Messages Figure 39 Quota Limit or Fragmentation Warnings RAS Recommended Actions Quota Limit or Fragmentation Warnings IF THEN You receive a warning that the quota Either increase the user s quota or notify the user hard limit is reached for a user You receive a warning that fragmentation 1 Consult the snfsdefrag man page for instructions on performing fragmentation analysis and defragmenting files has been detected in an inode 2 See ExtentCountThreshold in the cvfs_config documentation for information on adjusting this RAS event The problem IS resolved Close the serice ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The probl
234. formed successfully click OK EE ee EE EE N EE oe Gee ie Changing Watermark Parameters Watermarks help you determine disk space thresholds for your file system These thresholds determine the point at which StorNext applies or stops applying a truncation policy This function also allows you to specify a minimum usage percentage which is the percentage of occupied disk space the nightly truncation policy attempts to achieve StorNext User s Guide 206 Chapter 8 Managing Drives and Disks Changing Watermark Parameters 1 From the SNSM home page choose Watermark Parameters from the Admin menu The Change Watermark Parameters screen appears Figure 148 Change Watermark FONT is ee 5 Home Help Parameters Screen ae id g StorNext ome Heip Hie Mosa Aare Reports Help I Change Water Mark Parameters Home Select f a SNFS SNSM Managed Fie System s snis Low Water Mark sy 75 High Water Mark S 25 Min Vse sy 75 v Apply Reset StorNext 8 Change IOM configurable parameters spock Active J Local intranet 2 Select from the Managed File System s dropdown list the file system for which you want to set watermark parameters 3 Enter the following fields e Low Watermark Enter the percentage of occupied disk space a file system must reach before StorNext stops applying the truncation policy e High Watermark Enter the percentage of occupied disk space a file system must reach before Stor
235. group e To enable placing only metadata on the new stripe group select both the Metadata and Exclusive checkboxes To enable placing only journaling on the new stripe group select both the Journal and Exclusive checkboxes Note Journaling can be enabled on only one stripe group If the Metadata and or Journal checkboxes are not checked on any of the stripe groups in this file system default settings cause metadata and journaling to be placed on the first defined stripe group If the file system was made the metadata cannot be removed Realtime IO sec optional The number of disk I O operations per second that are available to real time applications This is an optional setting and can be left blank 119 Deleting a Stripe Group StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Stripe Groups e Realtime MB sec optional The number of megabytes per second that are available to real time applications This is an optional setting and can be left blank e Non realtime IO sec optional The number of disk I O operations per second that are available to non realtime applications This is an optional setting and can be left blank e Non realtime MB sec optional The lower threshold in megabytes per second that is reserved for non realtime applications This is an optional setting and can be left blank Click OK 7 After the screen indicates that the stripe group has been m
236. h 30 dac 2006 23 00 00 ADIC software z a Closed Eurre Nor gt Details Xx Close All L Refresh StorNext kazar L Active E Race Admiri aton Page Allow fe user to operate the produet om one locaton Er TT TT Nomsa The Service System Status screen contains the following information Total Number of Tickets The number of RAS tickets the system has generated Ticket The RAS ticket number displayed in the order in which it was created State The ticket s current status OPEN or CLOSED Priority The ticket s priority based on system impact HIGH MEDIUM or LOW Last Update The date of the last system status update Summary A short summary of the fault that triggered creating the RAS ticket Show Tickets Controls the type of tickets shown in the display window OPEN CLOSED or ALL tickets Previous and Next Click these buttons to toggle between ticket pages if there is more than one page of tickets Details Click this button to view a selected ticket s details Close All Click this button to close all tickets shown in the display window 318 Figure 239 RAS Ticket Details Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 13 Service Management Using the System Status Tool e Refresh Click this button to refresh the display window 2 Highlight the ticket you wish to view and then click Details The RAS Ticket Details screen appears RAS Ticket Details Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View
237. hapter describes the following tasks that help you manage your library e Adding a Library e Modifying a Library e Deleting a Library e Rescanning a Library e Auditing a Library e Changing the Library State StorNext User s Guide 169 Chapter 7 Managing Libraries Adding a Library E Adding a Library Use the procedure in this section to add libraries to StorNext StorNext s Storage Manager SNSM component supports three library types SCSI A SCSI or fibre channel attached library e Network ACSLS or DAS A network attached library There are two types of network attached library ACSLS or DAS e Vault A library that stores media moved from a robotic library A vault library is used to only store media and cannot be reconfigured after it has been designated as a vault When adding a library to StorNext follow the instructions specific to your library type Starting the Add Library Use this procedure to launch the Add Library wizard Wizard 1 From the StorNext home page choose Add Library from the Config menu The Library Introduction screen appears showing all currently configured libraries StorNext User s Guide 170 Figure 114 Library Introduction Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 7 Managing Libraries Adding a Library No Libraries Configured 2 Click Next The Library Type screen appears 171 Chapter 7 Managing Libraries Adding a Library Figure 115 Li
238. have not been mounted or started e Stopped The storage manager or the file system manager is stopped When you click the Server Status button the Start Stop SNFS screen appears Z Start Stop StorNext Microsoft Internet Explorer Start Stop StorNext Quantum This will stop or start the StorNext software INTELLIGENT STORAGE systems are not mounted or started Select an action C Start E Stop Select the applications I All Applications I StorNext File System started I StorNext Storage Manager started Automatically start StorNext at boot time Enable C Disable StorNext If your file system is in a warning state one or more of your file x lol Net gt X Cancel 36 Chapter 3 SNFS Only GUI Overview The SNFS Home Page 1 On the Start Stop SNFS screen select Start or Stop to manually start or stop the StorNext File System 2 Select Enable or Disable to enable or disable the feature that automatically starts SNFS upon reboot Your selection will be reflected the next time you reboot 3 Do one of the following e Click Cancel to exit the Start Stop SNFS screen without saving e Click Next to save your changes and proceed The Complete Start Stop SNFS screen appears Figu re 18 Com plete Start Stop F Start Stop File System Microsoft Internet Explorer stof SNFS Screen Complete Start Stop SNFS z Quantum You have completed
239. he dat File StorNext User s Guide Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Entering the StorNext License Enter License Microsoft Internet Explorer i 10 xj Complete Enter License You have completed the necessary steps to enter the license Please review your selections and click Next to apply them or click Back to make changes License String server 1 0016176A24E1 15 AAAAAFSABGAJCFSLEVSSCNT9YPEPQF739NBG8J4K BUPJX3YFYGTS kazar Quantum Proxy Licence String proxy 1 0016176A24E1 15 AAAAAFSAHGASCFSLEVSSCNTSYRTDSKCARC627MAS 5AB4843MRAUS kazar Quantum z License SOGOEGYSMS Back L Ned gt X Cancel 10 Review the information on the screen and then click Next to continue or Back to make changes 11 After the status screen informs you that the operation was completed successfully click Finish Alternatively when you receive your license string via email you can copy and paste the license string into the usr adic DSM config license dat file instead of using the Enter License Strings screen Updating this file enables StorNext to automatically detect the license string when the Configuration Wizard runs Here is an example of a StorNext license file with the license string entered below License Authorization String This is an example only Do not enter the license screen shown 47 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Controlling User Access Figure 26 License String System serverl Exa
240. he Data Stripe Group Move screen appears StorNext User s Guide 161 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Performing Stripe Group Movement Figure 106 Data Stripe Group Move Screen Z Move Stripe Group Microsoft Internet Explorer N s oj xj Data Stripe Group Move e Selected stripe groups will be marked as read only e Selected stripe groups data will be distributed to one or more available data stripe groups Select stripe groups to mark read only and move data from StripeGroup1 Metadata Journal Exclusive StripeGroup2 StripeGroup3 Metadata Exclusive Back Next gt X Cancel 8 Select the source stripe group from which data will be moved The stripe group you select will be marked as read only and data from the stripe group will be distributed among one or more available stripe groups This feature does not allow you to specify the destination stripe groups If there are no writable destination stripe groups available you will receive a warning message and not be allowed to continue If you receive this message you must first create destination stripe groups before you proceed with the move Figure 107 No Writable Stripe EET sd Groups Warning N You have no available writable destination stripe groups EE StorNext User s Guide 162 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Performing Stripe Group Movement Similarly if StorNext determines that the available destination
241. he cleaning media might be defective or expired or there is a problem with the drive 1 Replace exisiting cleaning media 2 Attempt to clean the drive using the StorNext GUI From the SNSM home page choose Drive gt Clean Drive from the Admin menu 3 If the drive still indicates that cleaning is required contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center using the contact information below The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http Awww_quantum com support Tape Drive Wrong Firmware Level Invalid Drive Type IF THEN The service ticket indicates Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center using the contact information the tape drive s firmware below level is wrong The service ticket indicates Disconnect the drive and then contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center the drive type is invalid using the contact information below The problem S resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the
242. he file systems that are not mounted The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been resolved 4 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www _quantum com support Other RAS Messages This section describes RAS messages that might appear as a result of an error condition that is not related to media or the file system StorNext User s Guide 403 Figure 42 Checksum Error RAS Other RAS Messages Checksum Error When a checksum error occurs during a file retrieve operation the error is generally due to a hardware failure in a tape drive host bus adapter or the cabling between them The error can also be caused by damaged media If the checksum error is due to a drive or media failure there might be an associated Tape Alert service ticket IF The drive or media is suspected The media is bad The host bus adapter is suspected Cabling is suspected There is an associated Tape Alert service ticket The problem IS resolved The problem has NOT been resolved StorNext User s Guide THEN 1 Close the ticket and retry the read write operation on the original drive and media 2 Monitor operation for a reoccurrence of
243. hether deduplication is enabled for the storage disk This field cannot be modified 4 After making storage disk modifications click Apply After the Status Screen informs you that your modifications were made successfully click Close Deleting a Storage Disk Use the following procedure to delete a storage disk 1 From the SNSM home page choose Storage Disk gt Config from the Admin menu The Configure Storage Disk screen figure 178 on page 241 appears 2 Select the storage disk you want to delete and then click Delete A message will warn you that all data on the disk will be deleted with the disk and ask you to confirm that you want to continue StorNext User s Guide 246 Chapter 10 Managing Storage Disks Changing a Storage Disk State Caution All data on the storage disk will be removed when you continue so proceed with extreme caution There is no undo feature that will undelete the storage disk if you change your mind so be absolutely certain you want to delete the storage disk before you continue Ee EE EE Figure 1 83 Delete Warning Microsoft Internet Explorer N x Message ee ah 2 This will delete all data From the storage disk and depending on the number of Files this task may take a long time Are you sure you want to delete Storage_Disk_2 Cancel 3 Click OK 4 After the Status screen informs you that the storage disk was successfully deleted click Clo
244. hysically connected by checking all cabling and connections 4 Verify that the device is correctly mapped to the host server Caution If your system configuration allows you to logically remap all dences ensure that StorMext has been stopped pror to beginning remapping Restart StorMext after remapping is complete The problem IS resolved Close the sence ticket Refer to Closing Senace Tickets The problem has NOT been resolved 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Senece Tickets 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 14800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 B48 766 On the Web biip www quantum com support StorNext User s Guide 406 Other RAS Messages Figure 45 Closing Service Tickets RAS Closing Service Tickets Use this procedure to close a service ticket ed NOTE You can analyze a service ticket after it has been closed For more information refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 1 Analyze the service ticket Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Select the Close Ticket check box 3 Click Apply to close the service ticket The Progress window appears showing the status of the service ticket being closed NOTE Once the Progress window appears you cannot cancel or stop this action However you can close the window by clicking on the X in the upper right corner of the window but confirmation of su
245. ia labels by clicking the New Media button The Create New Media ID screen appears Figure 156 Create New Media Sie ID Screen Quantum Create New Media ID Enter a New Media Label Name ex ABC Enter the Starting Value for the Media ID Pattern ex 001 Enter the Number of Media IDs to Generate X Cancel A Apply 4 On the Create New Media ID screen perform the following steps 1 Enter the new media label name 2 Enter the number of media IDs you want to generate for the label 3 Enter a starting value for the new media ID 4 If you want to create additional media IDs click Apply and repeat steps 1 through 3 5 When you are finished creating media IDs click OK to save your changes and exit The Add Media IDs screen appears again 5 On the Add Media IDs screen select one or more media IDs from the list and then click Next to continue The Complete Add Media Task screen figure 153 on page 213 appears 6 Onthe Complete Add Media Task screen click Next to finish adding the media or Back to make changes 7 After the status screen informs you that the media has been successfully added click Finish Caution StorNext will use and overwrite all available tapes so make sure only the library contains only media you want StorNext to use StorNext User s Guide 216 Chapter 9 Managing Media Removing and Moving Media Removing and Moving Media These procedures enable you to re
246. ich the services are run The Windows default account is the local administrator account but this can be changed on the Properties tab of each system service When sharing restricted file systems the account under which SNFS system services are run must be included in the ACL for the root of the file system and all other shares associated with the SNFS file system Doing this allows the shares to be re shared upon reboot Default Single Path I O Retry Behavior The I O retry behavior has changed as of StorNext 3 1 2 In prior releases when only a single path to the storage existed and an I O error was returned by the disk device driver StorNext failed the I O operation Beginning with version 3 1 2 by default StorNext continuously retries I O operations until they succeed regardless of the number of I O paths If desired you can override this new behavior by using the new I O Retry Time feature For additional information about I O Retry Time consult the mount_cvfs man page or the Windows help file StorNext User s Guide 334 Event Handles for fsm exe on a Windows Metadata Server Event Handles for fsm exe on a Windows Metadata Server The metadata server FSM has many data structures that are used internally Each of the data structures has some locks pthread_mutex_lock Each lock is initialized as uninitialized The first time the lock is used a small amount of memory and an event i e handle are allocated The m
247. ide on your managed file system e Checksum Generation Select this option if you want to generate a checksum e Checksum Validation Select this option to enable checksum validation e Managed File System to use for Backup Select the name of the file system to use for the backup 3 Click Apply to save and apply the backup policy StorNext User s Guide 80 StorNext User s Guide Chapter 5 Backing Up StorNext Managing the Backup Policy 4 After the Status screen informs you that the operation was performed successfully click OK 81 m Chapter 6 f Managing the File System This chapter describes how to manage file systems by performing these major configuration and administration tasks e Working With File Systems e Managing File System Operations e Working With Disks e Working With Stripe Groups e Working With Affinities e Using the SNSM File System Functions e Understanding Dynamic Resource Allocation e Performing File System Expansion e Performing Stripe Group Movement Working With File Systems This section includes the following file system related tasks e Adding a File System e Creating a File System From SNFS StorNext User s Guide 82 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With File Systems e Modifying a File System Deleting a File System Note This section describes how to create modify expand and delete a file system using the GUI Fo
248. ient write operations and Distributed LAN Server read operations To address this issue edit the usr cvfs config dpserver configuration file and reduce the Distributed LAN Server TCP window size from the default value Remount the file system after making changes 329 Distributed LAN Server Memory Tuning StorNext User s Guide Distributed LAN Server Client Network and Memory Tuning This may reduce the amount of packet loss However some Ethernet switches are unable to accommodate true GigE bandwidth especially when multiple ports are transmitting data at the same time Linux Network Drivers For best performance and compatibility update Intel e1000 drivers to the latest version In some cases enabling TCP offload can cause issues Identify these issues by examining netstat s output for bad segments If necessary use ethtool K to disable the offload of checksum calculations On some Linux 2 6 versions running on x86 64 bit systems a console message regarding noirq handler may appear followed by a hard system hang This is due to a bug in the kernel To avoid this error disable the irgbalance service Mismatched Server Configuration Introducing a slower server onto the network reduces overall throughput This is because the slower server receives some traffic from all clients For example adding a server with one NIC in a network where other servers have two NICs or adding a server with less disk bandwidth
249. ies and or drives including file system library and drive information The File System Monitor and Library Monitor have a Refresh button that allows you to manually update refresh the information shown in the monitor You can also select a rate from the Refresh Rate list to automatically refresh at the selected interval e No Refresh e 30 seconds e 1minute e 2 minutes e 5 minutes Figure 3 File System Monitor StorNext User s Guide Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview The StorNext Home Page e 10 minutes The File System Monitor The File System Monitor enables you to view statistics on each configured file system When you open a browser to access StorNext the File System Monitor appears at the top of the browser window i i S No Refresh File System Monitor 5 Refresh Refresh Rate No Refres File Total Space Used Space Free Space Used Store Trunc SAN LAN State system G8 GB GB Inodes Candidates Candidates Clients Clients snfst 18966 4 31 18535 s5 NA NA T o H a a o 3 snts2 INA N A N A N A N A N A NA NA The File System Monitor provides the following information Refresh Click this button to manually refresh the File System Monitor Refresh Rate Set the File System Monitor to automatically refresh with this drop down menu Options range from No Refresh to every 10 Minutes e State A green checkbox indicates the file system is mounted and active a red x indicates
250. igure E mail Addresses Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Setting Up E mail Notification e Sender Address Enter the e mail address for the entity sending alert messages to recipients Send Test E mail to Enter an e mail address to which you can send test messages in order to confirm successful configuration 4 Click Next to continue The Configure E mail Addresses screen appears Z E mail Notification Microsoft Internet Explorer Configure E mail Addresses Service Tickets require an alert level E mail for Service Tickets will be sent for alerts at the specified alert level and higher Policy class E mails require a policy class If Notify Quantum Technical Assistance Center on Service Ticket is checked an E mail will be sent to QUANTUM when a Service Ticket is generated E mail Ce I Admin Alerts Backups Senice Tickets SelectAlertLevel I Policy Class Select Policy Class Add Properties E Mail Addresses Service Ticket high abe quantum com Admin Alerts abe quantum com I Notify Quantum Technical Assistance Center on Service Ticket Back Next gt X Cancel z 5 On the Configure E mail Addresses screen add e mail recipients by entering the following fields E mail Enter the e mail address of the person who should receive e mail alerts Admin Alerts Select this option to receive e mail whenever an admin alert is generated For more i
251. ine a red x indicates the library is offline Library Name Displays the name of the library e Library Type Indicates the library type SCSI Vault or Network e Number of Drives Specifies the number of drives that are configured for the library e Capacity Total number of media slots in the library e Fill Level Number of media in the archive Drive Name Name or label of configured drive or drives for the library e Status Indicates if the drive is free in use failed delayed or cleaning e Mounted Media Media ID of the media currently mounted in the drive e Compression Indicates whether compression is enabled The Storage Disk Monitor The Storage Disk monitor allows you to view configured storage disk information When you open a browser to access StorNext the Storage Disk Monitor appears below the Library Monitor Storage Disk Monitor State Storage Disk Name Deduplication Space GB Used Space GB Copy Files Savings Storage Disk 1 Disabled 39 1 16 23 1 170 Storage_Disk_2 Enabled 184 28 5 38 2 170 0 18 The Storage Disk Monitor provides the following information e State A green checkbox indicates the storage disk is online and a red x indicates the storage disk is offline A yellow triangle icon indicates the storage disk is in an online pending state The online pending state is for storage disks that have deduplication enabled A deduplication enabled storage disk is put into an onlin
252. ings using CLI 1 Unmount the file system by typing the following unmount lt file_system_name gt Where the file system name is the name of the file system where the settings are being modified 2 Stop the file system by typing the following ust cvfs bin cvadmin snadmin gt stop lt file_system_name gt snadmin gt quit where snadmin is the prompt shown after invoking the cvadmin command Note When the file system is down file system operations will pause and some applications could fail Plan accordingly to minimize disruptions 3 Edit the configuration file by typing the following edit usr cvfs config lt file_system_name gt cfg 355 Making a File System 4 Make the appropriate edits to the configuration file 5 Restart the file system Type usr cvfs bin cvadmin snadmin start file system name snadmin activate sfile system name snadmin gt select snadmin gt quit 6 Mount the file system by typing the following mount t cvfs lt file_system_name gt lt mount_point gt For example mount t cvfs snfs1 stornext snfs1 Making a File System Following are some reasons to make or re make a file system Creating a new file system e Removing a stripe group from the file system e Removing a disk from a stripe group e Changing a stripe group s stripe breadth e Changing the sector count of a disk Caution Making or re making a file system will result in a complete loss of user
253. ion StorNext is data management software that enables customers to complete projects faster and confidently store more data at a lower cost Used in the world s most demanding environments StorNext is the standard for high performance shared workflow operations and multitier archives StorNext consists of two components StorNext File System SNFS a high performance data sharing software and StorNext Storage Manager SNSM the intelligent policy based data mover StorNext File System streamlines processes and facilitates faster job completion by enabling multiple business applications to work from a single consolidated data set Using SNFS applications running on different operating systems Windows Linux UNIX HPUX AIX and Mac OS X can simultaneously access and modify files on a common high speed SAN storage pool This centralized storage solution eliminates slow LAN based file transfers between workstations and dramatically reduces delays caused by single client failures With SNFS any server can access files and pick up processing requirements of a failed system to continue operations StorNext Storage Manager enhances the StorNext solution by reducing the cost of long term data retention without sacrificing accessibility SNSM sits on top of SNFS and utilizes intelligent data movers to transparently locate data on multiple tiers of storage This enables customers to store more files at a lower cost without having to About
254. ions If not all clients mount all of the file systems the memory requirement is reduced accordingly For example suppose in the previous example that half of the 64 LAN clients mount three of the four file systems and the other half of the LAN clients mount the remaining file system Given this configuration here is the result Required memory 1GB 3 2 32 16 256K 1 2 32 16 256K 1GB 768MB 256MB 2GB The calculation also changes when the number of NICs used for data traffic varies across clients For example in the previous example if the clients that mount only one file system each use three NICs for data instead of two here is the result Required memory 1GB 3 2 32 16 256K 1 3 32 16 256K 1GB 768MB 384K 2176MB Linux For a Linux Distributed LAN Server use the following formula Required memory 1GB of file systems served of NICs on the Distributed LAN Server used for Distributed LAN traffic server buffer count 331 Configuring LDAP Using LDAP StorNext User s Guide Configuring LDAP transfer buffer size For example consider a Linux Distributed LAN Server that has two NICs used for Distributed LAN traffic serves four file systems and uses the default eight server buffers and 256K per buffer See the dpserver and sndpscfg man pages for information about viewing and modifying Distributed LAN buffer settings on Linux For
255. irectory in the file system all data is directed to StripeGroup StripeGroup3 which contains three disks disk3 disk4 and disk5 All data is written to these disks when directed to the associated directory with Affinity aff2 This section includes the following topics e Adding an Affinity e Adding an Affinity Through SNES e Setting the Affinity in a Directory e Modifying an Affinity e Deleting an Affinity e File System Configuration Restrictions Adding an Affinity oe the following procedure to add an affinity to a configured file system 1 From the StorNext home page select Add Affinity from the Config menu The Add Affinity Introduction screen appears showing a list of existing configured file systems to which you can add an affinity StorNext User s Guide 121 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Affinities Figure 72 Add Affinity 7 Add Affinity Mic Introduction Screen Internet Explorer 2 Click Next to continue The Add Affinity screen appears StorNext User s Guide 122 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Affinities Figure 73 Add Affinity Screen Add Affinity Microsoft Internet Explorer 3 Select the file system to which you want to add the affinity Enter a name for the affinity up to eight characters long that begins with a letter Click Next to continue The Select Directory screen appears StorNext User s Guide 123 Chapter 6 Man
256. ired RAS Cleaning Media Expired IF The service ticket indicates the cleaning media for the tape library has expired The problem IS resolved The problem has NOT been resolved StorNext User s Guide Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets In the USA UK France and Germany EMEA On the Web Ifthe tape library has exported the cleaning media to the entry port remove the cleaning media 2 Ifthe tape library has NOT exported the cleaning media to the entry port export it 3 If no other cleaning media is available in the tape library add a new one Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center 1 800 284 5101 00800 4 QUANTUM 44 1256 848 766 http www_ quantum_com support 386 Figure 13 No Cleaning Media Available RAS Figure 14 Media Suspect Threshold Count Exceeded RAS StorNext User s Guide Media and Drive RAS Messages Recommended Actions Cleaning Media No Cleaning Media Available IF THEN The service ticket indicates Add new cleaning media to the tape library the tape library does not have any available cleaning media The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Servic
257. is Detailed Media Information Report displayed after you click the Show Details link provides the following information Dead Space The amount of unused space on the media File Pathname The file s path location File Size The file s size Version The file s current version 282 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Media Information Report Status The file s current status Active or Inactive e Modify Delete Date The date the file was last modified or deleted Use the following procedure to run the Media Information Report 1 Choose Media from the Reports menu The Media Report screen appears Figure 209 Media Report Screen ax Media Report Enter one or more media IDs or click Browse to select media from specific archives Enter Media ID Browse Entered Media ID s Select All Deselect All A Apply Reset X Cancel 2 Select the media on which to run the report by doing one of the following Inthe Enter Media ID field type the ID of the media on which to run the report Proceed to Step 5 page 285 e Select media IDs from the Selected Media ID s list You can click Select All to select all media IDs or Deselect All to deselected selected IDs Proceed to Step 5 page 285 e Click Browse to select media from specific libraries StorNext User s Guide 283 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Media Information Report 3 When you click Browse the Media Browser screen appears Select fr
258. is field shows total amount of data stored in megabytes This field does not appear when deduplication is disabled e Unique Data Stored MB If deduplication is enabled this field shows amount of unique data stored in megabytes This field does not appear when deduplication is disabled Use the following procedure to run the Storage Disks report 1 Choose Storage Disks from the Reports menu The Storage Disk Report screen appears StorNext User s Guide 296 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Storage Disk Information Report 2 0 x Figure 220 Sto rage Disk F http spock 85 tm bin admin_storage_disk cgi task report_start Microsoft Internet Expla Report Screen Storage Disk Report Select one or more storage Disks to report To show the files on the selected Storage Disk click Yes Depending on the number of files on the Storage Disk this can cause the report to be very large and take a long time to run Select Storage Disk Storage Disks Storage_Disk_1 Select All Deselect All Show Files on Storage Disk Yes No VY Apply Reset X Cancel 2 Select the disks on which to run the report and click Apply The Storage Disk Information Report appears Note If you enable the Show Files on Storage Disk option the report could be very large and take a long time to run depending on the number of files on the storage disk StorNext User s Guide 297 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Director
259. ive pool and then click Apply A message window warns you that continuing with the task restarts the Storage Manager Figure 143 Warning Message Microsoft Internet Explorer Window 2 In order to perform the change the StorNext Storage Manager has to be restarted Do you want to continue 7 Cancel 5 Click OK to close the message window and continue 6 After the Status screen informs you that the drive pool was successfully added click Close Modifying a Drive Pool Use this procedure to modify a drive pool Note This procedure requires restarting the Storage Manager component 1 From the SNSM home page choose Config Drive Pool from the Admin menu The Configure Drive Pools screen figure 141 on page 201 appears 2 Select from the Select Drive Pool list the existing drive pool you want to change and then click Modify The Modify Drive Pool screen appears StorNext User s Guide 202 Chapter 8 Managing Drives and Disks Working with Drive Pools Figure 144 Modify Drive Pool Z http kazar 85 tm bin admin drive pool config cgi action modify p Screen Ouantum Modify Drive Pool Drive Pool Name s FOdrivepool Drive ID List Drive ID List gt Insert Right scsi archivel dri scsi archivel dr2 Remove Left scsi archivel dr3 ao Apply X Cancel Reset 3 Select from the Associated Drives list the drive you want to move to the Available Drives
260. ivepool Minimum Store Minimum Trunc Time Max Backup Truncate File Checksum Checksum Time minutes days Sets Immediately After Store Validation Generation 10 5 10 Off DISABLED DISABLED Minimum Set Store Maximum File Store File Age Before Disk to Disk Affinity From Affinity Te 2 Size MB Age hours z ur ME Relocation n a nia DISABLED NA NIA NA Stub File Retrieve to izelkE Store Affinit Media Clean Pool Stub Files Si Auto SYSTEM Disabled 0 yes at X Close 5 Click Close when you are finished viewing the report The Relation Information Report The Relation Information Report shows the pathname of the selected directory and the corresponding policy class name for the directory Use the following procedure to run the Directory Policy Class Relationship report 1 Choose Relations from the Reports menu The Directory Policy Class Relationships Report screen appears StorNext User s Guide 290 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Relation Information Report Figure 215 Directory Policy Z Report Relations Microsoft Internet Explorer Class Relationships Report Screen pel stornext snfs1 pcfilltest 2 Select from the Select Managed Directories list the directory on which the report is run and then click Apply The Relation Information Report appears StorNext User s Guide 291 Figure 216 Relation Information Report Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Request Information Report 3 Relation Information Report
261. ives you are adding e Fibre Channel Attached Drives checkbox Check this box if you have fibre channel attached tape drives If you check this box the Match Devices with Slots screen appears Go to Matching Devices with Slots on page 194 Note For SCSI direct attached tapes that are not fibre channel it is not necessary to match the device with the correct slot because slot to drive matching is automatically performed If StorNext cannot perform slot matching the Match Devices with Slots screen appears StorNext User s Guide 191 Chapter 8 Managing Drives and Disks Working with Tape Drives 3 After you select a configured library on the Associated Library screen click Next The Hardware Devices screen appears Figure 132 Hardware Devices Z Add Drive Microsoft Internet Explorer loj x Screen Hardware Devices Select one or more hardware devices from the list and add them as drives The drive names are automatically generated in this form lt library gt _dr1 lt library gt _dr2 Hardware Devices Enable Compression lt Back Next gt X Cancel e Hardware Devices list Select the hardware devices you want to add as drives Drive names are automatically generated in this format lt ibrary_dri gt lt library_dr2 gt Enable Compression checkbox Check this box to allow data compression on the tape drives you are adding StorNext User s Guide 192 Chapter 8 Managing Drives and
262. k relocation you can define a maximum of two affinities per file system This section describes how to modify an existing file system s configuration Changes to an existing file system include adding or modifying a stripe group adding disks adding affinities and performance tuning Modifying a File System Note This procedure assumes the file system exists with at least two stripe groups 1 Unmount the file system as described in Mounting or Unmounting a File System on page 108 2 Stop the file system as described in Starting and Stopping the File System on page 107 3 Make the appropriate changes to the file system For more information refer to e Making Global Changes on page 100 StorNext User s Guide 93 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With File Systems e Modifying an Affinity on page 131 e Adding Disks on page 109 e Adding a Stripe Group on page 114 e Modifying a Stripe Group on page 117 4 Start the file system as described in Starting and Stopping the File System on page 107 5 Mount the file system as described in Mounting or Unmounting a File System on page 108 Alternatively you can modify the file system by using the Modify button on the Configure File System screen to change the file system name or mount point or to enable the machine as a Distributed LAN server 1 Make sure the file system you want to modify is unmounted as described in Mounting or Unm
263. ke this Figure 54 Label Help Screen Quantum Platform Support for Large LUNs This is a list of operating systems that have limitations for labeling disk devices Restricted support of gt 2TB LUNs AIX VTOC EFI VTOC EFI EFI sVTOC Note 1 Support for first 2TB of gt 2TB LUNs Apple Xsan 1 2 VTOC VTOC sVTOC Apple Xsan 1 3 on OS X 10 3 Panther VTOC EFI VTOC EFI sVTOC EFI HP UX VTOC EFI VTOC EFI sVTOC EFI Windows XP 32 bit VTOC EFI VTOC EFI sVTOC EFI No support of gt 2TB LUNs IRIX VTOC VTOC Linux 2 4 VTOC EFI VTOC EFI Solaris 9 w Big LUN Patch VTOC EFI EFI Solaris 10 vanilla VTOC EFI EFI Solaris 9 vanilla VTOC Note 1 AIX appears to be limited to LUNs 2 2TB or smaller VTOC VTOC label EFI EFI label short VTOC sVTOC label on gt 2TB LUN DISCLAIMER While every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this information it is subject to change and should be verified with each particular system vendor X Close Stripe breadth drop down menu The stripe breadth for the file system The stripe breadth is the number of kilobytes KB that is read from or written to each disk in the stripe For a typical StorNext installation 64KB is the recommended setting Note If the file system you are adding will be used for deduplication enabled storage disks you must accept the default value of 64 kilobytes StorNext U
264. l Assistance Center immediately volume ID volid was already in use The problem indicates that a Validate that the problem was the media or the drive particular piece of media failed to format 1 Use fschmedstate to clean up the media s suspect and marked state 2 Use fschstate to take offline the drive in which the media failed to format 3 Attempt to reformat the media using fsformat If the format fails again the media is unusable and should be discarded Otherwise the previous drive or connectivity might be problematic Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center The problem persists 1 Use the Capturing a System State feature to create a system snapshot 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www quantum com support StorNext User s Guide 388 Figure 16 Invalid Media Label Detected RAS StorNext User s Guide Media and Drive RAS Messages Recommended Actions Invalid Media Label Detected IF THEN A specific piece of media Run sCheckSlotMapping to ensure that all paths to tape drives are configured
265. l stop shown For all UNIX based cvaffinity lt filename gt commands words in italic are variables and should be replaced with user defined values where lt filename gt is a variable and should be replaced with a user defined value StorNext User s Guide 5 m StorNext GUI Overview f Chapter 2 C This section describes how to access and navigate through the StorNext GUI which includes both SNFS and SNSM If you purchased SNFS only refer to SNFS Only GUI Overview This chapter includes the following topics e Accessing the StorNext GUI e The StorNext Home Page e The SNFS and SNSM Home Pages The Configuration Wizard Note StorNext supports internationalization for the name space of the file system This support is fully UTF 8 compliant It is up to the individual client to set the proper UTF 8 locale Accessing the StorNext GUI The StorNext GUI is browser based and can be remotely accessed from any machine with access to the StorNext server StorNext User s Guide 6 Figure 1 StorNext Login Window StorNext User s Guide Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview Accessing the StorNext GUI Use this procedure to access the StorNext GUI 1 Open a Web browser Note StorNext supported browsers are e Internet Explorer 5 5 6 and 7 e Netscape 7 x e Mozilla 1 0 and later e FireFox 1 5 and later or 2 0 and later To ensure proper browser operation all monitors must be
266. last allocation size up to the maximum number of file system blocks e Max Connections Specify the maximum number of simultaneous connections for the file system e Reserved Space This option enables delayed allocations on clients Reserved space is a performance feature that allows clients to perform buffered writes on a file without first obtaining real allocations from the metadata controller The allocations are later performed when the data is flushed to disk in the background by a daemon performing a periodic sync If the Reserved Space option is not enabled slightly more disk space can be used at the expense of buffer cache performance which could be adversely affected and cause fragmentation 103 Working with the fsnameservers File StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Managing File System Operations Debug Log Settings Settings to turn on debug functions for the file system server The log information may be useful if a problem occurs A Quantum Technical Assistance Center representative may ask for certain debug options to be activated to analyze a file system or hardware problem Disable Debugging Disables detailed file system debug tracing When debug tracing is enabled file system performance could be significantly reduced LDAP Configuration e UNIX File Creation Mode on Windows Mode bits for UNIX files e UNIX Directory Creation Mode on Windows Mode bits for UNIX directories
267. lect this option to enable the Stub File feature Stub File Size When the Stub File feature is enabled specify the target size for the stub file in kilobytes Minimum Set Store Size 1 to 999 in MB or GB This value determines the minimum size in megabytes or gigabytes all valid store candidates in the policy class combined must reach before they are stored Maximum File Store Age 1 to 720 in hours This value determines the time after which any valid store candidate in the policy class is stored Soft Limits This value represents the soft limit on the number of media allocated for the policy class Hard Limits This value represents the hard limit on the number of media allocated for the policy class Auto Store Use this option to automatically store files for the current policy class If this option is disabled unchecked Quantum recommends that the files for the policy class be stored by scheduled events Add or Delete Schedule Add or delete a scheduled store event To create or delete a scheduled event follow the procedures described in Scheduling StorNext Events on page 59 Enable Disk To Disk Enables the disk to disk relocation functionality Before you can enable the disk to disk functionality on this screen two affinities the From and To affinities described below must be created Affinity From The primary affinity where a file resides E g Al Affinity To The secondary affinity to which the file
268. lerts RAS Flag 32 20h Interface 1 Check the cabling between the library and the attached tape library part 3 2 Ifthe problem is unresolved contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center Flag 33 21h Eject media 1 Retry the operation The drive has experienced an 2 Ifthe problem persists contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center issue that can be resolved by unloading and reloading media Flag 34 22h Firmware StorNext does not support user firmware updates Contact the Quantum Technical download via SCSI or FC has Assistance Center for upgrade information failed Flag 35 23h Drive Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center Humidity Flag 36 24h Drive Temperature Flag 37 25h Drive Voltage Flag 38 26h Predictive Failure Flag 39 27h Diagnostics Required Flag 40 28h Loader hardware A Flag 41 29h Loader stray tape Flag 42 2Ah Loader Hardware B Flag 43 2Bh Loader door Flag 44 2Ch Loader hardware C Flag 45 2Dh Loader magazine Flag 46 2Eh Loader predictive failure Flag 51 33h Tape The tape directory must be rebuilt Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center directory invalid at unload Flag 52 34h Tape system Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center area Flag 53 35h Tape system area read failure Flag 54 36h No start of data Flag 55 37h Loading failure The problem IS resolved C
269. lient Name The name of the client for the current configuration The client name is queried by StorNext and automatically displayed The DAS Media Types screen figure 123 on page 180 appears 2 Use the drop down lists to map the mail boxes EIF ports to specific media and then click Next The Complete Add Library Task screen figure 119 on page 176 appears 3 Review your selections Click Next to complete the task or Back to make changes StorNext User s Guide 181 Chapter 7 Managing Libraries Adding a Library 4 After a status screen informs you that the library was successfully added click Close Adding a Vault Library seed Maer Vault on the Library Type screen the Library Name ad EA so x creen Library Name Enter a name for the new library The name can be any combination of letters and numbers but it cannot contain spaces fvautti Scalar i2000 Back Ned gt X Cancel 1 Type a name for the library or accept the displayed default name and then click Next The Complete Add Library Task screen figure 119 on page 176 appears 2 Review your selections Click Next to complete the task or Back to make changes 3 After a status screen informs you that the library was successfully added click Close StorNext User s Guide 182 Chapter 7 Managing Libraries Modifying a Library Modifying a Library This task describes how to modify a library by changing its media
270. llowing steps based on Linux version to prevent the cron script from traversing StorNext file systems RedHat Enterprise Linux 4 and 5 Add cvfs to the list of file system types to be skipped This is usually done by modifying the PRUNEFS line in the etc updatedb conf file to read PRUNEFS cvfs sysfs selinuxfs usbdevfs devpts NFS nfs nfs4 afs sfs proc smbfs cifs autofs auto iso9660 udf SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 The optional findutils locate package is used to build the slocate database The default behavior is to disable building the database If enabled to prevent cvfs file systems from being scanned add cvfs to the list of file system types to be skipped This is usually done by modifying the UPDATEDB PRUNEFS line in the etc sysconfig locate file to read UPDATEDB PRUNEFS cvfs All UNIX and Linux The swapon command does not work on StorNext file systems The Linux Unix swapon command is used to specify devices on which paging and swapping take place If swapon is run on a StorNext file system the command fails with an invalid argument error StorNext User s Guide 340 General Operating Guidelines and Limitations Operating System Affected Component Description All UNIX and Linux In a file system configuration file if the Metadata parameter for a stripe group was set to Yes when the file system was created do not later change the parameter to No
271. long time before data appears after you click the Show Details link e Media Type The type of media StorNext User s Guide 281 StorNext User s Guide Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Media Information Report Media Class The media class designated for the tape Policy Class Indicates whether a policy class is associated with the media Last Access Time The date and time when the media was last used Media Status Indicates media status Available Unavailable or In Use Write Protect Indicates whether the media is write protected Formatted Indicates whether the media is formatted Import Date The date the media was added to the library Export This attribute is currently not utilized in StorNext and should remain at status UNMARKED Files The number of files associated with the media Space Used The amount of space written Used The percentage of used space Space Remaining bytes The available space on the media in bytes Mount Count The number of times the tape has been mounted Move Count The number of times the tape has been moved Suspect Count Indicates whether the media has any errors If so errors are marked as suspect Current Action This is currently not utilized in StorNext and should remain at status NONE Location The location of the tape Current Archive The current library in which the media is located Pending Archive Indicates whether the media is associated with another library Th
272. lose the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets StorNext User s Guide 382 Media and Drive RAS Messages Figure 6 Drive Reported Drive Ease 1ST eed Error RAS Tape Drive Drive Reported Drive Error IF THEN The service ticket indicates 1 Check the tape library s control panel to determine if any other errors exist the tape drive reported a o If other errors exist correct them before proceeding Refer to the drive error documentation for this type of tape library o If no other errors exist and the media is mounted dismount the media 2 Ifthe media is not dismounted check the drive to see if it has been ejected 3 Ifthe media has not been ejected o Press the Eject button on the drive to eject the media Try to dismount the media again The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www quantum com support StorNext User s Guide 383 Figure 7 Cleaning of Drive Failed RAS Figure 8 Wrong Firmware Level Invalid Drive Type RAS StorNext User s Guide Media and Drive RAS Messages Tape Drive Cleaning of Drive Failed IF THEN Drive cleaning failed T
273. lues range from the size of the file system block size to a maximum of 8192KB The default setting is 64KB e Available Disks Disks available to the stripe group To populate this list you must first add disks to the file system by doing the following 1 From the SNFS home page choose Disks from the Config menu 2 Select the file system and then click Add StorNext User s Guide 118 StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Stripe Groups 3 Add one or more disks Disks in Stripe Group Disks associated with the stripe group Available Affinities Affinities associated with existing stripe groups that if selected would also apply to this stripe group Affinities in Stripe Group Affinities associated with the stripe group Read only Select this option to make the stripe group read only Status The status of the stripe group either online or offline e Select Up to put the stripe group online e Select Down to take the stripe group offline Data stored in the stripe group is unavailable when the status is Down Metadata Journal and Exclusive Enable one or more of these options check the boxes to create a location for metadata and journaling on the stripe group e To enable placing metadata and journaling but not user data on the new stripe group select the Metadata Journal and Exclusive checkboxes Do not associate an affinity with a metadata journal or an exclusive stripe
274. many 00000 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web htt www quantum c 4 SNFS RAS Messages StorNext User s Guide This section describes RAS messages that might appear as a result of a file system related error condition such as an I O error or a missing LUN 391 SNFS RAS Messages Figure 20 Configuration Not Recommended Actions Supported RAS Configuration Not Supported IF THEN The file system configuration Verify that a valid file system configuration file exists for the specified file system file is corrupt missing or ae syntax error to be Also check the system logs for additional configuration file error details reported The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www_quantum com support Figure 21 Label Validation Recommended Actions Failure RAS Label Validation Failure IF THEN Disk label verification has Use the cvlabel command to check for corrupt incorrect or missing disk labels Also failed inspect system logs for I O errors and check SAN integrity The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets
275. more than one affinity on one stripe group Examine all DSM configuration files usr adic DSM config cfa In any file that has the Data Migration Flag set to YES and for every stripe group with more than one affinity remove the extra affinities The file system has at least one affinity and therefore must contain at least one non exclusive data stripe group Examine all DSM configuration files usr adic DSM config cfg In any file that has the Data Migration Flag set to YES make sure at least one stripe group has the following configuration Metadata No Journal No Exclusive No A file system can contain data stripe groups with affinities or data stripe groups without affinities but it cannot contain both Examine all DSM configuration files usr adic DSM config cfa In any file that has the Data Migration Flag set to YES make sure that either every stripe group has an affinity or that every stripe group does not have an affinity No more than two affinities across all managed file systems are allowed Examine all DSM configuration files usr adic DSM config cfa For all of the configuration files that have the Data Migration Flag set to YES change the stripe group Affinities so there are no more than a total of two Examine all DSM configuration files usr adic DSM config cfa For all of the configuration files that have the Data Migration Flag set to YES make sure the complete list of affinities matches the TSM af
276. mount of time depending on the size of the file system so plan accordingly Use the following procedure to perform a file system check 1 From the SNFS home page choose Check File System from the Admin menu The Check File System screen appears StorNext User s Guide 148 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Checking the File System Figure 95 Check File System unum gee eer Home Help Screen Contig Admin Reports Help Check File System Home This page shows Me status of any fie system checks e Any file system matis stated and mounted will De checked read only SNFS Aio system check may take a very long time SNSM To perform 3 complete migration 1 Check File System 2 Expand Fi 3 igrale MetadatalJoumalyData Stipe Groups 4 Mark Source Sinope Group own rie Systems File Systems fF Check Read Only v Apply Current Status of Check File System File Spam Sema sont em anh ae L Clear T Refresh gt StorNext spock Active 2 Select from the File Systems list the file system you want to check Only file systems eligible for File System Expansion or Stripe Group Movement are shown in the list Next to the file system name the file system s current state is shown in parentheses mounted or unmounted and started or stopped 3 If desired select the Check Read Only option if you want to perform the file system check in read only mode Note If the file system you select is currently started an
277. move or move media from a library to a different library or vault while preserving the existing data e Removing Media e Moving Media Use this procedure to remove blank media backup tapes or cleaning Removing Media 7 media from the StorNext system 1 From the StorNext home page choose Remove Move Media from the Admin menu The Remove or Move Media screen appears Figure 197 Hemoys orMoye 23 Remove Media Microsoft Internet Explorer EN 01x Media Screen Remove or Move Media Remove blank backup or cleaning media from the StorNext system or Move data blank backup or cleaning to another library Select action to perform Remove Media Move Media Backup Tape Select library and media type Select Library Select Media Type Library List Media Type List StorNext Net gt _X Cancel 2 Click Remove Media StorNext User s Guide 217 Chapter 9 Managing Media Removing and Moving Media 3 Select from the Select Library list the library from which to remove the media If the library has more than one media type specify the type of media you want to remove from the selected library Click Next to continue The Select Media screen appears Figure 158 Select Media Screen leid Select Media Select media by clicking Browse or enter individual media in the Enter Media text box Enter Media O Backup Tape Media List Select All Deselect All
278. mple Identifier 359061D6AF Number Clients 18 Expiration Date None Serial Number SNO9999 License CAAAS AAAAE AJC4J T6FSA F7RA9 7XPXA ZGC2C 9GAGN JVJ7N AMLE8X JA License Authorization String server 1 359061D6AF 18 CAAASAAAAFAJC4JT6FSAMFRAS7XPXAZGC2C9GAGNIJVJ7NAML8XJA serverl Quantum System serverl Identifier 359061D6AF Number Clients 32 Expiration Date None Serial Number SNO9999 License AABAA FJADA ASF2F BZ4ZS CNUDS JMMSW PWZGS 4JEFU FAPKH BTPMN AR License Authorization String proxy 1 359061D6AF 32 AABAAFJADAASF2FBZ4ZSCNUDSJMMSWPWZG54J amp FUFAPKHETPMNAA serverl Quantum Note When using this method to obtain your permanent license you should copy and paste all of the text into the license dat file including the portions that are commented out i e preceded by the pound sign In particular be sure to include the serial number If you have Distributed LAN clients you must also copy and paste the text for those clients These license authorization strings begin with proxy as shown in the preceding example p Controlling User Access This section describes the following User Access Control options e Changing the Admin Password e Adding a New User e Modifying an Existing User Deleting an Existing User StorNext User s Guide 48 Changing the Admin Password Figure 27 User Access Control Screen StorNext Use
279. n Stop the FSM Restart the FSM Note The old stripe groups marked Down Readonly must be left in the file system configuration file Metadata movement is performed on a LUN level meaning you must specify the source LUN and the destination LUN The new sndiskmove command that accomplishes metadata movement has two arguments a source and destination LUN After movement is complete the physical source disk can be removed Note Although a stripe group can consist of multiple disks or LUNs the sndiskmove command moves only a single disk or LUN Consequently references to stripe group in this section refer to a single disk or LUN when migrating metadata with sndiskmove 374 StorNext User s Guide Using the Dynamic Resource Allocation Feature Caution The metadata journal stripe group you want to move cannot contain data Sndiskmove treats metadata and journal stripe groups the same way so it doesn t matter whether the stripe group you want to move is a metadata stripe group a journal stripe group or a combined metadata and journal stripe group The only caveat is that stripe groups used for movement cannot contain data If you attempt to move a metadata journal stripe group that contains data data loss could occur Use the following procedure to move a metadata journal stripe group from a source LUN to a destination LUN 1 Stop the File System Manager
280. n was completed successfully click OK Understanding Dynamic Resource Allocation About File System Expansion StorNext User s Guide StorNext provides two Dynamic Resource Allocation tools that allow you to make changes to your file system File System Expansion and Stripe Group Movement StorNext s File System Expansion feature enables you to dynamically add LUNs to a selected file system without interrupting that file system s operation The only disruption that occurs during File System Expansion is a short pause of new metadata requests as StorNext updates its internal system and clients to be aware of the new overall capacity and physical disk resources that are used File System Expansion is often done in conjunction with the Stripe Group Movement feature That is you might want to add new stripe groups knowing you ll want to use those stripe groups for Stripe Group Movement StorNext provides a File Expansion Wizard to simplify the process Quantum recommends using this wizard for File System Expansion but you can also use the command line interface For information about using the CLI see Using the Dynamic Resource Allocation Feature 146 About Stripe Group Movement StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Understanding Dynamic Resource Allocation Note After expansion you must perform a metadata dump The File Expansion Wizard includes an option that will do this for yo
281. ndow iix Current Directory n Create Directory Select Directory Directory List a CVFS LICENSE Mail SUN Patches TT DB 4 Select from the Select Directory list an existing directory in which you want to create the file system ere x Window Script Prompt Create a new directory under sandsm Enter directory name Cancel dsm10 5 To create a new directory underneath the selected directory click Create Directory and enter the new directory name Click OK to continue The new directory is shown in the Directory Browser s Current Directory Field 6 Click OK to accept the new directory The new directory is shown on the Add New File System screen 7 If desired select the Enable Data Migration option Select this option if you want this file system to be managed with automatic data movement between the primary disk storage and secondary storage either disk or tape If you do not enable this option this file system remains unmanaged and does not move data to the tape library StorNext User s Guide 85 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With File Systems Caution Do not select the Enable Data Migration option if the file system will be used as a storage disk 8 If desired select the Enable Distributed Lan Server on this machine option if you want the machine on which the file system is located to act as a Distributed Lan server This option appears only for Li
282. nfiguration file as needed and then restart the file system Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www quantum com support 400 Figure 38 Affinity Configuration Violations RAS StorNext User s Guide SNFS RAS Messages Affinity Configuration Violations When a configuration violation occurs in the StorNext application it must be repaired by stopping the system editing the configuration and then restarting the system Below are specific configuration violations and recommended actions to repair each specific issue IF There is more than one affinity on one stripe group The file system does not contain at least one non exclusive data stripe group A file system contains both data stripe groups with affinities and data stripe groups without affinities There are more than two affinities across all managed file systems The number of affinities on managed file systems do not match for TSM and CVFS TSM does not recognize the CVFS managed file system affinity name An affinity in a policy class is not found in the TIERDEF table The problem IS resolved The problem has NOT been resolved THEN You cannot have
283. nfigure your StorNext product e You can return to a step by clicking on its name e You can always return to the CW from the Config menu on the Home Page e The reset button will start the CW from the beginning Step 1 Enter License Step 2 Add File System Step 3 Add Library s Step 4 Add Tape Drive Wizard Step 5 Add Media Step 6 Add Storage Disks Step 7 Add Storage Policy Step 8 E Mail Notification Configuration Il Don t Show CW Again You can display the Configuration Wizard at any time by selecting Configuration Wizard from the StorNext home page s Config menu If you have completed all of the tasks each task will be marked as Complete If you have not completed all tasks the ones you finished will be marked Complete and the wizard will be ready for you to begin the next uncompleted task You can perform any of the Configuration Wizard s tasks separately rather than through the wizard Each of these tasks is selectable from the StorNext home page s Config menu The initial Configuration Wizard screen has a Reset button that allows you to start at the beginning of the wizard StorNext User s Guide 27 Figure 12 Config Menu Options StorNext User s Guide Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview The Configuration Wizard EE Te Quantum dd a StorNext Home Help Home SG Rotrosh Refresh Rate No Refresh w SNFS Add Lem med Space Tree space n store SNSM s True Proxy Candidat
284. nformation about Admin Alerts see StorNext Admin Alerts on page 17 Backups Select this option to receive e mail after a backup has occurred on your system 70 Figure 42 Complete E mail Configuration Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Setting Up E mail Notification e Service Tickets Select this option to receive e mail when a service ticket for your system is generated Notifications for service tickets will be sent for events at the specified alert level and higher You must specify an alert level e Policy Class Select this option to receive e mail about policy class You must specify a policy class e Notify Quantum on Service Ticket Select this option to automatically send the Quantum Technical Assistance Center a message when a service ticket is generated The Quantum Technical Assistance Center is not notified about admin alerts if you selected that option 6 Click Add to add to the list of e mail recipients the e mail recipient whose information you just entered Or select a previously added e mail recipient from the list and click Delete to remove that recipient If necessary add additional e mail recipients by repeating steps 4 and 5 Click Next to continue The Complete E mail Configuration screen appears Z E mail Notification Microsoft Internet Explorer f loj x Complete E Mail Configuration Quantum eee You have completed the necessary steps
285. ng schedules and create a single schedule that uses default values click Yes to proceed or No to abort 6 Do one of the following e Click Cancel to exit the screen The Schedule Events window closes e Click Back to return to the previous screen EE EE SES EE Say Setting Up E mail Notification The E mail Notification feature allows you to specify parties who should be contacted when system alerts or admin alerts occur You can specify e mail recipients alert levels and information about your e mail configuration Email notification is also an important part of the StorNext backup process When you select the Backup option on the Configure Email Address screen see figure 41 on page 70 key information about a completed backup is emailed to the address you specify This email contains the following important information e The required media for restoring from a complete set e Names of configured storage disks or deduplication storage disks e Any SNFS configuration files for file systems that are not data migration enabled are appended to the email Note Before configuring e mail notification make sure your SMTP server is configured StorNext User s Guide 67 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Setting Up E mail Notification 1 From the StorNext home page choose E mail Notification from the Admin menu The Configure E mail Notification Introduction screen appears Figure 39 Configure E mail E mail Noti
286. ng information Library Type The library type such as SCSI Network or Vault Current State Indicates whether the library is online or offline e Library Mode Displays two modes e Attended The LOI will be associated with required actions e Unattended Fails any actions that require user interaction e Media Type The media type the library uses e Slot Count The number of media slots available for the library type e Current Fill Count The current number of media slots associated with the library StorNext User s Guide 278 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Library Information Report e Import Media Class The media type to import Use the following procedure to run the Library Information Report 1 Choose Libraries from the Reports menu The Libraries Report screen appears Figure 206 Libraries Report Screen Report Libraries Microsoft Internet Explorer Quantum StorNext User s Guide 279 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Library Space Used Report 2 Select from the Library List one or more libraries on which to run the report and then click Apply The Library Information Report appears with information about the selected libraries Figure 207 Library Information Report Quantum Library Information Report Library i2k_wall Media Type Slot Count Current Fill Count Import Media Class LTO 18 16 FO_LTO_ADDBLANK Media Type Slot Count Current Fill Count Import Media Class
287. nnot convert a non enabled storage disk to a dedup SDISK However you can delete a non enabled storage disk or dedup SDISK and then recreate the storage disk with deduplication either enabled or disabled Use the following procedure to add storage disks 1 From the SNSM home page choose Storage Disk gt Config from the Admin menu The Configure Storage Disk screen appears rr r di 178 Configure Storage Quanum ff gs ED RT IS creen fle vaas FEE Configure Storage Disk Home Click Add to add a new Storage Disk or Select a Storage Disk to modify or delete SNFS SNSM Select Storage Disk Current Storage Disks LanAdd Storage_Disk_1 Modify StorNext spock Active HELLE ee eS a StorNext User s Guide 241 Chapter 10 Managing Storage Disks Adding a Storage Disk 2 Click Add The Add Storage Disk Introduction screen appears listing any currently configured storage disks Figure 179 Add Storage Disk gt A Add Storage Disk Microsoft Internet Explorer Introduction Screen Storage Disk 1 space SDISK StorNext User s Guide 242 Figure 180 Add Storage Disk Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing Storage Disks Adding a Storage Disk 3 Click Next The Add Storage Disk screen appears yy Add Storage Disk Microsoft Internet Explorer Add Storage Disk Please select a name for the Storage Disk and the mount point for the file system used as disk media Select
288. nt to continue EE StorNext User s Guide 99 Making Global Changes StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Managing File System Operations 2 Click OK to close the warning window and proceed or click Cancel to abort the unlabeling process If you click OK a status window appears 3 Click Close when the status displays Success The Label Disk Device screen now shows the device with no label name Note If you decide later to make an unlabeled device usable by the StorNext File System you must first relabel the device The relabeling process is identical to labeling initially as described in Labeling a Device on page 98 Probing a Device Use the following procedure to probe a disk device 1 After selecting from the Disk Devices box the device you want to probe click Probe The Probe Disk Device Status window appears 2 Click Close when the status displays Success Note The probe should activate the light on the disk or RAID The global section of the file system configuration file contains general parameters that control system performance components related to the file system s resource consumption and whether features are enabled or disabled For most of these parameters restarting the File System Manager FSM causes the modified parameters to take effect However the File System Block Size and Windows Security parameters require that the file system be remade befo
289. nternet Explorer Quantum Modify Storage Disk Name Storage_Disk_1 Mount point ispace 7 Directory space SDISK of Streams 2 cm isl Deduplication Reset X Cancel Local intranet Note For a blank storage disks i e a storage disk that has not been written to and one where no file system files reside you can modify any of the parameters on the Modify Storage Disk screen If the storage disk has been written to you can change only the number of streams 3 Modify any of the following information 245 Chapter 10 Managing Storage Disks Deleting a Storage Disk e Mount Point The file system mount point for the storage disk You can change the mount point only on a blank or unused file system To change the mount point select an existing mount point from the drop down list and then click Browse The directory changes in the Mount Point field You can modify this parameter only for an unused storage disk Directory The directory selected for file storage when the storage disk was initially created You cannot modify this setting e of Streams The number of streams 1 8 I O streams that can concurrently write to the disk e Copy The copy number 1 4 specified when the storage disk was created This copy number will be used by all policy classes You can modify this parameter only for an unused storage disk Note The Deduplication field indicates w
290. ntranet 108 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Disks 2 Do one of the following e Select a file system from the Unmounted File Systems list and click Mount The Mount File System Status screen appears e Select a file system from the Mounted File Systems list and click Unmount The Unmount File System Status screen appears 3 After the status screen informs you that the task has successfully completed click Close Working With Disks A disk e can be used as an individual element or as one of many disks in a Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks RAID can contain metadata information journaling and or data e can constitute a single stripe group itself or can be one node of a multi disk stripe group e canbe a local hard disk located inside a server if only a metadata disk or most commonly used in a RAID visible to all machines in the Storage Area Network SAN over FC The procedures in this section describe how to manage disks by adding deleting and defragmenting disks Each disk is assigned to a disk type that specifies the number of sectors on the disk e Adding Disks e Deleting Disks e Defragmenting a Disk Adding Disks SS Use this procedure to add a disk to a selected file system Note A disk must have a label before you can add it For information about labeling a disk see Labeling a Device on page 98 StorNext User s Guide 109 Chapter 6 Managing the File S
291. nux machines Note When you enable the Distributed LAN Server all configured IPV4 addresses will be used on the machine for the Distributed LAN Server Ethernet traffic 9 Click Next to proceed from the Add New File System screen The Disk Settings screen appears Figure 52 Disk Settings Screen Quantum e Add New File System Microsoft Internet Explorer Disk Settings Enter the block size in bytes to be used in the new file system The block size is the minimum unit of data that will be accessed from the physical devices The default value of 16384 is recommended for best overall efficiency Values greater than 65536 are only recommended for special circumstances as filesystem performance and efficiency can be severely impacted 16384 7 Enter the number of stripe groups for the file system You must have enough physical disks available for your selection Selecting values greater than one permit customizations to optimize performance and utilize special SNFS features like dedicated Meta data Journal and Data stripe groups StorNext User s Guide lt Back Next gt X Cancel x 86 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With File Systems 10 On the Disk Settings screen type valid values and click Next e Block size field The block size in bytes for the file system The block size is the minimum unit of data accessed from physical devices The default value of 16384 byte
292. o use the Auto Refresh Rate field to specify one of these automatic refresh intervals No Refresh 5 seconds 10 seconds 30 seconds 1 minute 5 minutes 4 Click Close when you are finished viewing the report StorNext User s Guide 310 Chapter 13 2 m Service Management C This chapter describes how to use the StorNext Service Management tools to run a health check on your system create a log that captures the current state of your system or check current system status This chapter contains these topics e Using Health Check e Using State Capture e Using the System Status Tool Using Health Check You can run these health checks on your StorNext system e Archive Verify that all configured archives are online e Config Verify that affinities are configured correctly in SNSM for managed file systems and that SNSM managed file systems are identified and configured correctly Dedup SDISK Verifies blockpool data integrity for all blocketized storage disks i e deduplication enabled storage disks e Disk Space Verify that enough disk space exists for the SNSM database tables logging and other functions StorNext User s Guide 311 Running a Health Check Figure 233 Health Check Tests Screen Viewing the Health Check History StorNext User s Guide Chapter 13 Service Management Using Health Check Drive Verify that all configured drives are online e Media Verify th
293. ociated media and will be stored The maximum number of file copies is four e Media Associated The number of media associated with the class e Drive Pool The name assigned to the pool of associated tape drives e Minimum Store Time minutes The number of minutes after the last modification when the file becomes available for storage to tape e Minimum Trunc Time days The number of days after the last modification when the files on tape become available for truncation e Max Backup Sets The maximum number of backup sets to keep fora file StorNext User s Guide 286 StorNext User s Guide Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Policy Class Information Report Truncate Immediately After Store Indicates whether files truncate immediately after a store Checksum Validation If enabled checksums are compared to retained values for the files retrieved by the corresponding policy class Checksum Generation If enabled checksums are generated and retained in the database for files stored by the corresponding policy class Minimum Set Store Size 1 to 999 in MB or GB The minimum size that all valid store candidates in the policy class combined must reach before they are stored Maximum File Store Age 1 to 720 in hours If any valid store candidate in the policy class reaches this value all valid candidates are stored Disk to Disk Indicates whether the disk to disk functionality is enabled or disabled for the selected policy
294. odified click Close Use this procedure to delete a stripe group Caution Deleting a stripe group causes a complete loss of data and requires re making the file system Refer to Making or Unmaking a File System on page 105 From the SNFS home page choose Stripe Groups from the Config menu The Configure Stripe Group screen figure 69 on page 114 appears Select from the File Systems drop down menu the file system that contains the stripe group you want to delete Select from the Stripe Groups list the stripe group you want to delete Click Delete A confirmation screen prompts you to confirm that you want to delete the stripe group 5 Click OK The Delete Stripe Group Status screen appears 6 After the status screen indicates that the stripe group has been deleted click Close 120 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Affinities Working With Affinities An affinity is a label assigned to one or more stripe groups An affinity enables you to direct data to its associated stripe groups A file system can have one or more affinities associated with it These associations defined in stripe groups are made with the affinity key to a directory or file For example if you create a directory association with Affinity aff1 all data written to that directory is written to StripeGroup StripeGroup2 and therefore only to disk2 If you make an association with Affinity aff2 and a separate d
295. oes not appear when you access the Enter License wizard from the StorNext home page Config menu 4 Ifyou want to proceed using a temporary license for SAN clients or distributed LAN clients select the option Generate 30 day temporary license To enter a permanent license proceed to step 8 page 46 StorNext User s Guide 44 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Entering the StorNext License 5 After selecting Generate 30 day temporary license click Next to continue The Complete Enter License screen appears Figure 23 Complete Enter Fa Enter License Microsoft Internet Explorer TET License Screen Temporary Complete Enter License You have completed the necessary steps to enter the license Please review your selections and click Next to apply them or click Back to make changes License String Temporary License License SOGOSGYSHS lt Back Next gt X Cancel E 6 On the Complete Enter License screen click Next to complete the task or Back to make changes When you click Next a message reminds you to contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center within 30 days to receive your permanent license string Figure 24 License Reminder ee x p A temporary license will be created Please remember to z call Quantum Technical Assistance Center and receive your permanent license string within 30 days This completes step 1 and allows you to proceed to step 2 EER StorNext User s Guide 45 StorNex
296. of tre Me stern The metadata Adapa a for the and 3 houi oF ony bo rune SNFS ihe meta gan te hae been weston corrupted SNSM File Systems Fio Systoms snis2 ants active c StorNext kazar Active eudar 1 aft SJ cca neat 2 Select the file system on which to perform the metadata dump and then click Apply 3 After the Status Screen informs you that the metadata dump was performed successfully click Close Using the SNSM File System Functions The StorNext Storage Manager s File menu contains file system functions that enable you to accomplish the following tasks e Storing Files e Changing a File Version e Recovering a File e Recovering a Directory e Retrieving a File StorNext User s Guide 134 Storing Files Figure 84 Store Files Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Using the SNSM File System Functions e Retrieving a Directory e Freeing Disk Blocks e Moving Files to New Media e Modifying a File s Attributes These functions are not available if you have only StorNext File System and not StorNext Storage Manager Use this function to expedite storing files to media rather than waiting for data to be migrated automatically 1 From the SNSM home page choose Store from the File menu The Store Files screen appears MEE N Quantum TT StorNext Home Help fee Moca Aamin Reports Heip I Store Files Home Select files to expedit
297. oking the cvadmin command To stop SNFS using the CLI type the following 357 Unmounting or Mounting a File System usr cvfs bin cvadmin snadmin gt select snadmin gt stop lt file_system_name gt Unmounting or Mounting a File System To unmount a file system using the CLI follow these steps 1 Change the login user to root Type cd Unmount the system Type umount lt mount_point gt where the lt mount_point gt is where you are mounting the SNFS For example umount stornext snfs1 To mount a file system using the CLI follow these steps 1 StorNext User s Guide Change the login user to root Type cd Mount the system type mount t cvfs lt file_system_name gt lt mount_point gt where the lt mount_point gt is where you are mounting the SNFS For example mount t cvfs snfs1 stornext snfs1 358 Creating a File System Server Creating a File System Server StorNext User s Guide The follow procedure describes how to create a file system server using the CLI Before initially executing any SNFS command line programs you are required to source either the profile or the cshrc file This updates the user environment with the SNFS environment variables e Ifyou are running sh ksh or bash type usr adic profile e For all other shells type source usr adic cshrc Caution Do not attempt to perform the procedures in this section unless you have completed
298. om support 389 Media and Drive RAS Messages Figure 17 Media Not Found RAS Recommended Actions Media Not Found IF THEN The system indicates thata Check the library console for the indicated media particular piece of media is not found unavailable e Ifthe media is found in the library issue vsaudit lt library gt e Ifthe media is NOT found in the library locate the indicated media and insert it into the library s mailbox Import media using the GUI From the StorNext home page choose Remove Move Media from the Admin menu If the problem persists 1 Use the Capturing a System State feature to create a system snapshot 2 Restart StorNext 3 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken resolved Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www_ quantum com support Figure 18 Duplicate Physical Recommended Actions Media Found RAS Duplicate Physical Media Found IF THEN If the service ticket indicates that Remove the duplicate media using the library s operator panel Refer to your library s reference manual for operator duplicate physical media has been panel instr
299. om the View by list a library or media class Figure 210 Media Browser Box screen A Quantum Media Browser Current Selection Media Filter E ti wt Filter View by Select Media Libraries 0 Media Listed vaulti Select All scsi archivel Media Classes Deselect All FO AIT ADDBLANK FO AIT IMPORT FO_AIT_CHECKIN xl OK X Cancel vo Apply The selected library or media class appears in the Current Selection field and the media associated with the selected library are shown in the Select Media list 4 Inthe Select Media list select one or more media and then click OK The Media Report screen shows the selected media in the Entered Media IDs list Note If you want to limit the media list to a specific selection type the attributes of the media name in the Media Filter field to only browse these items For example typing 8 lists all media ending with an 8 StorNext User s Guide 284 Figure 211 Media Information Report StorNext User s Guide Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Media Information Report 5 Click Apply to continue The Media Information Report appears yj Media Information Report Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Quantum Media ID MED001 Show Details Media Information Report Media Class Policy Class Last Access Time Write Protect FO LTO REMOVE None 17 Jan 2007 14 07 1
300. ommand or through the man page The metadata for a file system might be corrupt Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center A conhguration Sle 1 messing from the file system software directory Contact the Quantum Techmcal Assistance Center A configuration file is missing from the file system software directory Correct or provide a configuration file for this file system A new hle system metadata dump must be generated for the file system Use the GUI to create the metadata dump file From the SNFS Home Page choose Metadata Dump from the Admin menu Run either the snbackap sorthe snbkreport command or through the GUI run a Backup Report to see which copy af the backups faded Check all media and achres associated with that copy to determine the faskure To run a Backup Report fom the GUI 1 Access the SNFS home page 2 Choose Backups from the Reports menu Close the senice ticket Refer to Closing Senice Tickets 1 Madly the beket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Senice Tickets 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web bitp Jh ntum com support 414 Figure 54 Configuration Violations RAS StorNext User s Guide Other RAS Messages SS EE EE EE EE EE EE Configuration Violations When a configurabon wolation occurs an the Storext apphcation it must be
301. on page 108 If the file system is started stop the file system as described in Starting and Stopping the File System on page 107 From the SNFS home page choose Affinities from the Config menu The Add Modify or Delete Affinities screen figure 78 on page 128 appears Select from the File Systems drop down menu the file system that contains the affinity you want to delete 5 Select from the Affinity list the affinity you want to delete 6 Click Delete A message asks you to confirm that you want to delete the affinity Click Yes to confirm the deletion The Delete Affinity Status screen appears After the status screen indicates that the affinity has been deleted click Close Start the file system as described in Making a File System on page 106 132 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Performing a Metadata Dump 10 Mount the file system as described in Mounting or Unmounting a File System on page 108 File System When using affinities the StorNext administrator must adhere to the file Configuration system configuration restrictions listed below to ensure that data Restrictions management policies execute properly These restrictions apply only to managed file systems not to non managed SNFS only installations e Taking into account all managed file systems you cannot use more than two unique affinity names However these two affinity names can be re used across file systems e All data stripe gro
302. ons of the Admin menu options are located in Chapter 6 Managing the File System The Reports Menu The following Reports menu options let you view file system reports e Affinities View the Affinities report e File Systems View the File Systems report Stripe Groups View the Stripe Groups report 34 Shortcut Menu Options StorNext User s Guide Chapter 3 SNFS Only GUI Overview The SNFS Home Page Note Detailed descriptions of the Report menu options are located in Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Help Menu The Help menu provides you with access to StorNext reference material such as this user s guide the installation guide and other useful documents The SNFS Shortcut Menu on the left side of the SNFS home page contains options that let you perform the following Configuration and Administrative tasks Config Configuration Wizard Launch the Configuration Wizard For more information about the Configuration Wizard see The SNFS Configuration Wizard on page 38 Add Affinity Add an affinity and directory to a file system For more information about adding an affinity see Adding an Affinity on page 121 Add File System Add a file system For more information about adding a file system see Adding a File System on page 83 Enter License Enter your StorNext license information For more information about entering a license see Entering the StorNext License on page 40 Us
303. ons on the affected host before rescanning for the new device Modifying a Stripe Group p Use this procedure to modify a stripe group configuration 1 From the SNFS home page choose Stripe Groups from the Config menu The Configure Stripe Groups screen appears 2 Select from the File Systems drop down menu the file system whose stripe group you want to modify 3 Select from the Stripe Groups list the stripe group you want to modify 4 Click Modify The Modify Stripe Group screen appears StorNext User s Guide 117 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Stripe Groups Figure 71 Modify Stripe Group Pers Screen Quantum Modify Stripe Group Stripe Group Name StnpeGroup4 Stripe Breadth Kilobytes 256 _v Available Disks Disks In Stripe Group spock06 lt 190Gb gt Available Afinities Affinities In Stripe Group aff2 Read only I MetaData 7 Status Up Journal P VEELS Exclusive J Realtime lO sec Non realtime 1O sec Realtime MB sec Non realtime l MB sec X Cancel 5 Type valid values for the stripe group Stripe Group Name The selected stripe group Stripe Breadth The breadth size is the number of file system blocks the system reads writes before moving to the next disk in the stripe group This value should be optimized for the major application that uses the disks The selectable breadth va
304. ont panel of the Library To take a network library SNFS offing use the library s controller software SNSM Library Current State scsi_archivet Online New State GE Onine OMne LY Apply Reset StorNext kazar Waring E very Acre WEJ Local meranet 2 Select the library whose logical state you want to change The library s current state is shown 187 StorNext User s Guide Chapter 7 Managing Libraries Changing the Library State 3 Select the new state for the library you selected 4 Click Apply to change the library s state 5 When the Status screen informs you that the library state was successfully changed click OK If desired repeat steps 2 5 to change the state for additional libraries 188 m Chapter 8 f Managing Drives and Disks E Tape drives provide I O for a StorNext media library For a detailed list of supported media for the current StorNext release refer to the StorNext Release Notes Managing tape drives and disks consists of the following tasks e Working with Tape Drives e Working with Drive Pools e Managing Disk Space e Changing Watermark Parameters Working with Tape Drives Working with tape drives involves the following tasks e Adding a Tape Drive e Modifying a Tape Drive e Deleting a Tape Drive e Changing a Drive State e Cleaning a Tape Drive StorNext User s Guide 189 Chapter 8 Managing Drives and Disks Working with Tape Drives
305. ool e Modifying a Drive Pool e Deleting a Drive Pool Adding a Drive Pool Use this procedure to add a drive pool Note This procedure requires restarting the Storage Manager component 1 From the SNSM home page choose Config Drive Pool from the Admin menu The Configure Drive Pools screen appears StorNext User s Guide 200 Chapter 8 Managing Drives and Disks Working with Drive Pools Figure 141 Configure Drive Pools Screen Configure Drive Pools Home Click Ada to Configure a new drive pool or Select an existing drive to modity or delete i AE ey ep ep EE EE SNSM to the drives in one drive pool and designate the diives in a diflarant drivo pool for wilte operations and To designate the use of the dries in a Arive pool configura a policy class for that drive Pool Aner the anve encima aes are A S aS s iiis Select Drive Pool m a List pel L Megty Delete _ StorNext i kazar Wang 2 Click Add to add a new drive pool The Add New Drive Pool screen appears Figure 142 Add New Drive 3 http kazar 85 tm bin admin drive pool config cgi action add Micros Spix Pool Screen Drive ID List scsi archivel dri scsi archivel dr2 scsi archivel dr3 3 Enter a name for the new drive pool in the Drive Pool Name field StorNext User s Guide 201 Chapter 8 Managing Drives and Disks Working with Drive Pools 4 Select from the Select Drive IDs list the drives you want to include in the new dr
306. or do not have a recognized Volume Type For these drives write down their associated device names 3 Create usr cvis config cvlabels by typing the following ust cvfs bin cvlabel c gt usr cvfs config cvlabels StorNext User s Guide 353 Modifying Global Settings The created file displays an entry for disks located by the usr cvts bin cvlabel command CvfsDisk_UNKNOWN dev sdb host 4 lun 1 sectors 639570752 CvfsDisk_UNKNOWN dev sdc host 4 lun 2 sectors 639570752 CvfsDisk_ UNKNOWN dev sdd host 4 lun 3 sectors 639570752 Caution Identify any drives that already contain a recognized Volume Type Do not write a label to these drives or you may lose data In the ust cvfs config cvlabels file delete any lines that refer to disks that will not be labeled or have already been labeled Edit usr cvts contig cvlabels file to provide a unique name for each drive to be used by SNFS In this example the UNKNOWN variable in the drive name associated with disk device dev sdb has been renamed to a numeral in sequence 0 1 and 2 The disk devices have also been alphabetically ordered CvfsDisk0O dev sdb host 4 lun 1 sectors 639570752 CvfsDisk1 dev sdc host 4 lun 2 sectors 639570752 CvfsDisk2 dev sdd host 4 lun 3 sectors 639570752 6 Save the usr cvfs config cvlabels file 7 Use the cvlabel command to label the disks Type ust cvts bin cvlabel usr cvfs config
307. or re making a file system results in a complete loss of user data After remaking a managed file system you must delete or recreate the relation points 105 Figure 64 Make File System Screen StorNext User s Guide Creating a new file system Chapter 6 Managing the File System Managing File System Operations Conditions to Make or Re Make a File System The following are reasons to make or re make a file system Removing a stripe group from the file system Removing a disk from a stripe group Changing a stripe group s stripe breadth Changing the sector count of a disk Making a File System Use this procedure to make a file system 1 From the SNFS home page choose Make File Systems from the Admin menu The Make File System screen appears Home SNFS SNSM uantum My Contig Admin Make File System d Ad 33 4 Add sinpe orc 5 Moke the fie system 8 Start he Me saten 7 Mount me Se patem StorNext 2 Make Fie System StorNext t Click Apply to initialize a new file system asbng Gata tor ne selected Me A Proceed win caution de system s Tue system will De greyed s anew ano Home Help kazar Active WJ local intranet 2 Inthe File Systems list select a new or existing file system and click Apply A confirmation screen warns you that all relation points on the system will be removed during this process and prompts if you still wan
308. orNext Tasks Entering the StorNext License Note Ifyou use the temporary license be sure to obtain a permanent license from Quantum before the 30 day temporary license expires To obtain a permanent license you must contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center at licenses Ouantum com and give them the following information e The serial number from your product CD or box e The number of StorNext SAN clients and distributed LAN clients you want to support e The StorNext server identification number You can find this number on the Configuration Wizard s Enter License String screen Alternatively you can obtain a license by going to www Quantum com swlicense and providing the required information After the Quantum Technical Assistance Center receives the above information a representative will send you a license string Enter this license screen on the Enter License String screen to use StorNext with your permanent license If you use the temporary license allow sufficient time for the Quantum Technical Assistance Center to receive your information and send your license string before the 30 day limit expires There are two ways to access the Enter License wizard Through the StorNext Configuration wizard By selecting Enter License from the Config menu on the StorNext home page The only functional difference is that selecting the Enter License wizard from the StorNext Configuration Wizard enables you
309. ou add additional storage by creating a new stripe group in the file system configuration file and assigning new disks to the stripe group Here is an overview of the steps required to enable File System Expansion 1 Define new disk LUNs and make them available across the fibre channel SAN to the metadata controller and StorNext clients 2 Use the StorNext GUI to create a new stripe group from the LUNs StorNext User s Guide 150 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Performing File System Expansion 3 Add the new stripe group to an existing file system After you perform these steps StorNext automatically updates the available file system capacity and presents the expanded file system to the StorNext clients Note During File System Expansion the file system is shut down After expansion you must perform a new metadata dump runs after the file system is updated For managed file systems the File System Expansion wizard includes an option for you to run the metadump automatically or you can do it separately from the wizard As a final part of the File System Expansion process StorNext restarts the file system This restart typically takes less than two minutes and is often completed in seconds but during the restart all new read write requests are paused while operations in progress continue normally Caution When you add a new disk or stripe group to your SAN often an OS dependent operation must be run to
310. ounting a File System on page 108 2 Select from the File Systems list the file system to modify and then click Modify The Modify File System window appears Figure 57 Modify File System Window Quantum Modify File System Name Mount Point Enable Distributed Lan Server on this machine I OK X Cancel 3 Make the desired changes to the file system e Name The name of the file system display only cannot be changed e Mount Point the file system s mount point location display only cannot be changed StorNext User s Guide 94 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With File Systems e Enable Distributed Lan Server on this machine Select this option to let the machine on which the file system is located to act as a Distributed LAN server This option appears only for Linux machines If you no longer wish the machine to be a Distributed LAN server deselect this option Note When you use this option to configure a machine as a Distributed LAN server all available IPV4 addresses are used Deleting a File System __ Use this procedure to delete a file system Note If you want to delete an unmanaged file system that contains storage disks or deduplication enabled storage disks you will not be allowed to delete the file system until you first delete all of those sdisks or dedup sdisks 1 From the SNFS home page choose File System from the Config menu The Configu
311. oup is defragmented as part of the data moving process Because defragmenting a sparse file would make it unsparce and increase disk usage snfsdefrag skips sparse files when defragmenting Therefore all existing sparse files remain on the original stripe group after moving of other files is complete As an example the gnu cp command uses a heuristic to attempt maintaining the sparseness of a file Because the file system in question has already had the source stripe group marked read only the cp command has no choice but to move the file off of the original stripe group Clients outside a NAT firewall can no longer access a metadata controller inside the firewall Support for client access through non NAT firewalls continues to be supported via the fsports configuration file If you have configured custom mount options in the etc fstab file other than rw and diskproxy if you subsequently add or remove the disk proxy settings using the StorNext GUI any custom mount options will be lost Settings are added or removed in the StorNext GUI by navigating to the SNFS home page and then choosing Filesystems gt Modify from the Config menu In StorNext 3 0 the buffercachemin and buffercachemax parameters are deprecated and are replaced by buffercachecap Also in the Client Configuration Windows utility the Buffer Cache Min and Buffer Cache Max settings are replaced by Buffer Cache Cap The Non Paged Pool Pe
312. our system includes a standby FSM After you run sndiskmove rescan the disks on the standby FSM s host by running cvadmin e disks refresh You must run cvadmin e disks refresh on all systems on which you have a configured FSM for the file system involved in the move 6 Restart the FSM 7 Only if your system includes a standby FSM Restart the standby FSM Specifying an Alternate Retrieval Location StorNext User s Guide The Alternate Retrieval Location feature applies to situations where file retrieval fails because the normal file copies cannot be retrieved from the machine on which StorNext Storage Manger resides This feature enables you retrieve a copy of the truncated file from a different machine Quantum strongly recommends using the StorNext GUI to enable this feature If you choose to use the command line interface instead you can use the CP1altnode command to add modify or delete alternate retrieval location information See the fsaltnode man page for more information Also anew x argument has been added for fsretrieve which enables you to make changes when this feature is enabled For more information see the man page for fsretrieve 376 Appendix D m RAS Messages RAS messages appear when StorNext encounters an error condition The RAS window shows symptoms of the condition plus workarounds you can try to resolve the condition before calling the Quantum Technical Assistance Center Thi
313. p Media Screen ms EE EE aw i Home SNFS SNSM Browse Select All L Oesskea An ree Y Apply Reset StorNext E aminan gandalf L Active 2 Do one of the following e Enter in the Enter Individual Filename field the file you want to move You must enter the file s complete pathname e Click Browse to display the StorNext File Browser window On this window locate and select the files you want to move and then click OK On the Move Files to New Media screen verify that the files shown are the ones you want to move 3 Specify the Media ID and Media Type for the destination media If desired select the Move to Blank Media option When you select this option StorNext searches for blank media on which to move the selected files 4 Click Apply to move the selected files to new media 5 After the Status screen informs you that the operation was completed successfully click OK StorNext User s Guide 144 Modifying a File s Attributes Figure 94 Modify File Attributes Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Using the SNSM File System Functions With this function you can change a file s attributes including the associated policy class attributes and number of file copies to save on media during storage 1 From the SNSM home page choose Attributes from the File menu The Modify File Attributes screen appears FI 1 Quantum Ti StorNext Home Help Fio Meda Aan Reports
314. p of the home page and are used to access SNFS configuration administration and reporting options e The Config Menu e The Admin Menu e The Reports Menu The Help Menu TE N E slelsel Be ER yen Favorites loos tiep Address 6 htto arversei01 Ee ws TE MG Quantum ko rE StorNext Home Help Contig Admin Reports Heap The Config Menu The following Config menu options enable you to add and modify file systems e File Systems Add or delete a file system 33 StorNext User s Guide Chapter 3 SNFS Only GUI Overview The SNFS Home Page e Globals Modify global settings e Disks Add or delete a disk to a file system Stripe Groups Add modify or delete a stripe group from a file system e Affinities Add modify or delete an affinity from file systems Note Detailed descriptions of the Config menu options are located in Chapter 6 Managing the File System The Admin Menu The following Admin menu options enable you to control day to day operations of active file systems e Make File System Make a file system Start Stop File System Start or stop a file system Mount Unmount Mount or unmount a file system e Label Disk Devices Label disk drives Set Affinities Create a relation point in the file system to the affinity Caution Making a file system or making labeling disk devices destroys all data on the disk on which the task is run Note Detailed descripti
315. period must be used to take the place of the second column The correct way to specify the metadata network for a cluster is through the addresses in the fsnameservers configuration file If the address of a name server in fsnameservers is on network lt x gt then network lt x gt will be used as a metadata network Don t run multiple copies of fsqueue The fsqueue command checks the request queue and displays status on requests awaiting resources Care should be taken to execute only one fsqueue process at a time Invoking multiple simultaneous instances of fsqueue can consume system resources The fsqueue process may take some time to complete if the file system contains large directories Invoking fsqueue directly from a cron job frequently can result in multiple copies of fsqueue to be running at the same time To run fsqueue from a cron job wrap it in a shell script that checks to see if it is already running StorNext User s Guide 347 General Operating Guidelines and Limitations Operating System Affected Component Description All As of SNFS 2 7 a change was made to the way that the Reserved Extents performance feature affects free space reporting In the previous release SNFS would reserve a certain amount of disk space which would cause applications to receive an out of space error before the disk capacity reached 100 In the current release this reserved space is treated as allocated spac
316. pies of the files store one copy of the files to AIT media after residing on disk for 10 minutes and then truncate the other set of files immediately after storing the other set to tape in order to free up disk space This policy can be associated with a directory such as sandsm dsm1 backup e A directory has been created to store all documents that are accessed frequently and if truncated need to be retrieved quickly The policy class in this case could be set up to create a single tape copy store the files to LTO media 15 minutes after being on disk and then truncate after 60 days of non use This policy can be associated with a directory such as sandsm dsm1 docs StorNext includes a licensable Stub File feature When this feature is enabled third party applications can gather information about a file by reading a portion of the file called a stub rather than reading the entire file When you create a policy class you can enable stub file support and specify the size of the stub file in kilobytes When stub file support is enabled the beginning portion of the file up to the size you specified 252 Chapter 11 Data Migration Management Adding a Storage Policy remains on disk after data blocks are freed during policy management or space management EE EE DEEL GEEN EE Disk to Disk relocation allows you to move data from one set of disks Disk to Disk Relocation disk stripe group to another without affecting the file name spac
317. ports The File System Client Report e Distributed LAN Servers The names of the distributed LAN servers e Distributed LAN Clients The names of distributed LAN clients e LAN Servers The name of the distributed LAN server for which the subsequent details apply e Listening IP Port The IP address and port number through which the distributed LAN server communicates with StorNext e TCP Window Size The TCP window size in KB used by the distributed LAN server Default 64 e Transfer Buffer Size The transfer buffer size in KB used by the distributed LAN server A larger buffer may increase performance for larger files Default 256 e Transfer Buffer Count The number of transfer buffers used by the distributed LAN server This parameter is used only by Windows servers and clients Linux servers pass the value of this parameter to Windows clients Default 16 e Daemon Threads The maximum number of daemon threads used by the distributed LAN server Default 8 e Luns The disk name physical device name number of sectors and sector size Use the following procedure to run the File System Client Statistics Report 1 Choose SNFS gt Clients from the Reports menu The File System Client Report screen appears StorNext User s Guide 306 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The File System Client Report Figure 229 File System Client Report File System Client Statistics Microsoft Internet Explorer Report Screen Qu
318. ports Heip Clean Storage Disk Home misting Sto it the endime SNFS tie media Inactive te versions cleaned tom the SNSM is process to prevent the inactive information from Select Storage Disk Storage Disks Storage_Disk_1 V Apply _ Reset StorNext spock Active PEL mi mad Egia 2 Select from the Select Storage Disk List the storage disk you want to clean and then click Apply 3 After the Status screen informs you that the storage disk was successfully cleaned click Close StorNext User s Guide 249 StorNext User s Guide Chapter 10 Managing Storage Disks Cleaning a Storage Disk Note When you clean a deduplication enabled storage disk blocklets are not immediately freed from the associated blockpool The unused blocklets will be freed when the weekly clninfo schedule is run If you want to immediately free blocklets you can run the fsclean b command from the command line 250 DD G a m Chapter 11 f Data Migration Management This chapter describes how to use StorNext to manage data This chapter covers these topics e Policy Classes and Relationships e Adding a Storage Policy e Modifying a Policy Class Deleting a Policy Class e Applying a Policy Class This chapter includes procedures executed from the command line Before initially executing any StorNext command line programs you must first source either the profile or the cshrc file to updat
319. ppears f Configuration Wizard CW Microsoft Internet Explorer mr elf Configuration Wizard Use this wizard to configure your StorNext product e You can return to a step by clicking on its name e You can always return to the CW from the Config menu on the Home Page e The reset button will start the CW from the beginning Step 1 Enter License Step 2 Add File System Configuration Wizard Don t Show CW Again Reset Next gt Done 38 StorNext User s Guide Chapter 3 SNFS Only GUI Overview The SNFS Configuration Wizard For more information about completing the two Configuration Wizard tasks see Entering the StorNext License on page 40 and Adding a File System on page 83 39 Do G Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks This chapter provides instructions on performing the following StorNext and SNFS tasks Entering the StorNext License Controlling User Access Starting and Stopping StorNext Components Accessing StorNext Logs Scheduling StorNext Events Setting Up E mail Notification Cancelling SNSM Requests Setting up Alternate Retrieval Locations SSS Se Entering the StorNext License Use the Enter License wizard to enter a permanent license string You can also proceed using the 30 day temporary license that comes with StorNext You must have a permanent or temporary license to configure or use StorNext StorNext User s Guide 40 Chapter 4 Common St
320. pport 399 Figure 36 Disk Space Allocation Failure RAS SNFS RAS Messages Disk Space Allocation Failure IF A disk space allocation has failed The problem IS resolved The problem has NOT been resolved Figure 37 System Resource Failure RAS THEN Free up disk space by removing unnecessary disk copies of files or add disk capacity If the allocation failure is unexpected contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the QuantumTechnical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www_ quantum com support System Resource Failure IF SNFS has failed to allocate memory The FSM detects exhaustion of a resource controlled by an adjustable parameter The problem IS resolved The problem has NOT been resolved StorNext User s Guide THEN Determine the cause of memory depletion and correct the condition by adding memory or paging space to your system If SNFS is using excessive amounts of memory adjusting the configuration parameters might resolve the problem For information about adjusting parameters refer to the Release Notes the cvfs_config 4 and mount cvfs 1 man pages and the SNFS Tuning Guide Modify the file system co
321. quirements because only unique data is stored Without deduplication offline copies of a file consume as much disk space as the original file When you create a new storage disk you will be given the option of enabling deduplication StorNext refers to a storage disk with deduplication enabled as a dedup SDISK If your system configuration consists only of storage disks the same rules that apply to storage disks apply to deduplication enabled storage disks For example in a storage disk only configuration the first storage disk must always use file copy 1 You can create up to 4 dedup sdisks You can have a total of 16 storage disks of which 4 can be dedup sdisks You must have a minimum of 2GB of RAM for each dedup sdisk you plan to use Note The 2GB of RAM per dedup sdisk is in addition to the memory required for StorNext At this time storage disk deduplication is supported only on 32 bit and 64 bit Linux platforms StorNext User s Guide 240 Chapter 10 Managing Storage Disks Adding a Storage Disk Adding a Storage Disk Storage disks are treated the same as media in the system Before you configure a new storage disk the disk you want to use must be in a file system that is already created and mounted Note When you are creating storage disks exercise caution before enabling the deduplication feature Once you create a dedup SDISK you cannot change it to a non enabled storage disk Conversely you ca
322. r s Guide Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Controlling User Access Use this procedure to change the admin password 1 From the StorNext Home Page choose User Access Control from the Admin menu The User Access Control screen appears User Access Control Microsoft Internet Explorer INTELLIGENT STORAGE 49 Figure 28 Modify User Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Controlling User Access 2 From the User Access Control screen select Admin in the User List and click Modify The Modify User admin screen appears 4 User Access Control Microsoft Internet Explorer oxi Quantum Modify User admin Modify Password Verify Password OK X Cancel 3 Enter your new password 4 Confirm the new password by entering it again and then click OK 5 Click OK when the Status Screen displays Success 50 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Controlling User Access Use this procedure to add a new StorNext user 1 From the User Access Control screen click Add The Add New User Screen appears Adding a New User Figure 29 Add New User Screen Quantum Enter Password Re Enter P rd StorNext File System Advanced Functions ma mu mu lu ms sa s is In Os a a a E E E E a E E E E m D D mj z Ej a E E E E E E Bj E E ms is s mu mu eu eu n n see ma mm n ms is U n mm mm n Mm E G H Mm mu mu im m m mu m E E E StorNext User
323. r instructions on using the CLI to accomplish the same tasks see Using The Command Line Interface The following procedure describes how to create an empty file system The number of file systems you can add is limited only by the number of disks available for configuration Adding a File System 1 From the StorNext home page choose Add File System from the Config menu The File System Introduction screen displays both configured file systems and no of disks available for configuration Figure 48 File System i F1 Add New File System Microsoft Internet Explorer Introduction Screen File System Introduction Quantum Add new file systems The number of file systems you add is limited only by the availability of disks I Currently configured file systems p ed No File Systems Configured Disks available for configuration 2 lt Next gt X Cancel dd StorNext User s Guide 83 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With File Systems 2 Click Next to continue The Add New File System screen appears Figure 49 Add New File System Screen 3 On the Add New File System screen click Browse to enter a mount point directory for the file system This allows you to navigate to an existing directory or create a new one The Directory Browser screen appears StorNext User s Guide 84 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With File Systems Figure 50 Directory Browser Wi
324. r the stripe group is currently up or down and whether the data is Metadata Journal or Exclusive e Read Indicates whether the stripe group is read enabled e Write Indicates whether the stripe group is write enabled e Read Method Indicates whether the read method is assigned to the stripe group StorNext User s Guide 303 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Stripe Group Statistics Report e Disks in Group The list of disks assigned to the stripe group Use the following procedure to run the Stripe Groups report 1 Choose SNFS gt Stripe Groups from the Reports menu The Stripe Groups Report screen appears Figure 227 Stripe Groups Report Screen Peles Stripe Groups Report Select the a file system and one or more stripe groups in that system This report provides stripe group statistics including space affinities and disks Active File Systems snfs2 Stripe Groups in snfs2 Stripe Groups StripeGroup1 StripeGroup2 Select All StripeGroup3 Deselect All VY Apply X Cancel 2 Select from the Active File Systems menu the file system containing the stripe group for which to create the report StorNext User s Guide 304 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The File System Client Report 3 In the Stripe Groups list select one or more stripe groups on which to run the report and then click Apply The Stripe Group Statistics Report appears Figure 228 Stripe Group Statistics Report Ei
325. rNext User s Guide A stripe group is a logical disk volume in a file system that consists of one or more LUNs used to store metadata information journaling information and user data Stripe groups are used to create logical volumes that can span multiple controllers on an array and even multiple arrays for even greater performance Stripe groups are composed of LUNs of the same size and disk class based on your cost and performance requirements Fibre channel provides the highest performance and duty cycle A stripe group contains definitions about read and write permissions real time I O constraints a stripe breadth definition multi pathing methodology and an affinity association A file system can contain multiple stripe groups Stripe groups are bound together to create a StorNext file system When data is written into the file system two critical things happen First data is separated from metadata Metadata operations are typically small and random and they require a lot of head movement on disks Data however tends to be written in large sequential patterns with less head movement By separating data and metadata thrashing is minimized and performance is maximized The second critical thing that can happen when data is written to the file system is file steering Stripe groups can be different sizes and categories of disk so you could have a file system with one stripe group of SATA disk intended for proxy files or tempor
326. rage Manager see ee se se ee ee ee ee ee eek ie 1 About Distributed LAN Clients ie see ese ek ee ge Ge Re Ge ek ee RR ee ae 2 Purpose of This Guides es EES SE SE ee Re Se RO DRR Ke ee Ged Oe ee Res eN 3 How This Guide is Organized 0 0 cece ee ee Ee Ge Ge ee Ge gee Ee gegee ie 3 Notes Cautions and Warnings cece Ge ee Ee Gee ee ee eke ek ee eke 4 Document Convention EE GE Ee ees EER eke RE Pe GE Ne Ee Gesk k ee ER eR GEE Ese 5 Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview 6 Accessing the StorNext GUI iese esse sesse seer sk ee sea eg see ae EE gedek de ene ee 6 The StorNext Home Page uses seker sege ee ee gee ke be gesek eie Ve Ne eeu Gee ene es s 9 Dy Stem MOMItOLS RO RE OE OE EE EE Aaa iiet 9 StorNext Home Page Drop Down Menus eers ese sesse see ee ee ee 13 StorNext System Status sesse se vee re Re SE Be GRA Re Be Be RE EER SE Pe KERE See Re ee 16 StofNext Admin Alert nionean en AG ERGE AAK REG sad ere enge EP 17 StorNextServer Stats eise seer siende gese eek gese Des dee se Geek reel en ek gee iek GERS 19 Home and Help Links is EE EL GEE SESSE Se ER an een 19 Application LINK AA OE ER EE DE N EE dh 19 The SNFS and SNSM Home Pages iese ese se se ee se se se gee ee Ge Geek ee eek ek eke 20 The sNES Home Page issesifssis ses iseses bee se seed se gedek sk se ree sk se ren aris ie 20 SNFS Home Page Drop Down Menus ees sesse se see se ge eek ee ge Ee Re ee 21 StorNext User s Guide i The SNSM Home Page ese seks ere ee eek s
327. raries Adding a Library Figure 118 SCSI Device Screen 2 Add Library Microsoft Internet Explorer StorNext User s Guide 175 Chapter 7 Managing Libraries Adding a Library 3 Select a SCSI device from the list and click Next The Complete Add Library Task screen appears Figure 119 Complete Add 7 Add Library Microsoft Internet Explorer Library Task Screen Library Type SCSI Library Name scsi_archivel Media Type s LTO SCSI Device dev sg6 Hl Scalar i2000 4 Review your selections When finished click Next to complete the task or Back to make changes 5 After the status screen informs you that the library was successfully added click Close StorNext User s Guide 176 Chapter 7 Managing Libraries Adding a Library Adding an ACSLS After you select Network on the Library Type screen and then choose Network Library ACSLS from the drop down list the Library Name screen appears pigure 120 AE EP Hprdy 01x Name Screen Library Name Enter a name for the new library The name can be any combination of letters and numbers but it cannot contain spaces Enter the hostname or IP address of the ACSLS server Scalar i2000 lt Back Next gt X Cancel 1 Enter the fields on the Library Name screen e Library Name The name of the library This can be any name you choose Host Name The actual host name or IP address of the ACSLS server 2 Click N
328. ration 4 Ifthe error follows the media retire the media 5 If the error stays with the drive contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center to replace the drive 1 Copy the data to another piece of media 2 Remove the original media from the library and discard 1 Close the ticket and retry the read write operation on the original drive and media 2 Monitor operation for a reoccurrence of the ticket 3 Insert the suspect media into an alternate drive and retry the read write operation 4 Ifthe error follows the media retire the media 5 If the error stays with the drive contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center to replace the drive 1 Copy the data to another piece of media 2 Remove the original media from the library and discard If the media is used for writing data adjust the write protect tab on the media and clear the write protect setting The prevent media removal flag is on so it must be turned off If cleaning media does not reside in the cleaning media pool move it there 380 Figure 4 Tape Drive Alerts RAS part 2 StorNext User s Guide Media and Drive RAS Messages Flag 12 0Ch Unsupported The media is not supported by the drive If the media is blank remove it Otherwise format contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center Flag 13 0Dh Recoverable Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center snapped tape Flag 14 OEh Unrecoverabl
329. rcentage setting has been removed If you use an SDisk or DDisk you should save at least one other copy of the data to tape or to another SDisk or Ddisk Without the second copy your stored data will be vulnerable to data loss if you ever have hardware failure StorNext User s Guide 346 General Operating Guidelines and Limitations Operating System Affected Component Description All In StorNext 3 0 the default buffer cache settings have been modified Previously all reads writes that were 64K or smaller went through the buffer cache while larger I O requests went direct In StorNext 3 0 read writes that are 1MB or smaller go through the buffer cache while larger I O requests go direct The new buffer cache settings may change the I O behavior of some applications For example on managed servers I O to and from tape now goes through the buffer cache To revert to the settings used in previous releases change the following mount options on StorNext clients auto_dma_read_length 65537 auto_dma_write_length 65537 In StorNext 3 0 obsolete methods of specifying FSS addresses are no longer supported If the fsroutes configuration file is present it is ignored and a warning is generated In addition the FSM address field for each entry in the fsmlist configuration file the second column is no longer supported and is ignored if present If the priority field the third column is specified then a
330. re File System screen appears 2 Select the file system you want to delete and click Delete If you are deleting a managed file system you are warned that deleting this file system will delete all associated data and you will not be able to recover it You are also warned that deleting this managed file system restarts the StorNext Storage Manager If you are deleting a non managed system you are warned that all files and directories in the file system will be permanently deleted Click OK to Continue 3 Click OK to close the warning message window 4 After the Status screen informs you that the file system was successfully deleted click Close StorNext User s Guide 95 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Managing File System Operations eee ee ee Managing File System Operations This section describes tasks that can be performed on an individual basis when you administer your file system Except where noted tasks can be completed in any order and do not require that other tasks be successfully completed This section includes these topics e Disk Device Labeling e Making Global Changes e Working with the fsnameservers File e Making or Unmaking a File System e Starting and Stopping the File System e Mounting or Unmounting a File System _ N EE EE N vi ENG Each drive used by SNES must be labeled A new drive must be labeled Disk Device Labeling only one time You can label a drive from any StorNext
331. re they take effect Remaking the file system results in data loss so you should carefully plan the initial configuration of these two parameters in order to reduce the number of file system remakes If a parameter change requires a file system remake the system notifies the administrator in the system log The global section also contains several parameters that can dramatically improve or degrade system performance so you should exercise caution when modifying performance parameters 100 Figure 63 Modify Global Settings Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Managing File System Operations Before making any changes to the file system s configuration carefully review the cvis config 4 man pages or the CVFS Configuration File help file The following task describes how to modify global configuration settings These settings affect all stripe groups in the file system 1 From the SNFS home page choose Globals from the Config menu The Modify Global Settings screen appears N r IBE Quantum Ai a StorNext Home Help EE N Contig armen Reports Help Modify Global Settings 4 Select a fe system and modify the sengs Explanations of the settings appear in the Context Help for this Home gs Expl 7 page SNFS Tom fle system av ble for SNSM Li anes new fie system available for use 2 Configure giobals 3 Add desks 4 AG stripe groves 5 Hake the file
332. reen esse sesse see se se ee ee se ee 293 Scheduler Report Screen sesse seek ek ee Ge kk se 294 StorNext User s Guide StorNext User s Guide Figure 219 Figure 220 Figure 221 Figure 222 Figure 223 Figure 224 Figure 225 Figure 226 Figure 227 Figure 228 Figure 229 Figure 230 Figure 231 Figure 232 Figure 233 Figure 234 Figure 235 Figure 236 Figure 237 Figure 238 Figure 239 Figure 240 Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Scheduler Information Report ees ese se se ee ek ee ee 295 Storage Disk Report Screen sesse se se ee Ge Ge Ge ee Ge be ee 297 Storage Disk Information Report sesse se se ee Ge ee 298 Affinities Report Screen esse sees se se sk see Re ee Ge Re Ge ee 299 Directory Browser SCTeEN esse ee ek ee SR Re He RR ee ee 300 Directory Affinity Report esse sesse see ee se Ge ee ee Ge ee ee 300 File System Report Screen iese se see ee ee ee ek eke 302 File System Statistics Report esse se se se ee se gee ee eek ek 303 Stripe Groups Report Screen ee se se ek Ge ek Ge ee ee ee 304 Stripe Group Statistics RepOT iese ese se se ee se ee Ge ee ee ee 305 File System Client Report Screen se sees se se se ee be Ge ee 307 File System Client Report sees se se see ee He Ge ee Ge Gee ee 308 File System Distributed LAN Client Statistics Report eis di AE EEEE OR 309 File System LAN Client Report sees se see ee ee eke 310 Health Check Tests Screen ees see ee
333. repaired by stopping the system editing the configuration and then restarting the system Below are specific configuration violations and recommended actions to repair each specific issue ir THEN There is more than one affinity on one You cannot have more than one affinity on one stripe group sinpe group Examine all DSM configuration files us adsc DSM contig ctg In any file that has the Data Migration Flag set to YES and for every stnpe group with more than one affinity remove the extra affinities The file system does not contain at The file system has at least one affinity and therefore must contain at least one non exclusive data stripe group least one non exclusive data stripe group Examine all OSM conhguraton bles usr adic DSM contig ctg In any file that has the Data Migration Flag set to YES make sure at least one stripe group has the following configuration Metadata No Journal No Exclusive No A file system contains bath data stripe A file system can contain data stripe groups with affinities or data stripe groups without affinities but it cannot groups with af nities and data stipe contin both groups without affinities Examine all DSM configuration files uaz adic DSM config efg In any file that has the Data Migration Flag set to YES make sure that either every stripe group has an affinity or that every stripe group does not have an affinity There are afbnities across all managed Po more th
334. rivepool Device Pathname Tape Compression Associated Library idevisgt On scsi_erchive1 Mount Count Error Count o o Drive Pools fs FOdrivepool Unmounted Device Pathname Tape Compression Associated Library Idevisg14 scsi_erchivet Mount Count Mount State Unmounted 3 Click Close when you are finished viewing the report The File Information Report The File Information Report provides the following information StorNext User s Guide Last Modification Timestamp The timestamp date when the file was last modified Owner Access The access permissions assigned to the file owner Group Access The access permissions that group has to the file Read Write Execute rwx or all three permissions Public Access Indicates public access permissions Policy Class An associated policy class that manages the file lifecycle Size bytes The size of the file in bytes Checksum Indicates whether a checksum exists for the file 275 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The File Information Report Truncation Immediately After Store Indicates whether files are truncated immediately after a store e File Location The media on which the file is stored e Copies The number of copies of the file Affinity The affinity with which the file is associated e Set Stub Size KB If the Stub File feature is enabled this is the target
335. rmation e ese see ees 370 The proxy Comnand i esse sk ker eek pe ge be eek eek BEERS 370 The proxy long Command ees esse seer ee se sek ek RR Re Re Re Ee be ee 370 The proxy who Command ees esse seer se se sek ek ER RR Re Rek Ee be be ee 371 Using the Dynamic Resource Allocation Feature esse 371 Checking the File SYSteM ees ee se see ee ek see ekke DER SR Se Ge ee RR Re 372 Adding a Stripe Group Without Moving ee 372 Adding and Moving a Data Stripe Group ee esse se seer 373 Moving a Metadata Journal Stripe Group sesse se se ies 374 Specifying an Alternate Retrieval Location eee 376 Appendix D viii RAS Messages 377 Media and Drive RAS Messages ees se se se ee ee ee ee eek 377 SNES RAS Messages esse a a bees ee ESE ses eg N Se be sege se ae 391 Other RAS Messages uses ee KERE ANGER ee ER Ge ee eke egEG ni 403 StorNext User s Guide Appendix Figures StorNext User s Guide Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figures StorNext Login Window ees ee ee ek ee ee ee Ge Ge ee ee 7 StorNext Home Page siese sesse see se ore ee id Ka E vee ae Beer Se eke e een 8 File System MOnitor scsi RE ER GER Ge GE ee GR N Dee Hd 10 Libtats MOnitor cscs mee sesse ep sege RS Ee RR Nege ERG ee ve VERG eN ese 11 Storage Disk MOTTO ven se sk verse ve Ede EER se Ed Seg Ee ee G
336. rnet Explorer poix Slots Screen Match Devices with Slots Match the device with the correct slot and click Insert to add the selection to the list of items to be configured When the list is complete click Next Device Slot LTO dev sg2 a d256I0 gt Insert LTO gt gt dev sg3 25710 LTO gt gt dev sg4 gt d25810 x Remove MM Enable Compression Show mapping help d Back Next gt X Cancel md StorNext User s Guide 194 Chapter 8 Managing Drives and Disks Working with Tape Drives 1 If you need to see existing drive and slot mappings click Show Mapping Help to display a list of current device mappings Click Close when you are finished viewing the information on the Tape Drive Mapping Help screen Figure 135 Tape Drive 3 http kazar 85 icw bin wiz_add_drive cgi show_fsdevice 1 amp arel Mapping Help Screen Quantum Tape Drive Mapping Help scsi_archive1 S N 0000000091_KAZAR Drive Serial Slot Device ADIC000093 257 Idevisa3 ADIC000094 258 idevisg4 ADICO00095 259 idevisg5 ADIC000092 256 idevisg2 X Close Note In some cases StorNext may not be able to determine the device to slot mapping Limitations include ACSLS and DAS libraries 2 On the Match Devices with Slots screen select from the Device list the device you want to configure 3 Select from the Slot list the slot with which to match the device 4 Click Insert
337. rning ees se sees se ee ee ee 162 Destination Stripe Group Too Small Warning 0 163 Metadata Stripe Group Message iese sesse se se se ee Ge Ge ee 163 Metadata Journal Move Screen sees ae RA ee ee 164 Complete Stripe Group Move Screen sesse see se see es 165 Process Initiated Status Screen se see Ge Ge ee be Ge ee 166 Stripe Group Move Status Screen ees se see ee ee ee ee 167 Library Introduction Screen eee se ee Ee Ee Ge ee ee 171 Library Ly pe Screen isi EE EE SE GE ee Ee ee ee 172 Library Name Screen ees se se ee Ge Ge Ge ee Ge ee Ee ge Ge ee ee 173 Media Ty pes Screen ii see Voere bag eserini ede U 174 SCSL Device ee EE EE EE RE ates 175 Complete Add Library Task Screen ese ese ee ee 176 ACSLS Library Name Screen ees se se ee ee Ge ee ge ee 177 DAS Configuration SCreeN ees see ee ee ee ek ek ek 178 DAS Library Name Screen ee se ee ee ee ee ek ek ek 179 DAS Media Types Screen iese see se se Ge ee Ge Ge ee Ge Ge ee 180 DAS 2 Library Name Screen se see ee se Ge ee Ge Ge ee Ge be ie 181 Vault Library Name Screen iese se ee eek ee ee ek eke 182 Configure Library Screen ees eek ee ee ee eek ee 183 Modify SCSI Library Screen esse ese ee ee ee ee ee ee 184 Audit Library Screen ees se se se ee se ee ee Ge Ge ee Ee Ee Ge ee ee 186 Change Library State Screen ee ee ee eke ee ek 187 Tape Drive Introduction Screen esse se se ke se ee ee ee 190 Associated Library Screen se s
338. rogress window shows service ticket was successfully modified Success The Progress window shows The ticket was NOT modified To view the troubleshooting procedures click View Failure Recommended Actions To view the error details click Error Logs for information on why the ticket was not modified To modify a service ticket repeat Step 1 through Step 3 4 Click Close to close the Progress window 408 Other RAS Messages Figure 47 Viewing Service ee i Tks RAS i Viewing Service Tickets View StorNext service tickets to view details of the System Status notification and a suggested resolution of the reported problem Do one of the following o Click System Status at the bottom of the screen OR o Access the StorNext home page and choose System Status from the Service menu The Tools System Status screen appears Ticket View service ticket numbers which can be listed in ascending or descending order by clicking the top of the column State View the service ticket s current state The state can be either Open or Closed a Last Updated This is the date when the service ticket was last accessed either opened or closed depending on the selected sort order a Summary View a summary of the problem reported by the StorNext 2 Scroll through the list of service tickets select the ticket to be viewed and click Details The Ticket Details screen appears This screen details the service ticket numb
339. roxy Server 172 16 82 130 pmport 49152 pmflags 0x0 Listening on 172 16 82 130 port 1036 Use the proxy long command to display the same information about distributed LAN servers included in the proxy command output plus the tuning parameters for the distributed LAN server systems and a list of the disks available for distributed LAN usage This command requires that a file system be selected Command usage and output looks similar to this snadmin yy gt proxy long Disk Proxy Server 172 16 82 130 pmport 49152 pmflags 0x0 Listening on 172 16 82 130 port 1036 windowsize 1024K sbsize 256K sbcount 32 CvfsDisk0 on device PhysicalDrive1 sectors 156214012 sector size 512 370 The proxy who Command Using the Dynamic Resource Allocation Feature Use the proxy who command to display the active disk distributed LAN connections for the specified host which can be either a disk distributed LAN server or client Output also includes average I O statistics for each connection The syntax for this command is proxy who hostname Command usage and output looks similar to this both distributed LAN client and distributed LAN server output is shown snadmin yy gt proxy who y FS yy Disk Proxy Client connection from 172 16 82 62 Remote address 172 16 82 62 port 1052 flags 0x2 Read 1 2 Mbytes s write 0 0 bytes s snadmin yy gt proxy who fie FS yy Disk Proxy Server connection to 172 16 82 130 Remote address 172 16 82 130 port 103
340. rs OE DEE d Guantum g T o StorNext Home Help F e Mosa aamin Reports Help I Change File Version Home Enter ine hal path for a file or dick Browse and select the tle Click Get Versions to display a list of available anemate versions of te fle SNFS SNSM Enter Indradi Fidoname Browse Version Modtime When Stored File Versions Get Versions V Apply Reset StorNext spock Active Z Remeve Fie verson SJ Local nraet 2 Do one of the following e Enter in the Enter Individual Filename field the file whose version you want to change You must enter the file s complete pathname e Click Browse to display the StorNext File Browser window On this window locate and select the files you want to store to media and then click OK 3 Click the Get Versions button to display a list of available alternate versions for the file you specified 4 Select the version you want to use and then click Apply 5 After the Status screen informs you that the operation was completed successfully click OK 137 Recovering a File Figure 87 Recover Files Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Using the SNSM File System Functions This function allows you to recover a deleted file Undeleted files are recovered ina truncated state To return the file back to disk you must use the Retrieve File function as described in Retrieving a File on page 140 1 From the SNSM home page
341. rty from No to Yes Note Verify with your system administrator that other settings in the configuration file are valid 3 Restart StorNext lf the file system is not supposed to be managed by TSM but is listed as managed contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center for assestance locating and deleting all StorMext management data for all data on that fle system Muhiple tape drives have the same 1 Restan the StorMext software system which will correct the internal records of the device path and serial serial number and device path number 2 Ifthe problem persists contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center A configured tape drive has an invalid 1 Use the StorNext GUI to delete and then re add the drive slot identifier OR 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center A configured tape drive has no 1 Verify that the device is powered on detectable SCSI device path Venty that the dewce has not registered any errors Verify that the device is physically connected by checking all cabling and connections Verify that the device is correctly mapped to the host server Caution if your system configuration allows you to logically remap all devices vefiry that StorMext has been stopped prior to beginning the remapping Restart StorNext after the remappang s complete gt vn A managed tape drive does not have a 1 Use the StorNext GUI to delete and then re add the drive corresponding TSM CfgDir element O
342. ry Directory List stornext snfs1 greg 4 Apply X Cancel 2 Remove Directory Policy Group 3 In the Select Directory list select a directory and click Apply 4 After the Status screen informs you that the relationship has been successfully removed click Close 5 From the SNSM home page choose Policy Classes from the Admin menu The Manage Policy Classes screen figure 193 reappears 6 Select from the Select Policy Class list the policy class you want to delete and then click Delete 7 After the Status screen informs you that the policy class has been successfully deleted click Close 268 Chapter 11 Data Migration Management Applying a Policy Class Applying a Policy Class After you have created at least one policy class you can select that policy class and apply it immediately 1 From the SNSM home page choose Policy Classes from the Admin menu The Manage Policy Classes screen figure 193 appears 2 Select from the Select Policy Class list the policy class you want to apply 3 Click Run to apply the policy class immediately 4 After the Status screen informs you that the operation was performed successfully click OK StorNext User s Guide 269 StorNext User s Guide Chapter 12 StorNext Reports StorNext enables you to generate and view a number of reports that provide information about your StorNext system These reports are selectable from the StorNext home page th
343. ry and then click Enter Media Use the procedures in this section to mount and dismount media in a tape drive as needed Mounting Media Use the following procedure to mount media 1 From the SNSM home page choose Library gt Mount from the Media menu The Mount Media screen appears 228 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using the SNSM Media Functions Figure 168 Mount Media Screen BEL Quantum F rE StorNext Home Help Fie Media Admin Reports Heip Mount Medi Home First select wes to mar SNFS Mount Medi mount operation SNSM Archive Select Archive Media ID Select Media Fier v Apply Roset StorNext spock Active aMi Heda NJi nvanet 2 Select from the Archive drop down menu the archive that contains the media you want to mount The screen updates to show available media in the archive you selected 3 Select from the Media ID list the media you want to mount 4 If desired use the Filter field to narrow your search when looking for a specific media ID For example enter 01 and click the Filter button to find all media IDs ending in 01 5 Select from the Drive ID drop down menu the drive in which you wish to mount the media 6 Review your selections and then click Apply 7 After the Status screen informs you that the task has completed successfully click Close Dismounting Media Use the following procedure to dismount media 1 From the SNSM home page choose
344. s 2 Select from the Select Drive Pool list the drive pool you want to delete and then click Delete A message window asks you to confirm that you want to delete the drive pool There is no undo function that will undelete the drive pool if you change your mind so be absolutely certain you want to delete the drive pool before continuing Figure 146 Delete Warning Microsoft internet Explorer Message In order to perform the change the StorNext Storage Manager has to be restarted Are you sure you want to delete Drive Pool fs_FOdrivepool J Cancel 3 Click OK to close the message window and continue 4 After the Status screen informs you that the drive pool was successfully deleted click Close StorNext User s Guide 204 Chapter 8 Managing Drives and Disks Managing Disk Space Managing Disk Space Figure 147 Manage Disk Space Screen StorNext User s Guide This function allows you to apply a storage policy or truncation policy to a file system and to adjust other parameters that help you manage disk space 1 From the SNSM home page choose Disk Space from the Admin menu The Manage Disk Space screen appears Ge N TEE EE i Quantum a StorNext Home Help vae Mas Aamin Reports Help I Manage Disk Space Home Select a file system to perform Storage or Truncation on SNFS SNSM Storage Policy e Truncation Policy d File Systems Execute at Highest Priority r File Systems Li
345. s configuring the software so that it does NOT check SNFS For best performance and reliability Quantum recommends running Distributed LAN Servers on 64 bit versions of Windows or on Linux Memory management limitations in 32 bit versions of Windows affect Distributed LAN Server performance Due to these limitations Distributed LAN Servers running on 32 bit versions of Windows are limited to 16 connections Each file system and network interface represents a connection For example if a Distributed LAN Server with 2 NICs serves 4 file systems to 4 Distributed LAN Clients it has a total of 32 connections Do not use Windows Backup the application included with Windows operating systems to back up the directory on which a StorNext file system is mounted As of StorNext release 3 5 the Authentication tab has been removed from the Windows Configuration utility For several previous StorNext releases a messaged warned that this tab would be removed in an upcoming release WARNING Active Directory will be the only mapping method supported in a future release This dialog will be deprecated StorNext User s Guide 342 General Operating Guidelines and Limitations Operating System Affected Component Description Windows When you are upgrading to StorNext 3 5 from a release prior to version 3 0 you must uninstall StorNext before installing After uninstalling you must reboot install StorNext 3
346. s appendix shows the different RAS messages you might see Messages are separated into the following categories e Media and Drive RAS Messages e SNES RAS Messages e Other RAS Messages Media and Drive RAS Messages This section describes RAS messages that might appear as a result of a media related error condition such as no media detected or media format failure StorNext User s Guide 377 Media and Drive RAS Messages Figure 1 No Media Found RAS Recommended Retin No Media Found IF THEN the senice ticket indicates that no Add more media to StorNext media is found to satisfy the request o e Check for suspect media The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been resolved 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Senice Tickets 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assrstance Center In the USA 14800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web bttp www quantum com support StorNext User s Guide 378 Figure 2 Possible Drive Media Mount Discrepancy RAS StorNext User s Guide Media and Drive RAS Messages Possible Drive Media Mount Discrepancy IF THEN A service ticket indicates the This is a caution regarding drive and media mounts and might require user drive is mounted and the intervention In this situation StorNext assigns to the unverified media th
347. s are in use SNSM prioritizes and queues the job When two drives become available the queued job starts and all active files are transcribed When transcription is complete SNSM updates the database to reflect the new location of the files If the transcription or reclamation process encounters a file that spans multiple media only the portion of the file that exists on the old media is transcribed When the transcription or reclamation process is complete only deleted files remain on the source media To remove the source copy of the deleted files you must clean the media as described in Cleaning Media on page 237 After the cleaning process is complete and the source copy of the deleted files are removed the media is available for reuse as blank media 233 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using the SNSM Media Functions Changing Media This function allows you to change the current state of one or more pieces Attributes of media You can change the state to one of the following e Unsuspect Indicates that the media is physically sound and not ina suspect potentially damaged or unusable condition e Write Protect Write protected media cannot be overwritten or have data added e Write Unprotect This media can be overwritten or have data added e Available The media is available for writing or reading e Unavailable The media is not available for writing or reading e Unmark Cancels an Error or Checkout state and
348. s is the recommended setting for best overall efficiency Note If the file system you are adding will be used for deduplication enabled storage disks you must accept the default value of 16384 bytes Stripe group field The number of stripe groups for the file system Selecting a value greater than 1 enables customization to optimize performance and use StorNext features such as dedicated Metadata Journal and User Data stripe groups Note Quantum recommends that metadata and journals be ona stripe group separate from data In some cases metadata and journals should be on separate stripe groups as well 11 When a message reminds you to select more than one stripe group if you want an alternate configuration other than the one that provides journal metadata and user date click OK to continue The Customize Stripe Group screen appears StorNext User s Guide 87 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With File Systems Figure 53 Customize Stripe ZA Add New File System Microsoft Internet Explorer lol x Group Screen Customize Stripe Group Ouantum Enter a name for the stripe group StripeGroup1 Select disks Ed SNFS VTOC disk001 Size 8 5 GB cape SNFS VTOC disk002 Size 8 5 GB Label Type C VTOC EFI Label Help Enter the stripe breadth for the stripe group This is the number of kilobytes that is read from or written to each disk in the stripe 64 gt I a Selec
349. s that can be cached in the SNFS server The default setting for the cache size is 16 and the minimum is 8 Maximum Log Size This value defines the maximum number of bytes size to which a SNFS Server log file can grow When the log file reaches the specified size it is rolled and a new log is started In this situation the two log files could use twice the maximum log size space specified in this field The range is from 1 to 256 megabytes Maximum Number of Logs This value determines the number of rolled logs kept Choices range from 1 to 10 Journal Size This value controls the size of the file system journal The range is 1 to 256 megabytes Thread Pool Size This value defines the number of client pool threads to be activated and used by the SNFS server This setting affects system performance There should be at least two threads per client Increasing the number of threads will improve file system response time in operations that affect allocation and metadata functions The range is from 16 to 1024 threads Migrating File System Enable this option check the box if the data on the file system should be migrated to tertiary storage Migration cannot be disabled once it is enabled Global Super User Enable this option check the box to allow a user with super user privileges to assert these privileges on the file system Note If the Global Super User option is enabled super users have global access rights on the fil
350. s whether the move is for a data stripe group or a metadata journal stripe group e Lun Stripe Group The name of the lun stripe group involved in the move e Start Time The date and time the move was launched e Percentage Complete The current percentage complete status for the move e Status For current moves the status will be Progress For previously completed moves the status will be either Success or Fail a Quantum g es StorNext Home Help Contig Admin Reports Help Move Stripe Group e Thi s the current Stripe Group Move status it a New move Home SNFS SNSM Topertorm a complete move ci Hie ig Sv 3 Move Metadata JournalyData Stripe Groups 4 Mark Source Swipe Groups as Down Data Sinope Gri File System Tyee LuvSvipe Group Sun Time es Stans Ed Eai Move L Refresh Clear StorNext spock L Active 2 To update the percentage complete for a move in progress click Refresh To remove previously completed moves with either a Success or Fail status click Clear 3 To view details about either a previously completed move or a move in progress click the link in the Status column The status window for completed moves shows files skipped and files defragmented The status for moves in progress shows percentage complete 4 Click Move to launch the Movement Wizard The Move Stripe Group Introduction screen appears 159 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Performing
351. sages Figure 44 Software Resource EE Recommended Actions Violations RAS Software Resource Warning IF THEN the senice ticket indicates that no e Add more media to Stoet media is found to satisfy the request OR e Check for suspect media A Stortlext fle system has exceeded Identify any obsolete or unneeded files in that file system Either delete those files or move them to a different file the maximum allowable threshold for system percent used Atape drive is in an unusable state 1 lf this is a new or temporary problem run the schstate command to change the tape drive state 2 Ethe problem persists restart StorMext 3 N the problem shill persists contact the Quantum Techmecal Assistance Center A tape drive is offtine 1 this is a new or temporary problem run the fschstate command to change the tape drive state 2 ifthe problem keeps occurring contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center Not enough media are available for TSM Add more media to the StorNext system Data Policies A policy class does not store o Change the pobcy class so that Store Automatically is set to Yes automatically and es not scheduled OR Add the pokcy to the list of scheduled features specifying the lt policyClassName gt as the Option A device path could not be resohed 1 Verify that the device is powered on 2 Verify that the device has not registered any errors 3 Venty that the deace s p
352. se Note Deleting a storage disk does not unmount it After deleting you must manually unmount the disk Alternatively you can use the mounted storage disk to create a new storage disk EE NE ENE NE N NN Ge N EG EP WEE GOEIE Changing a Storage Disk State Changing a storage disk s state means changing the storage disk s logical state to online or offline 1 From the SNSM home page choose Storage Disk gt State from the Admin menu The Change Storage Disk State screen appears StorNext User s Guide 247 Chapter 10 Managing Storage Disks Changing a Storage Disk State Figure 184 Change Storage nF Quantum J a StorNext Home Help Disk State Screen S re Medio Admin Reports Heip Change Storage Disk State Home Select a Storage Disk or list of Storage Disks to change the logical database State to online or omine SNFS SNSM Select Storage Disk Current State F Storage_Disk_1 Online Select State Online oftine Apply Reset StorNext ED System Status _ arwen Active 2 Select the storage disk whose state you want to change 3 Select the state Online or Offline to assign to the selected storage disk and then click Apply Note The Online Pending state applies only to deduplication enabled storage disks This state means a verification process is currently in progress When verification is complete the status automatically changes to Online When a storage disk is in the Online
353. se of failure If desired retry the move If you want to reuse LUNs in the data stripe group used in a successful move you must follow these steps 1 Mark the stripe group as Down as described in Modifying a Stripe Group on page 117 2 From the command line interface rename the LUNs in the downed stripe group You cannot accomplish this step through the GUI 167 Reusing LUNS ina Metadata Stripe Group After a Move StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Performing Stripe Group Movement LUNs in the metadata stripe group used in a successful move can be reused immediately after the move There is no need to rename LUNs because during the move process StorNext automatically appends old to the source s LUN label name Although no additional steps are required you might want to manually rename LUNs from either the StorNext GUI or the command line interface to provide better identification 168 Chapter 7 2 m Managing Libraries C StorNext configures allocates and manages all components associated with libraries Resources that can be used for libraries include a wide variety of storage drives and media Once configured StorNext performs automated and manual operations to ensure the libraries resources are operating at efficient levels and in stable states StorNext also offers flexibility when maintaining or replacing library components by minimizing system downtime This c
354. ser s Guide 89 StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With File Systems e Metadata Journal and User Data checkboxes Enable one or more of these options check the boxes to create a location for metadata journaling or user data e To enable metadata to be placed on the stripe group select the Metadata checkbox e To enable journaling to be placed on the stripe group select the Journal checkbox e To enable user data to be placed on the stripe group select the User Data checkbox Note Quantum recommends that your user data be ona different stripe group than your metadata and journal data 13 If you selected multiple stripe groups on the Customize Stripe Group screen repeat Step 11 page 88 for each stripe group 14 On the Customize Stripe Group screen type valid values and click Next The Complete File System Task screen appears 90 Figure 55 Complete File System Task Screen Creating a File System From SNFS StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With File Systems E Add New File System Microsoft Internet Explorer Complete File System Task You have completed the necessary steps to add a new file system Please review your selections and click Next to create the file system or click Back to make changes File System Name snfsi Mount Point stornext snfsi Data Migration Yes Block Size 16384 Stripe Group StripeGro
355. set to display at a minimum resolution of 1073 x 768 If you use a popup blocker be sure to enable pop ups in order to ensure that the StorNext Configuration Wizard functions properly 2 Inthe browser s Address field type the full address of the machine and its port number and then press Enter For example http lt machine name gt lt port number gt Use the name of the machine and port number you copied when you installed the StorNext software Note Typically the port number is 81 If port 81 is in use use the next unused port number Le 82 83 etc After you enter the machine name and port number the following window appears Enter username for SiorNext Access Verification at lagrange 81 User ID pasos ooo OK Clear Cancel 3 In the User ID field type admin and press TAB 4 Inthe Password field type admin and click OK The initial StorNext GUI appears A message asks you to start non running components 5 Click OK to start the StorNext components The StorNext GUI launches Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview Accessing the StorNext GUI The following illustration shows the main components of the StorNext Home Page Figure 2 StorNext Home Page Component Link to Drop down Refresh Monitor Refresh Navigation Quantum Menu Options Buttons Rate Options uantum Fi Config Admin File Total Space Used Space Free Space Used Store Trunc SAN LAN System GB GB G
356. size in kilobytes for the stub file e Actual Stub Length KB If the Stub File feature is enabled this is the actual size in kilobytes of the stub file Use the following procedure to run the File Information Report 1 Choose Files from the Reports menu The Files Report screen appears Figure 203 Files Report Screen E File Reports Microsoft Internet Explorer Enter a filename select files from the list or click Browse to select files from managed directories This report provides information about files including the current location of a file owner size and number of copies Enter Individual File Browse Select Files File List Select All Deselect All v Apply Reset X Cancel 2 Select the files to include in the report by doing one of the following StorNext User s Guide 276 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The File Information Report Inthe Enter Individual File field type a file name Proceed to Step 5 page 278 e Select multiple files from the Select Files list You can click the Select All button to select all files in the list or click Deselect All to deselect all selected files Proceed to Step 5 page 278 e Click Browse to select files from a managed directory 3 When you click Browse the StorNext File Browser screen appears In the Select Directory list select a directory The selected directory appears in the Current Directory field A list of directories app
357. sks Working with Tape Drives Microsoft Internet Explorer N x 2 Are you sure you want to delete scsi_archive1_dr2 Cancel 3 Click OK to close the message window and proceed 4 After the Status Screen informs you that the drive has been successfully deleted click Close The drive state function allows you to change the logical database state to online or offline 1 From the SNSM home page choose Drive gt Drive State from the Admin menu The Change Drive State screen appears showing all configured drives and the current state for each drive EE NT A RE Quantum F a StorNext Home Help Fee Media Admin Reports Help Change Drive State Home Select a drive or list cf arves to change the logical database state to online or omine SNFS SNSM Select Orve Current State ses arcnivel dri Online F sesi archive1 dra Online ses archivet dra Online Select Stote Onine Offline LY Aepry Reen s kazar Waring GE Change Orive State E Riaad ntraret 2 Select the drive whose state you want to change 3 Select the state Online or Offline to assign to the selected drive and then click Apply 198 Chapter 8 Managing Drives and Disks Working with Tape Drives 4 After the Status Screen informs you that the drive s status was successfully changed click Close The Change Drive State screen shows the changed state for the drive you selected 5 If desired repeat steps 2 4 to change the
358. ssfully completed click OK StorNext User s Guide 75 Chapter 5 9 m Backing Up StorNext C This chapter provides instructions on backing up the StorNext software This chapter covers these topics e Types of StorNext Software Backups Performing a StorNext Software Backup e Managing the Backup Policy Types of StorNext Software Backups There are two types of StorNext software backup Full and Partial By default a full backup runs once a week and partial backups are scheduled to run on all other days of the week that the full backup is not run If you would like to change the backup schedule see Managing the Backup Policy on page 79 A Full Backup includes e The StorNext database e Configuration files e File system metadata dump file after journal files are applied A Partial Backup includes StorNext User s Guide 76 Setting up Email Notification For Backup StorNext User s Guide Chapter 5 Backing Up StorNext Types of StorNext Software Backups e StorNext database journals e Configuration files e File system journal files Note These backups DO NOT back up user data This procedure backs up only StorNext related system files Before you run a StorNext backup be sure to set up email notification as described in Setting Up E mail Notification on page 67 Email notification is an important part of the StorNext backup process When you select the Backup option on the
359. st m stornext snts Stop at Occupied Disk Space MINTIME Before File Migraton Minutes MINTIME Before File Truncation 21 Days Minimum File Size to Truncate 1048576 Bytes v Apply Reset StorNext spock Active E Migrate Fie based on Poicy 2 Select from the File Systems list the file system that contains the disks whose space you want to manage 3 Enter the following fields e Storage Policy Choose this option to apply a storage policy to the file system OR e Truncation Policy Choose this option to apply a truncation policy to the file system e Execute at Highest Priority Choose this option to make your storage or truncation policy execute at the highest priority 205 Chapter 8 Managing Drives and Disks Changing Watermark Parameters Stop at Occupied Disk Space Specify the disk full percentage at which the storage or truncation policy is no longer applied e MINTIME Before File Migration If you chose the Storage Policy option enter the minimum amount of time in minutes before a file is migrated e MINTIME Before File Truncation If you chose the Truncation Policy option enter the minimum amount of time in days before a file is truncated e Minimum File Size to Truncate If you chose the Truncation Policy option enter the minimum size in bytes a file must be before it is eligible for truncation 4 Click Apply to continue 5 After the Status screen informs you that the operation was per
360. state for additional tape drives Cleaning a Tape Drive Use this procedure to manually clean a tape drive Note To perform this procedure you must have at least one cleaning tape specifically labeled for cleaning For example CLN_XXX 1 From the SNSM home page choose Drive gt Clean Drive from the Admin menu The Clean Drive screen appears Figure 140 Clean Drive Screen EF Ouantum MA TE StorNext Home Help me Mes Aomin Repons Heip Clean Drive Home Select an existing drive to clean This is a manual arive clean Drive Cleaning is most commonly an involuntary acbon performed by h drive SNFS SNSM Y Apply Reset StorNext kazar Warning E Oean Drive gi SJ local rr anet 2 Select from the Select Drive List the drive you want to clean and then click Apply The Clean Drive status screen appears 3 After the Status screen notifies you that the drive has been cleaned successfully click Close StorNext User s Guide 199 Chapter 8 Managing Drives and Disks Working with Drive Pools Working with Drive Pools Drive pools are groups of tape drives allocated for various administrator defined storage tasks Drive pools enable you to delimit storage processes based on data type performance security location or all of these variables Drive pools can reside in a single tape library or span multiple tape libraries Working with drive pools involves the following tasks e Adding a Drive P
361. ston al N Local mi anet StorNext User s Guide 265 Chapter 11 Data Migration Management Adding a Storage Policy 2 Select the policy class for which you wish to create a relation point and then click Add The Add Relationship screen appears Figure 197 Add Relationship S 1 Add Directory Class Relation Microsoft Internet Explorer creen Quantum Add Relationship for policyclass1 Enter Directory Browse Directories Browse VY Apply X Cancel OT TT Id toca intranet 8 Click Browse to view directories to which you can make the relationship The Directory Browser window appears Figure 198 Directory Browser Directory Browser N fm E1 Window Current Directory _ Select Directory Managed FileSystems stornext snfs1 OK X Cancel StorNext User s Guide 266 Chapter 11 Data Migration Management Modifying a Policy Class 4 Select from the list a directory to which to add the relationship directory A second Directory Browser window appears showing the directory you selected in the Current Directory field 5 Click OK The Add Relationship screen appears showing the new directory 6 Click Apply 7 After the Status screen informs you that the operation completed successfully click Close Modifying a Policy Class Use the following procedure to modify a policy class 1 From the SNSM home page choose Policy Classes from the Admin menu The Manage Policy Classes
362. store for each file including the primary file File Copy 1 Select the media type for each copy and then click Next The Complete Storage Policy Task screen appears By Add New Storage Policy Microsoft Internet Explorer Ale ES Backup Tape StorNext Complete Storage Policy Task You have completed the necessary steps to add a new policy class Please review your selections and click Next to create the policy class or click Back to make changes Policy Class Name policyclass4 Assoc Directory stornext snfsi pc2 File Copies 2 Media Type SDISK LTO Minimum Store Time 5 min Minimum Truncation Time 3 days Stub Files enabled Stub File Size 1000 Kbytes Back Next gt X Cancel z 10 Review the information and click Next to continue or Back to edit your choices 11 After the Status screen informs you that the procedure completed successfully click Close Use this procedure from the SNSM home page to add a policy class without a relation point 260 Chapter 11 Data Migration Management Adding a Storage Policy 1 From the SNSM home page choose Policy Classes from the Admin menu The Manage Policy Classes screen appears Figure 193 Manage Policy EE Quantum F e gt StorNext Home Help Classes Screen file Media Admin Reports Help Manage Policy Classes Home A policy dass is Bre essential component hat megrates files kom the file system to media Click Add
363. t 3 1 2 the GUI has been modified to handle all known issues with file names containing these non standard characters Still Quantum strongly recommends against deliberately using these characters in filenames If the GUI encounters a filename containing a less than 32 ASCII character the character is rendered in the display as in the following examples e A horizontal tab is shown as __0x09__ n e Aline feed is shown as _0x0A_ e A carriage return is shown as __0x0D__ The following additional characters should be avoided in mixed environments containing both Windows and non Windows clients because Windows will not be able process any file or directory with these characters in the name ess E Disk Naming Requirements When naming disks names should be unique across all SANs If a client connects to more than one SAN a conflict will arise if the client sees two disks with the same name General Operating Guidelines and Limitations StorNext User s Guide Table 1 lists updated information and guidelines for running StorNext as well as known limitations 338 General Operating Guidelines and Limitations Table 1 Operating Guidelines and Limitations Operating System Affected Component Description HA configurations In HA high availability configurations do not run adic_control start on the standby server Doing so may start StorNext Storage Manager compon
364. t DESTINATION heading If you made a mistake during selection you can clear the LUN pair by clicking Remove and then repeat the selection When you are ready to continue with the move click Next The Complete Stripe Group Move screen appears 164 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Performing Stripe Group Movement Figure 111 Complete Stripe Group Move Screen 3 Move Stripe Group Microsoft Internet Explorer F oj xj Complete Stripe Group Move Quantum e You have completed the necessary steps to move your stripe group Please review your selections and click Next to move the stripe group or click Back to make changes n e To check move status return to the stripe group move page File System File system snfsi ove Data Stripe Group No Move Metadata Journal Yes Source Lun arwen01 Destination Lun dev sdp Back Next gt LX Cancel Note The figure shows the Complete Stripe Group Move screen for a metadata stripe group move The screen for a metadata journal stripe group move looks similar 12 On the Complete Stripe Group Move screen verify the displayed information about the move and then click Next to continue The Process Initiated status screen appears StorNext User s Guide 165 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Performing Stripe Group Movement Figure 112 Process Initiated Status Screen E Move Stripe Group Microsoft Internet Explorer se sol x Status
365. t Explorer j oj x Quantum Modify Drive Drive Name scsi_archive1_dr1 Dismount Delay 300 Select New Drive Path LTO gt gt dev sg2 ka Compression Enabled Yes C No Y Apply Reset X Cancel E Local intranet ld Z 3 Modify any of the following information Drive Name The name of the modified drive e Dismount Delay Change the dismount delay time in seconds Select New Drive Path The drop down menu displays available drive paths to which the drive can be changed e Compression Enabled Choose Yes to enable or No to disable compression 4 After making drive modifications click Apply 5 After the Status Screen informs you that your modifications were made successfully click Close Deleting a Tape Drive __ Use this procedure to delete a configured tape drive 1 From the SNSM home page choose Drive gt Config from the Admin menu The Configure Drives screen appears 2 From the Configured Drive List select the drive you want to delete and then click Delete A message prompts you to confirm that you want to delete the drive There is no undo function that will undelete the drive if you change your mind so be absolutely certain you want to delete the drive before you continue StorNext User s Guide 197 Figure 138 Delete Warning Window Changing a Drive State Figure 139 Change Drive State Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 8 Managing Drives and Di
366. t User s Guide Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Entering the StorNext License 7 Click OK to close the message box 8 In order to receive your permanent StorNext license you must email to licenses quantum com the following information as listed on the Enter License Strings screen figure 22 on page 44 The StorNext serial number from the StorNext box or CD The total number of StorNext SAN clients if any you want to license for your system This is the total number of client machines that are connected to a StorNext server through a fibre channel or iSCSI interface The StorNext server ID displayed on the screen In the figure the ID is 1617GA24E1 The total number of distributed LAN clients if any you want to license for your system This is the total number of distributed LAN clients connected to StorNext via a distributed LAN server For more information about distributed LAN clients see About Distributed LAN Clients on page 2 9 Quantum will email you a license string for SAN clients If you are using distributed LAN clients they will also send you a separate license string for distributed LAN client usage When you receive the license strings copy and paste them into the License String field on the Enter License Strings screen figure 22 on page 44 Click Next to continue The Complete Enter License screen appears 46 Figure 25 Complete Enter License Screen Permanent Entering a License String in t
367. t gt For example mount t cvfs snfs1 stornext snfs1 Adding a File System Client StorNext User s Guide Use this procedure to add a file system client using the CLI 1 Install StorNext as described in the StorNext Installation Guide Follow the instructions that pertain to your operating system Copy the example fsnameservers file to the config directory by typing cp usr cvfs examples fsnameservers example usr cvfs config fsnameservers Caution The fsnameservers file must be the same on all machines Edit the etc fstab file to mount on boot for Solaris edit the etc vfstab file 4 Reboot the machine 5 Verify that the system has mounted by typing the following df k If your machine did not mount on boot refer to Resolving Installation Problems in the StorNext Installation Guide 361 Configuring a Stripe Group Configuring a Stripe Group Following is an example of a stripe group configuration in a file system configuration file You can use a text editor to modify any of these variables The values shown might not be representative of typical definitions Caution Modifying the following variables might result in a complete loss of user data and a re make of the file system e Metadata e StripeBreadth e Removing a Node StripeGroup StripeGroup1 Status UP Exclusive Yes MetaData Yes Journal Yes Read Enabled Write Enabled StripeBread
368. t if planning to use stripe group for meta data and or Disk journal data Meta Data Journal User Data V amp StorNext Back Next gt X Cancel 12 Enter values for the Customize Stripe Group screen e Name Field The name of the stripe group e Select disks list The disks available to assign to the stripe group You must select at least one disk for each stripe group e Label Type If you plan to create LUNs larger than 2TB you must specify the EFI label type when configuring a file system VTOC labels were used for all operating systems in previous StorNext and Xsan releases and are still required for the SGI IRIX operating system Solaris releases prior to Solaris 10 Update 2 and LUNs less than 1TB EFI labels are required if you plan to create LUNs that are larger than 2TB For Solaris EFI labels are also required for LUNs with a raw capacity greater than 1TB EFI labels will not work with the IRIX operating system The correct value is automatically selected when you reach the Customize Stripe Groups screen so you can accept the default value unless you have a reason to change the label type StorNext User s Guide 88 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With File Systems For more information about 2TB LUN requirements see the StorNext Installation Guide Label Help Click this link to display guidelines for determining whether to select VTOC or EFI labels The matrix looks li
369. t the file system by typing the following lusr cvfs bin cvadmin snadmin gt start sfile system name snadmin activate sfile system name snadmin select sfile system name snadmin show Mount the file system by typing the following mount t cvfs sfile system name mount point For example mount t cvfs snfs1 stornext snis1 Create an affinity directory association by typing the following ust cvfs bin cvmkdir k lt affinity_name gt lt directory_name gt For example usr cvfs bin cvmkdir k data1_aff stornext snfs1 video_data This associates all data written to stornext snfs1 video_data with stripe group Data1 and therefore disks CvfsDisk2 and CvfsDisk3 Creating a Disk to Disk Policy Class StorNext User s Guide Use this procedure to create a disk to disk specific policy class You must have at least two affinities configured to create a disk to disk policy class Before initially executing any StorNext command line programs you are required to source either the profile or the cshrc file This will update the user environment with the StorNext environment variables e Ifyou are running sh ksh or bash type usr adic profile e For all other shells type 365 Modifying a Disk to Disk Policy Class Manual Disk to Disk Relocation StorNext User s Guide Creating a Disk to Disk Policy Class source usr adic cshrc Use the fsaddclass command to create a new policy class by typing
370. t to make the selected file system 106 Starting and Stopping the File System Figure 65 Start or Stop File System Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Managing File System Operations 3 Click OK A second confirmation screen warns that all data will be lost on the selected file system 4 Click OK 5 After the status screen informs you that the task has completed successfully click Close This task enables you to start or stop a file system You need to stop a file system if you want to take it out of service to make configuration changes or perform other administrative tasks You need to start a file system to place it back into service 1 From the SNFS home page choose Start Stop File System from the Admin menu The Start or Stop File System screen appears Note Unselectable greyed out file systems in the Start or Stop File System screen require a metadata dump in order to be started This does not apply for SNFS only systems 7 ig Quantum i g StorNext Home Help Contig Admin Reports Help Start or Stop FI Home Select an inactive fi SNFS SNSM 7 Mount the tie system inactive File Systems Active File Systems File Systems snis File Systems ente Stop StorNext kazar Active E StertiSt0p Fle System Local intranet 2 Do one of the following e Select a file system from the Inactive File Systems list and click St
371. ted unmount the file system as described in Mounting or Unmounting a File System on page 108 2 Ifthe file system is started stop the file system as described in Starting and Stopping the File System on page 107 3 From the SNFS home page choose Affinities from the Config menu The Add Modify or Delete Affinities screen appears StorNext User s Guide 127 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Affinities Figure 78 Add Modify or ore ae re Delete Affinities Screen es dis ports Hop EE du ed Hone Add Modify or Delete Affinities Selec a Me system Then press the Add button for new aMfinities or select an existing afinity and press the MOGA or Delete duton SNFS Complete Aminity process SNSM p Add an Affinity system Sat amry to a Dwactory The Add Affinity Wizard will do both these steps file Systems snis xj Affinities in snfs2 Add Modify Delete A StorNext spock Active 4 From the File Systems drop down menu select the file system to which you want to add the affinity and then click Add The Add Affinity screen appears Figure 79 Add Affinity Screen gomaren e ele Quantum Add Affinity Affinity Name i EE Select Stripe Groups StripeGroup1 MetaData Journal OK X Cancel 5 Select a Stripe Group with which to associate the affinity and then type a name for the affinity in the Affinity Name Field Affinity
372. tem damage could occur Adding a Stripe Group Use the following procedure to expand the file system by adding a stripe Without Moving group and not migrating 1 Label disks for the new stripe groups you want to add to the file system 2 If your StorNext configuration includes a failover environment you must first shut down any standby FSMs that would start when you shut down the primary FSM The movement procedure will not complete successfully unless all FSMs are shut down Caution If you do not shut down standby FSMs file system corruption or data loss could occur 3 Optional Run the cvfsck command on the file system See Checking the File System 4 Add the new stripe groups to the file system 5 Stop the File System Manager FSM StorNext User s Guide 372 Adding and Moving a Data Stripe Group StorNext User s Guide Using the Dynamic Resource Allocation Feature 6 Run the cvupdatefs command 7 Restart the FSM New functionality has been added to the snfsdefrag utility to support operations on multiple stripe groups Note During Stripe Group Movement affinities are preserved when files are moved from one stripe group to another When you create a new stripe group to use with the Stripe Group Movement feature the new stripe group must include sufficient space for its affinities You must add any affinities from the source stripe group to the new stripe group
373. th 16 MultiPathMethod Rotate Node fortune1 0 StripeGroup StripeGroup2 Status UP Affinity media Read Enabled Write Enabled StripeBreadth 16 Rtios 100 Rtmb 100 RtiosReserve 100 RtmbReserve 100 MultiPathMethod Rotate Node fortune2 0 StorNext User s Guide 362 Adding an Affinity Adding an Affinity This procedure lets you set stripe group affinities for assigning file locations to a specific file system stripe group All subsequent allocations to a file that have been assigned a valid stripe group affinity will occur on the specified stripe group Affinities may also be assigned to files and directories using the cvaffinity command For more information about the cvaffinity command refer to the CLI Reference Guide 1 Unmount the file system by typing the following umount lt mount_point gt where the lt mount_point gt is where you have mounted the SNFS For example umount stornext snfs1 2 Use cvadmin to stop the file system by typing the following usr cvfs bin cvadmin snadmin stop sfile system name where the sfile system name is the file system to which the affinity will be added snadmin gt quit 3 Using a text editor open the file system configuration file lt file_system_name gt cfg where lt file_system_name gt is the name of the file system StorNext User s Guide 363 StorNext User s Guide Adding an Affinity 4 Locate the stripe group section and select the stripe group to
374. that you list two machines Typically the selected systems are also configured for FSM services but this is not a requirement If the fsnameservers file does not exist then the file system operates as a local file system requiring both a client and a server The file system will not communicate with any other StorNext File System product on the network thus eliminating the sharing of the FSS over the SAN Caution Itis extremely important that all copies of usr cvfs config fsnameserver file in a SAN be identical A stale configuration on a system that is not in use can cause election problems if fsmpm processes are running with mismatched fsnameservers It is also critical to verify that complete network connectivity exists between all systems running SNFS client or server This is important because all StorNext systems participate in the failover process After you type the IP addresses of two reliable machines on your network in the fsnameservers file copy the fsnameservers file to every machine running SNFS After changing the fsnameservers file always restart stop and start all file system services running on the SNFS Redundant NICs are supported in the fsnameservers file simply list both NIC addresses in the file Use the following procedures to make or re make a file system Caution This task destroys all existing data for the selected file system and creates a new configuration Making
375. the Trash can is enabled Unmanaged File System A file system that does not have archive capability controlled by SNSM 326 StorNext User s Guide Appendix A 2 m Operating Guidelines This appendix contains information pertinent to operating StorNext as well as some operating guidelines and limitations you should consider The Reserved Space Parameter As of StorNext 3 0 the method of accounting for reserved space has changed The MaxMBPerClientReserve parameter from the StorNext file system configuration file usr evfs config cfg has been deprecated All values except 0 are ignored for this parameter In addition there is a new parameter ReservedSpace The ReservedSpace parameter lets the administrator control the use of delayed allocations on clients ReservedSpace is a performance feature that lets clients perform buffered writes on a file without first obtaining real allocations from the metadata controller MDC The ReservedSpace parameter can be set to Yes or No StorNext User s Guide 327 The Reserved Space Parameter e Yes Default The MDC reserves enough disk space so that delayed allocations can be converted to real allocations even when the MDC is restarted and the client is not The MDC reserves a minimum of about 4GB for each stripe group and up to 280MBs per actively writing client for each stripe group Note The amount of reserved space is usually less than 280MB per client Reser
376. the file system is not active or not mounted e File System The name of the file system You might see more than one file system being monitored depending upon how your StorNext system is configured This pane is scrollable to accommodate numerous file systems e Total Space GB Total space in GB for the file system e Used Space GB Currently used space in GB for the file system e Free Space GB Amount of free space in GB for the file system Used Inodes The number of inodes currently in use on the file system e Store Candidates Number of files selected for storage to secondary media e Trunc Candidates Number of files that have been stored and meet the criteria to become a truncation candidate 10 Figure 4 Library Monitor StorNext User s Guide Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview The StorNext Home Page Note The Store Candidates and Trunc Candidates fields show N A for a non managed file system For a managed file system if these fields show refresh click the Refresh button to retrieve current information for these fields e SAN Clients The number of StorNext SAN clients connected via fibre channel or iSCSI for which you are licensed e LAN Clients The number of StorNext distributed LAN clients for which you are licensed For more information about distributed LAN clients see About Distributed LAN Clients on page 2 e Status The status shows the system status usage in
377. the necessary steps to start or stop SNFS Please review your selections and click on Next to apply them or click Back to make changes Stop StorNext File System Ej Back Next gt X Cancel 4 On the Complete Start Stop SNFS screen do one of the following e Click Cancel to exit the Complete Start Stop SNFS screen without saving e Click Back to return to the Start Stop SNFS screen e Click Next to proceed A status window appears 5 If you clicked Next click Close when the status window displays Success StorNext User s Guide 37 Chapter 3 SNFS Only GUI Overview The SNFS Configuration Wizard The SNFS Configuration Wizard Figure 19 SNFS Configuration Wizard Screen StorNext User s Guide SNFS includes a Configuration Wizard that guides you through the steps necessary to obtain a StorNext license and create a file system You can complete these steps at any time and the wizard will resume at the remaining step if you do not finish completing both tasks If desired you can select the option Don t Show CW Again to prevent the wizard from automatically appearing the next time you launch StorNext Alternatively you can complete the two tasks without launching the Configuration Wizard by clicking the shortcuts Enter License or Add File System Access the Configuration Wizard by clicking the Configuration Wizard shortcut on the home page The first screen of the Configuration Wizard a
378. the tape library s control panel resolved 2 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 3 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www quantum com support OR 4 If you are a properly trained service professional perform the procedures required for this type of tape library StorNext User s Guide 411 Figure 51 Robotics Wrong Firmware Level lnvalid Library Type RAS StorNext User s Guide Other RAS Messages Recommended Actions Robotics Wrong Firmware Level Invalid Library Type IF The serice ticket indicates the tape library s firmware level is wrong The service ticket indicates the tape library type is invalid The problem IS resolved The problem has NOT been resolved THEN Use the tape library s control panel to verify the firmware level for this release against the StorNext Release Notes Contact your library vendor to obtain the proper firmware Disconnect the tape library and contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center using the contact information below Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101
379. tion Pane on the left side of the screen contains links to the SNES and SNSM home pages along with a Home button to return to the main StorNext Home Page e The SNFS Home Page In SNFS mode you perform file system specific tasks The SNFS Home Page contains several drop down menus Config Admin and Reports e The SNSM Home Page In SNSM mode you perform administrative storage manager tasks The SNSM Home Page contains several drop down menus File Media Admin and Reports The SNFS Home Page __ The SNFS Home Page contains the following components e Drop down menus that enable you to perform file system specific administration tasks StorNext User s Guide 20 Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview The SNFS and SNSM Home Pages e A file system monitor e System and server status indicators Figure 9 SNFS Home Page a i Quantum gt StorNext Help Config Admin Reports _Nelo gt l Home File System Monitor UG Aotresh Retesh Rate No Retesh ous Space Us stor OE SNFS SNSM f j Al StorNext kazar L Active Eise IIe Note The figure shows the SNFS Home Page as it appears when it is part of the full StorNext application The interface for the SNFS standalone application looks slightly different but has many of the same major features SNFS Home Page Drop Use the drop down menus on the SNFS home page as you would from Down Menus the StorNext Home Page when performing file syst
380. to add the device slot combination to the Type gt gt Device gt gt Slot list 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each device and slot combination StorNext User s Guide 195 Chapter 8 Managing Drives and Disks Working with Tape Drives Note If you want to enable compression on some devices but not others in the Type gt gt Device gt gt Slot list you must complete this procedure twice once to enable compression on selected devices and a second time to specify devices without compression Modifying a Tape Drive __ Use this procedure to modify configured tape drives 1 From the SNSM home page choose Drive gt Config from the Admin menu The Configure Drives screen appears Figure 136 Configure Drives 7 F IE Quantum dd StorNext Home Help Screen a fue meda Admin Reports Heip Configure Drives Home Select an existing SNSM drive t Odiy or delete Select Modfy to set the delayed dismount time to change Me drive name or to enadis or disable Grive Compression SNFS SNSM Select Dave L Add Configured Drive List sesi archive dr scsi archivel dr2 sesi archivel dr3 Modify Delete StorNext kazar Waring 2 Select a drive from the Configured Drive List and then click Modify The Modify Drive screen appears StorNext User s Guide 196 Chapter 8 Managing Drives and Disks Working with Tape Drives Figure 137 Modify Drive Screen 2 Modify Configured Drive Microsoft Interne
381. to generate a 30 day temporary license This option is not available when you access the Enter License wizard so if you want to generate a 30 day temporary license you must access the Enter License wizard from the StorNext Configuration wizard 1 From the StorNext home page choose Enter License from the Config menu Alternatively click Step 1 Enter License in the StorNext Configuration wizard The Enter License Introduction screen appears StorNext User s Guide 41 Figure 20 Enter License Introduction Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Entering the StorNext License 2 Enter License Microsoft Internet Explorer License SOGOEGYEHS 2 Click Next to continue The Ouantum license agreement appears You must accept the license agreement in order to continue with the licensing process 42 Figure 21 Quantum License Agreement StorNext User s Guide Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Entering the StorNext License Quantum Corporation End User License Agreement This License defines the terms and conditions of the license between and Licensee for use of QUANTUM software and related documentation Any software or related materials provided to Licensee by QUANTUM will be subject to the terms and conditions of this License and by opening the accompanying package and or by using the products Licensee signifies its agreement with this license 1 Software License a License
382. to move the selected media type from the Configured list to the Unconfigured list or the left arrow to move the selected media type from the Unconfigured list to the Configured list 4 When you are finished moving media to the appropriate list click Apply The Modify Library Status screen appears 5 After the status screen indicates that the library has been modified click Close Deleting a Library Before you delete a library you must do the following e Remove ALL media from the library as described in Removing Media on page 217 StorNext User s Guide 184 Chapter 7 Managing Libraries Rescanning a Library e Delete ALL drives associated with the library as described in Deleting a Tape Drive on page 197 1 From the SNSM home page choose Library gt Config Library from the Admin menu The Configure Library screen figure 126 on page 183 appears 2 Select from the Select Library list the library you want to delete and then click Delete A message window prompts you to confirm that you want to delete the library 3 Click OK to proceed The Delete Library Status screen appears 4 After the status screen indicates that the library has been deleted click Close EE EE EER EE N na es Rescanning a Library Whenever you add drive slots or media slots to your library you should use the Rescan function to ensure that StorNext recognizes the new devices and can fully utilize them This function does not apply to vaults
383. torNext Back Next gt X Cancel 3 Select any of the following options e Enable Disk to Disk Select this option to activate the Disk to Disk Relocation feature For more information about Disk to Disk Relocation see Disk to Disk Relocation on page 253 e Enable Checksum Generation If enabled checksums are generated and retained in the database for files stored by the corresponding policy class e Enable Checksum Validation If enabled checksums are compared to retained values for the files retrieved by the corresponding policy class e Enable Stub Files Select this option to enable the Stub Files feature For more information about Stub Files see Stub Files on page 252 StorNext User s Guide 255 Figure 188 Directory Browser Window StorNext User s Guide Chapter 11 Data Migration Management Adding a Storage Policy 4 Click Browse The Directory Browser window appears EET RE TES Current Directory stomexys nfs1 pel Create Directory Select Directory Directory List testfiles X Cancel 5 Selecta directory that contains the files you want to migrate and then click OK The Policy Class and Directory screen figure 187 reappears showing the directory you specified 6 Review your selections and click Next If you enabled the disk to disk relocation feature the Relocation Policy Selection screen appears If you did not enable disk to disk reloc
384. tributed LAN Server Client Network and Memory Tuning Distributed LAN Server and Client Network Tuning StorNext User s Guide Using the Distributed LAN Server and Client feature places significant additional demands on network capacity and system memory Before creating and using a Distributed LAN Server and Client review the following information e Distributed LAN Server and Client Network Tuning e Distributed LAN Server Memory Tuning Note For additional information about Distributed LAN Client and server performance tuning see the StorNext File System Tuning Guide Due to significant demands placed on the network the following network issues can occur when using Distributed LAN Servers and clients e Configuring Dual NICs If the Distributed LAN Server has two network interface cards NICs each card must have a different address and reside on a different subnet In addition to take advantage of a second NIC in a Distributed LAN Server the Distributed LAN Clients must also have a second connected network interface e Dropped Packets Some Ethernet switches may be unable to accommodate the increased throughput demands required by the Distributed LAN Server and client feature and will drop packets This causes TCP retransmissions resulting in a significant performance loss On Linux this can be observed as an increase in the Segments Retransmitted count in netstat s output during Distributed LAN Cl
385. u automatically but the process can take longer than if you do the metadump manually Stripe Group Movement moves data files off one or more data stripe groups onto the remaining data stripe groups in a file system which frees data LUNS so they can be decommissioned or reused In a similar way the metadata on a single LUN can be moved to a new LUN StorNext provides a Movement Wizard to simplify these processes which is launched when you select Move Stripe Group from the Admin menu on the SNFS home page During data stripe group movement you indicate one or more source stripe groups from which to move data StorNext automatically moves all data from the source stripe groups to the remaining stripe groups in the file system All other data stripe groups are targets allowing an even distribution of data across remaining disk resources During movement the file system is online and read write operations occur normally but the source data stripe group s are in read only mode write disabled After all data has been removed from the source stripe group you must mark the stripe group as down which prevents new data from being written to the source stripe group At this point the source LUNs are empty and read only so there will be no access to them Although stripe group and LUN configuration line items must never be deleted from a configuration once its corresponding file system has been created marking a stripe group as
386. uctions found The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Service Tickets The problem has NOT been resolved 1 Modify the ticket according to the troubleshooting steps taken Refer to Analyzing Service Tickets 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center In the USA 1 800 284 5101 UK France and Germany 00800 4 QUANTUM EMEA 44 1256 848 766 On the Web http www guantum com support StorNext User s Guide 390 Figure 19 Storage Disk Taken Offline RAS SNFS RAS Messages Storage Disk Taken Offline IF THEN A storage disk exceeds ds tmlure 1 Verity that the file system can be reached NFS and rs still mounted and accessible threshold and s taken offline 2 Ifthe storage disk is located on a CFVS file system check the File System Manager FSM A dedupbcaton enabled storage disks 1 Try bringing the dedup sdisk back onbne taken offline 2 if this doesnt work run the health checks on the media to validate the blockpool used for deduplication After ventymg bang the dedup sdisk back onbne 3 if the storage disk is located on a CFVS file system check the File System Manager F SM The above recommended actions apply only to deduplication enabled storage disks The problem IS resolved Close the service ticket Refer to Closing Senice Tickets The problem has NOT been resolved 2 Contact the Quantum Technical Assestance Center In the USA 14800 264 5101 UK France and Ger
387. upi Stripe Breadth 64 Kilobytes Label Type VTOC MetaData Yes lt Back Next gt X Cancel zi 15 Review your selections Click Next to complete the task or Back to make changes 16 After the status screen informs you that the file system was successfully added click Next An alternative way to create a file system is to do so from the SNFS home page However this method is a more advanced task and requires steps that are simplified when you create a file system through the Configuration Wizard or by choosing Add File System from the StorNext home page s Admin menu For this reason the preferred method of creating a file system is the one described in Adding a File System on page 83 The following steps are required to create a file system from the SNFS home page 1 Add a file system 91 Figure 56 Configure File System Screen StorNext User s Guide Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With File Systems 2 Modify the file system s global settings 3 Add disks to the file system 4 Add stripe groups for the file system 5 Make the file system 6 Start the new file system 7 Mount the new file system 8 Add affinities to the new file system Each of the above steps is explained in the following procedure 1 From the SNFS home page choose File System from the Config menu The Configure File System screen appears Gr Quantum F l StorNext Home Help Config Admin Reports H
388. ups must have exactly one affinity association but several stripe groups can be associated to the same affinity This restriction does not apply to exclusive metadata or journal stripe groups e Atleast one policy class must be created to use the configured affinities Caution You must designate at least one data stripe group in each managed file system as non exclusive If you do not make this designation writing to the area of the file system that is not associated with any of the affinities will result in an out of space error Deleting affinities from a file system configuration after the file system has been in use for a while could result in abnormal behavior Contact the Quantum Technical Assistance Center before deleting affinities from a file system configuration Performing a Metadata Dump This procedure replaces any existing metadata dump data for the selected file system and should be run only if the metadata file has been lost or corrupted StorNext User s Guide 133 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Using the SNSM File System Functions 1 From the SNFS home page choose Metadata Dump from the Admin menu The Metadata Dump of File System screen appears Figure 83 Metadata Dump of BA p Quantum ron s StorNext Home Help File System Screen N ss akade k ong aamin Reports Hep E Metadata Dump of File System Home odode ven kom nthe Bat CAC 2604 io Ott orm an metadata s dump
389. ure 37 4 Click Add The third Schedule Events screen appears EE slolxd Screen 3 Quantum Schedule Event Name backup defaut Days ofWeek SelectDays Day of Month SelectDays RunTime 10 7 Joo 7 PM gt Start Window 3hours Back VY Apply X Cancel 5 Inthe Name field enter a name for the new schedule 6 Select either Days of Week or Days of Month e Ifyou selected Days of Week select the days on which you want the event to run To select multiple days hold down the CTRL key when you select subsequent days e If you selected Days of Month select the calendar dates on which you want the event to run To select multiple dates hold down the CTRL key when you select subsequent dates 7 Atthe Run Time field specify the time of day you want the event to begin StorNext User s Guide 63 Modifying an Existing Schedule StorNext User s Guide Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Scheduling StorNext Events 8 At the Start Window field specify the window in which you want 10 the StorNext Scheduler to start the event The Scheduler attempts to begin the event within the specified Start Window time e g 30 minutes If the event cannot begin at that time the Scheduler tries again during the next cycle Do one of the following e Click Apply to save your entry and create the new schedule When the Status screen displays Success click Close e Click Cancel to exit the screen
390. ure 73 Figure 74 Complete Backup Task Screen sesse se ses ee ke ee se Ge ke es 79 Backup Policy Serei sesse giese eke s gek or de ge a de 80 File System Introduction Screen se see se ee Ge ee 83 Add New File System Screen se see se se ee Ge Ge Ge ee Ge ee 84 Directory Browser WindOW ees ese se see Ge Ge ee Ge Ge Ge ee be ee 85 Select Directory Window esse sesse se se ee Ge Ge ee Ge Ge Ge ee be ee 85 Disk Settings Screen ie see ee Ge Ge ee He niaii 86 Customize Stripe Group Screen ou se se ee se se Ge ee ee ee 88 Label Help Screen ani eeste EE Se GE Ee DES putin ee 89 Complete File System Task Screen esse sesse ee ee 91 Configure File System Screen ee ee ee ee ee ee 92 Modify File System Window c cece Ge ee Ge Ge Ge ee be ee 94 Label Disk Device Screen see eek ee ee Se bek RR SR ERK ee ge es 97 Labeling VOE ut N N EE ED 98 Label Name Window uuu ccc se ee Ge Ge ee He Ge Ge ee Ge Ge ee ee 98 Data boss Warm gis ei Ee RS Ee Ee see SG ge ke Re Gegee Ge Ee DE gee 99 Unlabel Warning iese ese sees ee ee ese ER ee Ee eke ESE Nee eE 99 Modify Global Settings Screen oo ie se ee se ee ee ee ek 101 Make File System Screen se ee se ee He Ge ee Ge Ge ee ee 106 Start or Stop File System Screen ie see ee ek ee ee ek 107 Mount or Unmount File System Screen sesse see ee 108 Manage Disks Screen ees ie se see ee eip He Ge ee Ee e 110 Add Disk Screef iis ester GEGEE SEE See Ee ee ER se EE ese e ee Ee
391. used for all operating systems in previous StorNext and Xsan releases and are still required for the SGI IRIX operating system Solaris releases prior to Solaris 10 Update 2 and LUNs less than 1TB e Label Label any unused devices or relabel any device e Unlabel Unlabel any device in use by the file system e Probe Pulse a disk s activity light Caution If you unlabel a device all data on that device will be lost Additionally the unlabeled device will no longer be used by a StorNext file system until it is relabeled 97 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Managing File System Operations 2 From the Disk Devices list select the device you want to label unlabel or probe and then click Label Labeling a Device Use the following procedure to label a disk device 1 Specify the label type by choosing VTOC or EFI at the Select Label Type field 2 Click Label A message window warns you that the device might have a file system on it and that labeling the device will destroy any data Figure 59 Labeling Warning Microsoft Internet Explorer H x C This device may have a file system on it ba Labeling it will destroy all data on the disk Do you want to continue j Cancel 3 Verify that the disk you are labeling is empty and then click OK to close the message window The Label Name window appears Figure 60 Label Name Window Explorer User Prompt ia i x Script Prompt
392. ved space is calculated as 110 of the buffer cache size of each particular client For example a client with a 64MB buffer cache is allocated 70MBs of reserved space by the MDC If the client closes all files that are open for write the 7OMBs of space is no longer accounted for It is important to remember that reserved space is per stripe group e No More disk space is available for use but buffer cache performance is affected and fragmentation may occur If the MaxMBPerClientReserve parameter exists in the configuration file and has a value of 0 ReservedSpace is set to No Otherwise ReservedSpace defaults to Yes Note In prior releases of StorNext MaxMBPerClientReserve defaulted to 100MBs and reserved space was the product of MaxMBPerClientReserve multiplied by MaxConnections 1 In StorNext 3 0 the MDC tracks the actual amount of reserved space that clients use but caps the value to about 280MBs per client In addition the MDC maintains a minimum level of reserved space As a result in some cases more reserved space may be visible Reserved space appears as allocated disk space per data stripe group The minimum reserved space is enough to accommodate 15 clients or MaxConnections 1 whichever is lower For example if a cluster has a MaxConnections of 3 the reserved space total can be under 1GB StorNext User s Guide 328 Distributed LAN Server Client Network and Memory Tuning Dis
393. vents Figure 36 Schedule Events Screen 1 2 Select an event type Clean Info Clean Versions Full Backup Health Check Partial Backup Rebuild Policy 3 Click Configure The second Schedule Events screen displays the selected event type and any existing schedules StorNext User s Guide 61 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Scheduling StorNext Events Figure 37 Schedule Events Z Schedule Events Microsoft Internet Explorer aa Ci xf Screen 2 7 Quantum Schedule Events Schedule Name Full Backup O Name r f backup default 22 00 3 hours lt Back Add Modify l Delete Reset X Close 4 Click Close when you are finished viewing the schedule You can also click Back to return to the previous screen aama a New Srhadnla Use the following procedure to schedule StorNext events The procedure A N hedul task edad E for adding a new schedule for an eventis the same regardless of the event type 1 From the StorNext Home Page select Schedule Events from the Admin menu The first Schedule Events screen appears figure 36 2 Select the type of event you want to schedule e Clean Info e Clean Versions e Full Backup e Health Check e Partial Backup e Rebuild Policy StorNext User s Guide 62 Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Scheduling StorNext Events 3 Click Configure The second Schedule Events screen displays the selected event type and any existing schedules fig
394. which you want to add the affinity Following is part of a stripe group configuration with an affinity definition StripeGroup StripeGroup2 Status UP Affinity aff1 Read Enabled Write Enabled StripeBreadth 16 Node disk2 0 StripeGroup StripeGroupal Status UP Affinity aff2 Read Enabled Write Enabled StripeBreadth 16 Node disk3 0 Node disk4 1 Node disk5 2 If you create a directory association with Affinity aff1 all data written to that directory is written to StripeGroup StripeGroup2 and therefore only to Disk disk2 If you make an association with Affinity aff2 and a separate directory in the file system all data is directed to StripeGroup StripeGroup3 which contains three disks disk3 disk4 and disk5 All data is written to these disks when directed to the associated directory with Affinity aff2 Add the affinity to the selected stripe group with a line entry in this format Affinity lt affinity_name gt where lt affinity_name gt is the name of the affinity Affinity names cannot be longer than eight characters Following is an example of a stripe group configuration after an affinity was added The affinity line is the flag for the Data1 stripe group StripeGroup Data Status UP Read Enabled Write Enabled 364 Creating a Disk to Disk Policy Class Affinity datalaff StripeBreadth 512 Node CvfsDisk2 0 Node CvfsDisk3 1 6 Save and close the configuration file 7 Use cvadmin to star
395. wing the Health Check Tests or the History screen you can Results check the details of the Last Status of a particular health check The following example shows how to run the last status check from the Health Check Tests screen 1 From the StorNext home page choose Health Check from the Service menu The Health Check Tests screen figure 233 appears 2 Click the Last Status link Pass or Fail The Health Check Results screen appears showing the results of the last health check run This screen is the same as the Results screen that appears when you click Details on the Health Check History screen See figure 235 3 After you are finished viewing the results click Close StorNext User s Guide 314 Chapter 13 Service Management Using State Capture Using State Capture The StorNext State Capture tool enables you to create a log that captures the current state of your system This log assists Quantum support personnel analyze and debug some problems in the storage system When you use the State Capture tool StorNext creates a log file named using the format snapshot machinehostname YYYYMMDDHHMMSS tar gz This file contains a summary report that is produced by executing the pse_snapshot command on all component config filelist files If desired you can download or delete a previously captured file When you are finished using the State Capture tool you can return to the StorNext home page or select another tool or option
396. without saving your entries The Schedule Events window closes e Click Back to return to the previous screen When you click Back you lose anything you entered on the Add screen On the first Schedule Events screen click one of the following e Back Go back to the previous screen e Add Add anew schedule e Modify Change an existing schedule e Delete Delete an existing schedule e Reset Reset the schedule to the default settings e Close Close the window The procedure for modifying an existing schedule for an event is the same regardless of the event type 1 From the StorNext Home Page select Schedule Events from the Admin menu The first Schedule Events screen appears figure 36 2 Select an event type e Clean Info e Clean Versions e Full Backup e Health Check e Partial Backup e Rebuild Policy 64 Deleting an Existing Schedule StorNext User s Guide Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Scheduling StorNext Events Click Configure The second Schedule Events screen displays the selected event type and any existing schedules figure 37 Select the schedule you want to change and then click Modify The third Schedule Events screen appears figure 38 5 Inthe Name field view or change the name for the new schedule 6 Select either Days of the Week or Days of the Month e Ifyou selected Days of the Week view or change the days on which you want the event to run To select multiple days hold do
397. wn the CTRL key when you select subsequent days e Ifyou selected Days of the Month view or change the calendar dates on which you want the event to run To select multiple dates hold down the CTRL key when you select subsequent dates At the Run Time field view or change the time of day you want the event to begin At the Start Window field view or change the window in which you want the StorNext Scheduler to start the event The Scheduler attempts to begin the event within the specified Start Window time e g 30 minutes If the event cannot begin at that time the Scheduler tries again during the next cycle Do one of the following e Click Apply to save your changes and modify the new schedule When the Status screen displays Success click Close e Click Cancel to exit the screen without saving your changes The Schedule Events window closes e Click Back to return to the previous screen When you click Back you lose any changes you made on the Modify screen The procedure for deleting an existing schedule for an event is the same regardless of the event type For every event type except Partial Backup you must have at least one schedule so you will not be allowed to delete a solitary schedule 1 From the StorNext Home Page select Schedule Events from the Admin menu The first Schedule Events screen appears figure 36 65 Resetting a Schedule StorNext User s Guide Chapter 4 Common StorNext Tasks Sche
398. x 3 5 extended LDAP schema applied and Windows 2003 Server R2 When a file or directory is created on Windows the UNIX modes are controlled by the following file system configuration parameters UnixDirectoryCreationModeOnWindows Default 0755 UnixFileCreationModeOnWindows Default 0644 StorNext allows one set of values for all users of each file system Note Administrators can manually change these values in the file system configuration file on the server or use the Windows or Web GUI Due to the implementation of the Windows Active Directory user mappings services for UNIX can take up to 10 minutes to be propagated to StorNext clients If multiple mappings are found for a given Windows user the following precedence takes place e NIS PCNFSD If mapping exists e Fabricated IDs If configured on e LDAP RFC 2307 If defined in Active Directory e Nobody If no other mapping found 333 Setting Up Restrictive ACLs Navigating to the Authentication tab of the Client Configuration Windows utility gives the administrator the ability to disable the NIS PCNFSD mapping on a client by client basis by selecting Use Active Directory The domain server must be at least Windows 2003 or above to support RFC 2307 mapping Setting Up Restrictive ACLs When setting up restrictive ACLs on a SNFS file system it is important to understand how SNFS system services are run especially the account under wh
399. xt User s Guide 15 StorNext System Status StorNext User s Guide Chapter 2 StorNext GUI Overview The StorNext Home Page Service Menu Options The following Service menu options help you monitor and capture system status information Health Check Perform one or more health checks on StorNext and view recent health check results State Capture Obtain and preserve detailed information about the current StorNext system state System Status View tickets indicating faults reported by the StorNext system Admin Alerts View informational messages about system activities Help Menu Options The following Help menu options provide access to StorNext documentation Quantum contact information and detailed information about the version of StorNext you are using Online Help Provides a listing of StorNext online help topics that can be viewed in a separate browser window You can access this same topics list by clicking the Help icon in the upper right corner of the screen Documentation Provides access to the StorNext documentation set Clicking Help in the upper right corner of the screen displays this same page Support Allows you to access Quantum and Technical Support information About Provides detailed information about your version of StorNext its components and the system on which it is running Also lists StorNext patents The StorNext System Status button located at the bottom center of the StorNext
400. y Affinity Report Figure 221 Storage Disk Information Report Quantum Storage Disk Information Report Storage Disk ID Storage_Disk_1 Name Mount Point Copy of streams Status Storage_Disk_1 stornext snfs1 DDISK adic spock j 2 AVAIL Write Protected Last Access Time Files Space Used GB Space Remain GB N Mar 8 2007 08 27 40 0 4 31 185 35 State Deduplication Savings Total Data Stored MB Unique Data Stored MB FREE Enabled 0 00 0 00 0 00 X Close 3 Click Close when you are finished viewing the report SSS SSS HE EE NEE N Eos The Directory Affinity Report Use the following procedure to run the Affinities report 1 Choose SNFS gt Affinities from the Reports menu The Affinities Report screen appears StorNext User s Guide 298 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Directory Affinity Report Figure 222 Affinities Report T Report Directory Affinities Microsoft Internet Explorer Screen 2 Do one of the following e Inthe Select Individual Directory text box type the full path of the directory on which the to run the report Proceed to Step 4 e Click Browse to select a directory The Directory Browser screen appears StorNext User s Guide 299 Chapter 12 StorNext Reports The Directory Affinity Report Figure 223 Directory Browser Z Directory Browser Microsoft Inka Te Screen Current Directory Select Directory
401. ystem Working With Disks 1 Ifthe file system is mounted unmount the file system as described in Mounting or Unmounting a File System on page 108 2 Ifthe file system is started stop the file system as described in Starting and Stopping the File System on page 107 3 From the SNFS home page choose Disks from the Config menu The Manage Disks screen appears Figure 67 Manage Disks 7 ig EE Screen EDE AA a gt StorNext Home Help Contig Admin Repons Help Manage Disks Home Select a Me system and add new disks or delete existing ones For a disk lo be added it must already have SNFS SNFS label SNSM To make a new Me system available for use yal 2 Configure aiobals 3 Add disks 4 Add string groves 5 Make the file stem 6 3 l Sys 6 m 7 Mount ihe tie system File Systems snts2 kd Disks in snis Add Delete lt StorNext kazar Active E AddiDeete Dak EJ Loca intranet 4 From the File Systems drop down menu select the file system to which you want to add the disk and then click Add The Add Disk screen appears StorNext User s Guide 110 Chapter 6 Managing the File System Working With Disks Figure 68 Add Disk Screen 01x Quantum Add Disk Available Disks X Cancel 5 Select from the Available Disks list the disk you want to add to the file system You can select multiple disks by pressing the CTRL key and clicking the disk name Click OK to

Quantum 3.5.2 Marine Sanitation System User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents